RSS

Blog

Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock Parts: CS200 Series Complete Guide

The Schlage CS210 is the CS200 Series Grade 2 interconnected lock. It combines a cylindrical latch and deadbolt in one assembly so turning the inside lever retracts both simultaneously in one motion, meeting IBC and NFPA 101 single-motion egress requirements. The main replacement parts are the lever kit (06-242), rose (08-029), inside escutcheon (Camelot or Plymouth), outside housing (B500 commercial or B60 residential), strikes, and the interconnect assembly. The crimp-to-snap rose transition in August 2015 is the most important fact for parts ordering: pre-2015 units with crimp-on roses require the outside chassis assembly (F206-496) when changing levers or roses.

Interconnected locks are on more apartment building, hotel, dormitory, and assisted living entry doors than any other lock type in the multifamily residential sector. They are specified because they solve a specific problem that no other single hardware component solves: providing both a spring latch for automatic latching and a deadbolt for security, while allowing a single inside lever motion to retract both simultaneously for code-compliant egress.

The Schlage CS210 is the most widely installed commercial interconnected lock in North America. It carries ANSI/BHMA Grade 2 certification, UL 3-hour fire door listing, and a lifetime limited mechanical warranty. When one fails or requires a lever change, rose replacement, or escutcheon update, the rose generation transition in 2015 creates a parts compatibility issue that catches most technicians off guard. This guide covers every component, that transition, the code context, and exactly how to order. Browse the complete interconnected lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for CS210 diagrams and components.

Grade 2 ANSI/BHMA A156.12 certification on the Schlage CS210
UL 3hr Fire door listing on the CS210 with conventional cylinder
18 Lever designs available on the CS200 Series
Aug 2015 Crimp-on to snap-on rose transition date on the CS210
 

What an Interconnected Lock Is and Why It Exists

An interconnected lock is a single hardware assembly that combines two separate locking mechanisms, a spring latch and a deadbolt, with a mechanical interconnection that allows both to retract simultaneously when the inside lever is turned. From the outside, the lock operates as a standard keyed deadbolt entry. From the inside, turning the lever once retracts both the deadbolt and the latch in a single motion, allowing free exit without any separate deadbolt thumb turn operation.

This single-motion egress capability is the entire reason the category exists. IBC Section 1010.1.9 and NFPA 101 both require that doors in a means of egress unlatch with no more than one releasing motion. For most commercial occupancies, installing a separate cylindrical latch and a separate deadbolt creates a two-motion exit requirement that violates this code, because the occupant must turn the deadbolt thumb turn and then turn the lever separately to exit.

The interconnected lock solves this by making the inside lever turn the only operation needed for exit. The deadbolt and latch both retract together. The door opens. One motion. Code compliant.

 

The code nuance nobody explains fully: For residential Group R dwelling units (apartments, hotel rooms, dormitory rooms) with an occupant load of 10 or less, both IBC and NFPA 101 allow a separate deadbolt in addition to a latchset, provided the deadbolt can be released from the inside without a key or tool. This is why separate deadbolts are common on apartment doors in most jurisdictions. However, some states and local jurisdictions have adopted stricter requirements that mandate one-motion egress even on Group R dwelling unit entry doors. In those jurisdictions, a separate deadbolt with a separate latchset is not compliant, and an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only hardware solution for a door requiring both a latch and deadbolt. Always verify the local code before specifying hardware on any multi-family project.
 

Where the Schlage CS210 Is Specified

The CS210 appears most frequently on dwelling unit entry doors in commercial multi-family buildings: apartment complexes, condominiums, dormitories, extended-stay hotels, and assisted living facilities. The specific application logic that drives the CS210 specification is the need for resident-facing security with single-motion egress in a commercial-grade fire-rated assembly.

Assisted living facilities are a particularly important distinction. Assisted living units are classified as Residential Board and Care occupancies under NFPA 101, not standard residential occupancies. The residential dwelling unit exception that allows a separate deadbolt does not apply to assisted living units. On assisted living dwelling unit entry doors, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is required in most jurisdictions because a separate deadbolt and latchset do not comply with one-motion egress for this occupancy type.

For institutional dormitories, hotel properties, and any jurisdiction with accessible or adaptable unit requirements, interconnected locks are often specifically mandated by local code supplements to the IBC. Massachusetts 521 CMR, for example, explicitly requires interconnected locks on accessible and adaptable dwelling units.

 

CS210 vs Separate Deadbolt vs Mortise Lock: Which One Fits the Opening

 

Schlage CS210 Interconnected

 

Grade 2 | Single-Motion Egress
 

One lever motion retracts latch and deadbolt simultaneously. Required on dwelling unit doors where one-motion egress is mandated. Standard bore prep (2-1/8 inch crossbore). Grade 2. 18 lever styles. Adjustable for 4 or 5-1/2 inch center-to-center. UL 3-hour fire listed. Lifetime limited warranty.

 

Separate Deadbolt + Latchset

 

Grade 1 or 2 | Two Motions Inside

Allowed on Group R dwelling units (occupant load 10 or less) where local code permits. Requires two inside motions to exit when deadbolt is thrown. Not compliant on most commercial occupancy doors. Lower installed cost. Higher security grade options available. Acceptable for most apartment and hotel doors in most jurisdictions.

 

Schlage L Series Mortise Lock

 

Grade 1 | Integrated in Single Case
 

Latch and deadbolt integrated in a single mortise case. Single lever retracts both when outside is locked in most functions. Grade 1. 40-plus functions. Best for high-security institutional dwelling unit doors where Grade 1 strength is required. Higher cost and more complex installation than the CS210.

 

Every Component in the Schlage CS210

 

Outside Housing Assembly: B500 vs B60

The CS210 offers two outside deadbolt housing configurations. This is the first specification decision and it determines the security level of the entire assembly.

 

CS210-B500 (commercial spin ring): The B500 outside housing includes a free-spinning cylinder collar that resists wrenching and prying. It also includes a removeable security shield that protects the deadbolt from ice-pick attacks through the door face. These are the same security features found in the Schlage B600 Series Grade 1 deadbolt. The B500 housing is the correct specification for any commercial or institutional application where physical attack resistance matters. The cylinder collar spins freely under wrench pressure rather than providing purchase for torque.

CS210-B60 (residential spin ring): The B60 housing is the residential version for multi-family buildings where the aesthetic and cost profile of a residential deadbolt is appropriate and the additional attack resistance features of the B500 are not required by the specification.

Outside housing and rose compatibility warning: The outside housing assembly, the rose, and the cylinder collar are not universally interchangeable between configurations. When ordering a replacement outside housing assembly, always confirm whether the existing installation uses the B500 or B60 configuration before ordering. Substituting the wrong housing changes both the security level and potentially the aesthetic of the finished installation.
 

Lever Kit (Part 06-242)

The CS210 lever kit (part 06-242) includes two matching levers, one outside and one inside. The CS200 Series offers 18 lever designs allowing the CS210 to match the aesthetic of other Schlage hardware throughout the same building. Lever designs are available in seven finishes including satin chrome (626), brushed nickel (619), matte black, polished brass (605), aged bronze, and others.

Lever replacement is needed when a lever is physically damaged, when a finish change is required after a renovation, or when a lever becomes stiff or fails to return to horizontal due to internal spring fatigue. The lever kit includes both levers, which keeps inside and outside matching during replacement. Always confirm the finish code before ordering a replacement lever kit.

 

Rose (Part 08-029)

The rose is the circular cover plate visible on the door face around the outside lever and cylinder area. The CS210 offers two outside rose designs: Plymouth and Saturn. The rose is finish-specific. Part 08-029 is the standard rose for snap-on rose installations (August 2015 and later). For crimp-on rose installations (pre-August 2015), see the crimp-to-snap section below before ordering any rose replacement.

 

Inside Escutcheon: Camelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY) Designs

The inside escutcheon is the decorative plate on the interior face that covers the inside chassis and positions the inside lever and thumb-turn plate. The CS210 offers two inside escutcheon designs: Camelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY). Both designs are available in the same seven finishes as the levers.

The inside escutcheon houses the adjustable thumb-turn plate assembly that supports both the 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door prep conversions. The escutcheon plate adjustment is a field modification; no additional parts are ordered for a center-to-center conversion. If the escutcheon itself is damaged or a design change is required, the escutcheon is an individually replaceable component.

 

Interconnect Assembly

The interconnect assembly is the internal mechanism that links the inside lever to both the deadbolt and latch, enabling the simultaneous retraction in one motion. This is the component that makes an interconnected lock different from a standard cylindrical lock with a separate deadbolt.

The interconnect assembly carries the load of both the deadbolt spring and the latch spring when the inside lever is turned. This combined spring load requires slightly more torque to operate than either a latch-only or deadbolt-only lock. The design intent is that a healthy adult requires no additional force beyond a normal lever turn. However, the combined spring load can become problematic for elderly, infirm, or physically limited occupants on doors where both springs are at the high end of their adjustment range. If a CS210 installation is reporting difficulty operating the lever, check that neither spring is adjusted beyond the standard setting before assuming the interconnect assembly has failed.

Interconnect assembly replacement is required when the inside lever turns but only one of the two mechanisms (latch or deadbolt) retracts, when the interconnect binding causes the lever to feel mechanically stiff at a specific point in its rotation arc, or when the assembly fails to fully return to the latched position after a lever release. Center-to-center conversion (4 inch to 5-1/2 inch or reverse) is made by a field modification to the interconnect assembly without requiring a replacement part.

 

Strike Plate (Part 10-109 and 10-121 Combination Strikes)

The CS210 uses a combination strike that includes both a deadbolt strike and a deadlatch strike in a single plate assembly. Both strikes must be correctly positioned in the door frame for the lock to operate without binding. The CS210 standard combination strike is part 10-109. The 10-121 is an alternate combination strike. A T-strike (1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch) is also available for the deadbolt portion.

Strike alignment is the most common cause of a CS210 installation that feels stiff or incomplete on either the deadbolt throw or the latch engagement. Because the CS210 operates two mechanisms simultaneously, even minor vertical misalignment of either strike pocket creates binding that feels like internal mechanism failure. When a CS210 is reported to be stiff or incomplete in its operation, verify both strike alignments before diagnosing internal components.

The CS210 also includes a metal wood frame reinforcer using 3-inch screws that anchor into the door frame stud for kick-in resistance. This is the same dust box concept as the B Series deadbolt and its presence significantly increases the resistance of the frame to forced entry. It should always be installed and is not optional on any security-sensitive application.

 

Deadbolt Strike (Part 10-116)

The deadbolt-only strike (part 10-116) is a round corner strike, 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch, no lip. This is used when the deadbolt and latch have separate frame preps rather than a combined pocket. Always confirm whether the installation uses a combination strike or separate strikes before ordering replacement hardware.

 

The Crimp-On to Snap-On Rose Transition: The Most Important CS210 Service Fact

In August 2015, Schlage transitioned the CS210 from crimp-on roses to snap-on roses. This transition is completely undocumented in most parts supplier catalogs and is the single most common cause of wrong-part returns on CS210 service calls.

 

How to Identify Which Generation Your Lock Is

Remove the outside rose from the door face. Examine the base of the rose where it meets the door surface. Snap-on roses have retention dimples at the base. Crimp-on roses do not have these dimples and have a smooth or rolled edge at the base instead. If you are not certain which generation is installed, this physical check takes under two minutes and prevents an incorrect parts order.

 

What Happens If You Order the Wrong Generation

The lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) designed for snap-on rose installations cannot be used on a crimp-on rose chassis. The retention mechanism is physically different and the lever will not seat correctly. If you have a pre-August 2015 installation with a crimp-on rose and order the current lever kit without also updating the outside chassis, the parts will not function correctly after installation.

 

The Correct Crimp-On to Snap-On Upgrade Parts

For a pre-August 2015 crimp-on rose installation that needs a lever or rose replacement, order all four of these components together:

 

Part NumberDescriptionRequired For
06-242Lever kit (two levers)New levers, snap-on compatible
08-029Outside rose (Plymouth or Saturn)New snap-on rose
A501-945Reinforcement ringSupports snap-on rose seating
F206-496Outside chassis assemblyUpdated chassis for snap-on compatibility
 
For post-August 2015 snap-on rose installations: Only order the lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) when changing levers or roses. The existing chassis and reinforcement ring are already compatible. Ordering the full four-part update kit for a snap-on installation adds unnecessary cost without functional benefit.
 

Center-to-Center Door Prep Conversion: Field Modification Without Parts

The CS210 adjustable escutcheon plate supports both 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door preparations. This is the dimension between the centerline of the deadbolt bore and the centerline of the cylindrical latch bore on the door face.

The conversion is made entirely in the field by modifying the interconnect assembly position inside the escutcheon plate. No additional parts are required and no replacement components need to be ordered. The procedure is:

For 4-inch center-to-center: Remove two screws and the plate from the escutcheon assembly. Position the thumb-turn assembly with the thumb turn toward the bottom of the thumb-turn escutcheon plate.

For 5-1/2-inch center-to-center: Keep the plate in place with the two screws. The thumb-turn remains in its standard position.

This field adjustability is the design feature that eliminates job-site surprises when the existing door prep does not match a specific standard. A building with mixed 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch door preps can use the same CS210 lock on every unit door without ordering two different lock configurations.

 

CS210 Technical Specifications

 

SpecificationDetail
ANSI/BHMA certificationA156.12-2013, Grade 2 operational and security
Fire door listingUL 3-hour fire door (with conventional cylinder)
SFIC cylinder fire listingGrade 3 security (with SFIC interchangeable core)
FunctionCS210 entrance, single locking. Inside lever retracts both latch and deadbolt.
Crossbore2-1/8 inch standard
Center-to-center4 inch or 5-1/2 inch (field adjustable)
Door thickness1-3/8 to 1-3/4 inch standard; 1-3/4 to 2 inch metal door
BacksetAdjustable 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch
Latch throw1 inch
Latch faceplate1 inch by 2-1/4 inch (standard door); 1-1/8 inch square corner (metal door)
Deadbolt strike1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch T-strike standard
Cylinder6-pin, C keyway standard. Everest 29 keyway available.
HandingReversible in field
Levers18 designs in 7 finishes
Escutcheon optionsCamelot (CAM) and Plymouth (PLY) inside designs
Rose optionsPlymouth and Saturn outside designs
Outside housingB500 commercial spin ring or B60 residential spin ring
WarrantyLifetime limited mechanical and finish

 

Parts That Fail First on the Schlage CS210

Based on actual field service frequency, here is the realistic replacement sequence for CS210 components on high-traffic multi-family installations.

1. Levers. The outside lever takes physical contact on every door entry and exit. Finish wear is the most common cosmetic issue. Physical damage from cart impact or door abuse is the most common functional issue. The lever kit (06-242) replaces both inside and outside levers. Always check the rose generation before ordering (crimp vs snap as described above).

2. Strike plate alignment. This is not a parts failure but a maintenance item. Door settling in multi-family buildings causes progressive strike misalignment that shows up as a stiff deadbolt throw, incomplete latch engagement, or a lever that requires more force than normal. Check both strike alignments before diagnosing internal components. Re-securing loose strike screws or adjusting the strike position resolves most CS210 stiffness complaints without any parts replacement.

3. Cylinder. The 6-pin C keyway cylinder in the CS210 wears at the same rate as any commercial cylinder under high-cycle use. Key stiffness or a key that operates inconsistently indicates cylinder wear. As with all Schlage cylinders, use only graphite or silicone lubricant. Oil-based lubricants accelerate pin stack contamination and require cylinder replacement.

4. Inside escutcheon assembly. The inside escutcheon is subject to cosmetic damage on unit entry doors where residents are frequently carrying items. A cracked escutcheon plate or a finish that has worn through requires replacement as a complete escutcheon assembly. Confirm the Camelot or Plymouth design before ordering.

5. Interconnect assembly. The internal interconnect mechanism has the longest service life of any component in the CS210 because it is protected inside the door and does not receive direct physical contact. Interconnect failure appears as a lever that retracts one mechanism but not the other, or as an inconsistent combined retraction. Full interconnect replacement is required when this occurs.

 

Code Compliance: Interconnected Lock vs Separate Deadbolt on Dwelling Unit Doors

The code question that drives most CS210 specifications is whether a separate deadbolt is allowed on a dwelling unit entry door or whether an interconnected lock is required.

 

Where Separate Deadbolts Are Allowed

IBC Section 1010.1.9 and NFPA 101 both include an exception for Group R residential dwelling units with an occupant load of 10 or less. On these doors, a separate nightlatch, deadbolt, or security chain is permitted in addition to the latching hardware, provided the separate device can be released from the inside without a key or tool. A thumbturn-operated single cylinder deadbolt meets this requirement.

This exception applies to most apartments, condominiums, dormitory rooms, hotel rooms, and similar units. It is the reason separate deadbolts are common on apartment doors throughout the United States. In these jurisdictions, the CS210 is a premium specification option, not a code requirement.

 

Where Interconnected Locks Are Required

Several situations eliminate the separate deadbolt exception and require one-motion egress on dwelling unit entry doors. The first is when the local jurisdiction has adopted stricter requirements than the model codes. The second is for accessible or adaptable dwelling units in jurisdictions following accessibility standards that mandate one-motion egress hardware. The third is for assisted living and residential board and care facilities where the NFPA 101 residential occupancy exception does not apply. In all three situations, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only code-compliant hardware solution for a door requiring both a latch and a deadbolt.

 

The Assisted Living specification trap: Assisted living facilities are regularly misspecified with separate deadbolts because the word "residential" in their NFPA 101 classification (Residential Board and Care) is misread as qualifying for the residential dwelling unit exception. It does not. The residential dwelling unit exception in NFPA 101 applies to apartment buildings, rooming houses, hotels, motels, dormitories, and 1-2 family dwellings. Assisted living facilities are Board and Care occupancies, a distinct classification, and the one-motion egress requirement applies fully. Any separate deadbolt on an assisted living unit entry door in a jurisdiction enforcing NFPA 101 is non-compliant hardware.
 

How to Order CS210 Parts Without a Return

Four pieces of information are required before any CS210 parts order:

1. Rose generation (crimp or snap): This is the most important check. Remove the outside rose and look for retention dimples at the base. Dimples = snap-on (August 2015 or later). No dimples = crimp-on (pre-August 2015). If the lock is pre-2015, the outside chassis (F206-496) must be ordered along with the lever kit and rose.

2. Outside housing type (B500 or B60): The B500 has a free-spinning cylinder collar and security shield. The B60 does not. This is visible without disassembly: grip the exterior cylinder collar and attempt to rotate it. Free spin = B500. Fixed = B60.

3. Inside escutcheon design (Camelot or Plymouth): The Camelot design has a more traditional rectangular profile. The Plymouth has a more contemporary rounded shape. Both are visible on the interior door face without disassembly.

4. Finish code: Visible on the hardware face. Common CS210 finishes include 626 (satin chrome), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), and 605 (polished brass). All replacement components are finish-specific.

Browse the complete CS210 parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For the full Schlage commercial hardware range including the CS210, ND Series, L Series, and B Series, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage CS210 Parts

Rose generation identification, crimp-to-snap conversion guidance, code context, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

Rose Generation Guidance

We document the crimp-to-snap rose transition and what it means for parts ordering. The four-part upgrade kit for pre-2015 units is documented before the order is placed, not after the wrong part arrives.

 

Code Context Included

We explain when an interconnected lock is required vs when a separate deadbolt is allowed. Assisted living facilities, accessible units, and state-specific code supplements are all covered.

 

Complete CS210 Coverage

Lever kits, roses, escutcheons, chassis assemblies, strikes, and combination strikes all in one catalog page with part numbers and diagrams.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most CS210 components ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for CS210 Parts

  • We document the August 2015 crimp-to-snap rose transition with the exact four-part update kit (06-242, 08-029, A501-945, F206-496) for pre-2015 installations. No other parts supplier explains this before you place a wrong-part order.
  • We explain the assisted living NFPA 101 specification trap. Assisted living facilities do not qualify for the residential dwelling unit exception that allows separate deadbolts. This prevents non-compliant hardware installation on what is often one of the highest-scrutiny occupancy types for inspections.
  • We document the center-to-center field conversion as a no-parts field modification, eliminating unnecessary parts orders when a door prep dimension changes.
  • We carry CS210 interconnected lock parts alongside Schlage B Series deadbolt parts, Schlage ND Series cylindrical lock parts, and LCN door closer parts. One order covers the complete unit entry door hardware service call.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience. We identify the generation, housing type, and escutcheon design from your description before the order ships.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

A complete multi-family unit entry door typically includes the interconnected lock, a surface door closer (required by fire code for self-closing on fire-rated corridor-to-unit assemblies), and sometimes an electric strike for access control on the corridor side. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these in one catalog.

For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on unit entry doors where a separate deadbolt is permitted and specified instead of an interconnected lock, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage ND Series and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts on common area corridor doors, mailroom doors, and amenity space doors in the same building, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series mortise lock parts on main building entry doors and management office doors requiring Grade 1 performance, browse the mortise locks catalog. For LCN door closer parts on unit entry doors and corridor fire doors in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Von Duprin exit device parts on building egress stairwells and exit doors, browse the commercial exit devices catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage CS210 Interconnected Lock Parts

 

What is an interconnected lock and how is it different from a separate deadbolt and latchset?

An interconnected lock combines a cylindrical latch and a deadbolt with a mechanical connection that allows the inside lever to retract both simultaneously in one motion. A separate deadbolt and latchset require two inside operations to exit when the deadbolt is thrown. The interconnected lock's single-motion egress meets IBC and NFPA 101 requirements on most commercial occupancy doors. Where local code requires one-motion egress even on dwelling unit entry doors, an interconnected lock or mortise lock is the only compliant hardware solution.

 

What parts does the Schlage CS210 interconnected lock use?

The main CS210 replaceable parts are: lever kit (06-242, two levers), rose (08-029), inside escutcheon in Camelot or Plymouth design, outside housing assembly (B500 commercial spin ring or B60 residential spin ring), interconnect assembly, combination strikes (10-109 or 10-121), deadbolt strike (10-116), reinforcement ring (A501-945), and outside chassis assembly (F206-496 for crimp-to-snap conversions). All components are finish-specific.

 

What is the difference between crimp-on and snap-on roses on the Schlage CS210?

Schlage transitioned from crimp-on to snap-on roses in August 2015. Snap-on roses have retention dimples at the base. Crimp-on roses do not. For pre-2015 crimp-on installations requiring a lever or rose replacement, order all four parts together: lever kit 06-242, rose 08-029, reinforcement ring A501-945, and outside chassis assembly F206-496. For post-2015 snap-on installations, only the lever kit (06-242) and rose (08-029) are needed.

 

What center-to-center door preparations does the Schlage CS210 support?

The CS210 supports both 4-inch and 5-1/2-inch center-to-center door preparations through a field modification to the interconnect assembly. For 4-inch prep, remove two screws and the plate, then position the thumb-turn assembly with the thumb turn toward the bottom. For 5-1/2-inch prep, keep the plate in place with two screws. No additional parts are required for this conversion.

 

When is an interconnected lock required by code?

IBC and NFPA 101 require one-motion egress on most commercial doors. For Group R dwelling units (apartments, hotel rooms, dormitory rooms) with occupant loads of 10 or less, a separate deadbolt is generally allowed. However, some local jurisdictions require one-motion egress even on dwelling units. Assisted living facilities do not qualify for the residential dwelling unit exception under NFPA 101. Always verify local code before specifying hardware on multi-family and institutional projects.

 

What is the Schlage CS210 B500 vs B60 outside housing?

The B500 (commercial spin ring) includes a free-spinning cylinder collar that resists wrenching, a removeable security shield against ice-pick attacks, and a metal frame reinforcer with 3-inch screws. The B60 (residential spin ring) is the residential version without the additional attack resistance features. The B500 is the correct specification for commercial and institutional applications. Grip the cylinder collar and attempt to rotate it: free spin confirms B500; fixed confirms B60.

Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts: B500 and B600 Grade 1 Complete Guide

Security Parts carries parts for the Schlage B Series commercial deadbolts. The B600 Series is Grade 1, Schlage's strongest commercial deadbolt. The B500 Series is Grade 2 for lighter applications. The most commonly replaced parts are the tailpiece (driver bar), the cylinder, and the strike plate. If a new B Series installation won't lock or unlock, rotate the driver bar 90 degrees toward the hinges before reinstalling. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move, the tailpiece is stripped and needs replacement. Never use oil-based lubricants on B Series cylinders. Use graphite or silicone only.

Schlage B Series deadbolts are on more commercial and institutional doors than any other deadbolt brand in North America. They show up on office suites, storage rooms, corridor doors, exterior entries on healthcare and government buildings, and any secondary door on a commercial property that needs a reliable keyed bolt without the complexity of a full mortise lock.

When one fails, the repair is usually one of three things: a worn tailpiece, a failing cylinder, or a misaligned strike plate. Getting the right replacement part requires knowing the series (B500 vs B600), the cylinder format, and in some cases the finish code. This guide covers every component, every failure mode, every function, and the field-tested troubleshooting sequence that identifies the correct part before you order anything. Browse the complete Schlage B Series deadbolt parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every model.

Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA rating on the Schlage B600 Series
1" Deadbolt throw on both B500 and B600 Series
UL 3hr Fire door listing with steel fire cup plate insert on B600
Everest 29 Default patented keyway on B600 Series for key duplication control
 

How a Commercial Deadbolt Works

A deadbolt operates differently from a spring latch. A spring latch clicks into the strike automatically when the door closes and retracts when the lever or knob is turned. A deadbolt does neither automatically. It extends only when the cylinder is turned with a key or the thumb turn is rotated, and it retracts only by the same means. Once extended, it cannot be pushed back by end pressure, a credit card, or a shimming tool.

Inside the lock body, the cylinder cam engages the tailpiece when the key is turned. The tailpiece connects the cam to the deadbolt bolt mechanism and drives the bolt in or out. On a single cylinder deadbolt, a thumb turn connects to the same bolt mechanism from the inside. On a double cylinder deadbolt, a key cylinder replaces the thumb turn on the inside.

The deadbolt throw on both B500 and B600 series is 1 inch. On a correctly installed B Series deadbolt, this 1-inch throw passes through the strike plate hole and engages at least 1 inch into the door frame. The metal dust box anchors the strike with 3-inch screws into the frame stud, which is why kick-in attacks that defeat the bolt still fail on a correctly installed B Series with the dust box in place.

 

B500 vs B600: Choosing the Right Series Before Ordering Parts

 

B500 Series

 
Grade 2 | Light Commercial and Multi-Family

7 functions. Optional fire rating with fire-rated deadbolt version. Optional indicator trim for status visibility. Adjustable backset (2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). Default deadbolt part 12-288 (square corner, 1 inch x 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter). Standard door thickness 1-3/8 to 2-1/4 inch. Available in conventional, FSIC, and SFIC cylinder formats. Commercial 3-year limited warranty.

 

B600 Series

 

Grade 1 | Commercial and Institutional
 

Schlage's strongest commercial deadbolt. Hardened steel anti-saw pin in bolt. Hardened steel ball bearings stop drilling on through bolts. Free-spinning cylinder collar resists wrenching. Removeable security shield protects cylinder driver. Steel fire cup plate insert for UL 3-hour fire door listing. Default deadbolt part 12-296 (square corner, 1-1/8 x 2-1/4 inch). Default Everest 29 S123 keyway. Incorporates former B700 and B800 Primus-level series.

 

Important naming change: Locks previously sold as B700 Series (Primus cylinder) and B800 Series (Primus XP cylinder) are now incorporated as versions of the B600 Series with Primus or Primus XP cylinder specifications. If your building spec references B700 or B800, order B600 with the matching Primus cylinder specification. The physical lock and parts are the same. The naming changed; the hardware did not.
 

B600 Series Security Features: What They Mean for Parts Ordering

The B600 Series has a longer list of anti-attack features than the B500, and several of them directly affect parts compatibility and ordering.

 

Hardened Steel Anti-Saw Pin

A hardened steel pin is embedded in the deadbolt bolt body perpendicular to the bolt. If someone attempts to saw through the extended bolt, the saw blade hits the hardened pin and stops. The anti-saw pin is part of the bolt assembly and is not a separately replaceable component. If the bolt shows saw damage, the entire bolt assembly must be replaced, not just the pin.

 

Hardened Steel Ball Bearings on Through Bolts

The through bolts that mount the lock to the door have hardened steel ball bearings embedded in the bolt body. If someone attempts to drill through the bolt to remove the mounting screws, the drill bit contacts the ball bearing and spins without penetrating. These are built into the through bolt hardware and are not separately replaceable. If a through bolt is drilled, the entire bolt set requires replacement.

 

Free-Spinning Cylinder Collar

The cylinder collar on the B600 exterior is broadly angled and designed to spin freely when a wrench is applied to it. A fixed collar gives a wrench purchase to torque the cylinder out of the lock body. The free-spinning collar denies that purchase and the cylinder cannot be wrenched. The collar is part of the exterior cylinder housing assembly and is finish-specific. When ordering a replacement exterior cylinder assembly for a B600, confirm both the finish code and the security level (standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP) before ordering.

 

Steel Fire Cup Plate Insert

The fire cup plate insert adds structural strength to the lock body and enables UL listing for 3-hour fire door use as an auxiliary lock. This component is factory-installed in B600 Series locks. It is not a separately field-replaceable component. If a B600 fire-rated installation requires a replacement lock body due to damage, specify the fire-rated version when ordering to ensure UL listing compliance on the fire-door assembly is maintained.

 

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage B Series Deadbolt

Tailpiece (Driver Bar): The Most Misdiagnosed Failure

The tailpiece is the flat metal bar that connects the cylinder cam and the thumb turn to the deadbolt bolt mechanism. It is the most frequently misdiagnosed failure on a Schlage B Series deadbolt, and it is also the most common source of new-installation failures that are not actually component failures at all.

Tailpiece part numbers are length-specific and cylinder configuration-specific:

 

Part NumberDescriptionLengthApplication
B202-557Standard tailpiece, single cylinder1.85 inchStandard 1-3/4 inch door, single cylinder B Series
B202-558Longer tailpiece, single cylinder2.00 inchThicker doors where standard tailpiece doesn't reach
B220-032Tailpiece, double cylinder1.031 inchB100, B250, B400, H, MD, and S200 series double cylinder
 
The tailpiece orientation fix that resolves 80% of new installation failures: When a new B Series installation will not lock or unlock, and the interior thumb turn won't move, the problem is almost never a defective lock. The official Schlage troubleshooting guide for this symptom is specific: remove the lock and rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges, then reinstall with the deadbolt retracted and the key removed. This corrects the tailpiece orientation that was set wrong during installation. Technicians who do not know this spend unnecessary time diagnosing a non-existent hardware failure and sometimes order replacement parts for a lock that is not broken.
 

Deadbolt Bolt Assembly

The B500 default bolt is part 12-288 (square corner, 1 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter, adjustable backset 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). The B600 default bolt is part 12-296 (square corner, 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1 inch housing diameter, adjustable backset 2-3/8 or 2-3/4 inch). Both series offer fixed backset options at 2-3/8, 2-3/4, 3-3/4, and 5 inches in addition to the adjustable standard.

Bolt assembly replacement is needed when the bolt has sustained physical damage from a forced entry attempt, when the anti-saw pin has been encountered by a saw blade, or when the bolt mechanism binds and will not extend or retract cleanly even after lubrication. The bolt faceplate (also called the drive-in faceplate) is a separately replaceable component that covers the bolt hole on the door edge and can be replaced without replacing the full bolt assembly when only the faceplate is damaged.

 

Cylinder Assembly

The cylinder is the keyed component in the exterior rose that drives the cam, which drives the tailpiece, which moves the bolt. The B Series supports multiple cylinder formats at ordering time:

 

Cylinder FormatCodeDescriptionApplication
ConventionalStandardStandard pinned cylinder, Everest 29 S123 keyway defaultMost commercial installations
PrimusPSecond set of pins plus geographic exclusivityGovernment, healthcare, high-security commercial
Primus XPXPUL 437 listed. Resists drilling and physical cylinder attackHigh-security exterior doors, correctional facilities
FSICICFull-size interchangeable core. Core removeable by control keyLarge campuses requiring frequent rekeying
SFICSFICSmall format interchangeable coreFacilities with existing SFIC key systems

 

When replacing a B Series cylinder, confirm the security level installed before ordering. A standard Everest 29 cylinder looks physically identical to a Primus cylinder from the outside. The security level is on the original specification or on the key, which will have Primus branding on a Primus cylinder. Installing a standard cylinder to replace a Primus cylinder downgrades the security level of the opening without any visible indication that a change has been made.

Never use oil-based lubricants on a Schlage cylinder. Oil attracts dirt and debris that accumulates in the pin stack and causes premature cylinder failure. The cylinder becomes increasingly stiff until the key no longer turns. Use only graphite powder or silicone spray lubricant on B Series cylinders. If a cylinder has been lubricated with oil and is now stiff, cylinder replacement is the correct resolution. Flushing oil-contaminated cylinders does not restore full function reliably.
 

Strike Plate and Metal Dust Box

The B600 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch with square corners. The B500 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch. Both are available in ANSI curved lip, round cornered, and thimble configurations for different frame preparations.

The metal dust box (part B520-283) is installed behind the strike plate. It creates a reinforced pocket in the frame for the bolt to enter, and its 3-inch screws anchor into the door frame stud rather than just the door frame face. This is what gives the B Series its resistance to kick-in attacks. The bolt itself can withstand the force. What fails on most deadbolt kick-in attacks is the door frame around the strike, not the bolt or the lock body. The metal dust box with 3-inch screws prevents frame failure by distributing the force into the stud.

 

The dust box omission that facilities teams discover after a break-in: A very large percentage of deadbolt kick-in failures in commercial facilities happen on doors where the metal dust box was omitted at original installation because it was considered an optional component. It is not optional for any door where physical security matters. The B600 dust box using 3-inch screws is the difference between a door that fails a kick-in at approximately 100 foot-pounds and a door that holds at two to three times that force. If any B Series installation in your portfolio is missing the dust box, this is the most cost-effective security upgrade available per opening.
 

Thumb Turn Assembly

The thumb turn is the interior control on a single cylinder deadbolt that allows the bolt to be thrown or retracted from the inside without a key. The thumb turn assembly includes the turn itself, the rose, and the connecting components to the bolt mechanism. On a double cylinder deadbolt, the thumb turn is replaced by an interior key cylinder and the interior rose assembly changes accordingly.

Thumb turn replacement is needed when the turn becomes stiff or will not rotate fully, when physical damage to the thumb turn has occurred, or when the connection between the turn and the bolt mechanism has worn. The thumb turn assembly is finish-specific. Always confirm the finish code before ordering a replacement.

On a correctly installed lock, the thumb turn should operate with minimal resistance in either direction. A thumb turn that requires two-hand force to operate is not a characteristic of a fully functioning deadbolt. Check for strike plate misalignment before assuming the thumb turn mechanism has failed, as binding caused by a slightly misaligned strike is often mistaken for internal mechanism failure.

 

Exterior Rose and Cylinder Guard

The exterior rose is the cover plate visible on the door face around the cylinder. On the B600 Series, the exterior rose houses the free-spinning cylinder collar and acts as the primary tamper-resistant interface between the exterior and the door. The exterior rose is finish-specific. Scratch or impact damage to the rose requires a finish-matched replacement. The cylinder collar is part of the exterior assembly and is not separately replaceable from the rose on most B600 configurations.

 

B Series Deadbolt Functions: What Each One Does

The Schlage B Series deadbolt functions determine the operating configuration and the trim components required. Ordering a replacement cylinder, tailpiece, or trim without confirming the function code produces parts that may not be compatible with the specific installation.

 

FunctionSeriesOperationApplication
Single cylinder (B60N, B600 single)B500, B600Key exterior, thumb turn interiorStandard commercial and residential door
Double cylinder (B62N, B600 double)B500, B600Key both sides, no thumb turnDoors with glass adjacent to lock where thumb turn would allow glass-break access
Privacy (B571, B600 privacy)B600Key exterior, interior indicator and coin turn, 180-degree window indicatorRestroom stalls, utility closets requiring occupied/vacant indication
Indicator (B571, B600 indication)B600180-degree status window, visible LOCKED/UNLOCKED from corridorHealthcare patient rooms, offices where occupancy status must be visible from corridor
Key outside only (B600 key outside)B600Key exterior only, interior lever retracts boltStorerooms where interior free egress is required

 

The B600 Indication Trim: Why It Matters for Parts

The B600 indication trim function uses a patented 180-degree viewing window that wraps three sides of the exterior rose and displays a red or white background with LOCKED or UNLOCKED messaging. The large window is readable even from across a corridor. This is the "Know It's Locked" feature Schlage markets for healthcare and education applications where knowing a room's lock status without touching the hardware is a daily operational requirement.

The indication trim is not interchangeable with standard trim. It requires a specific exterior rose assembly with the viewing window housing. When ordering a replacement rose for a B600 indication trim installation, confirm the indication function variant before ordering. A standard rose does not retrofit into an indication trim installation because the housing geometry is different.

The B600 indication trim is available with red and white messaging backgrounds for readability by color-blind individuals, and in English, French, and Spanish language versions. Always confirm the language version when ordering a replacement trim assembly for an indication function installation.

 

Tailpiece Orientation: The Fix Nobody Documents Clearly

The official Schlage troubleshooting guide documents a specific procedure for a newly installed B Series deadbolt that will not lock or unlock. Most other resources on the internet describe this problem as a defective lock. It is not a defective lock in the overwhelming majority of cases.

The tailpiece has an orientation that must be set correctly relative to the door for the lock to function. If installed in the wrong orientation, the key turns, the thumb turn moves, but the bolt does not extend or retract. The fix takes under two minutes.

 

Remove the Lock from the Door

Unscrew the mounting screws holding the interior assembly to the exterior. Separate the two halves of the lock from the door bore. Do not disassemble the lock itself.

 

Rotate the Driver Bar Fully Toward the Hinges

With the lock removed, rotate the driver bar (tailpiece) fully in the direction of the door hinges. This resets the orientation to the correct starting position. Verify the deadbolt is fully retracted before reinstalling.

 

Reinstall with Key Removed and Bolt Retracted

Reinstall the lock with the deadbolt in the fully retracted position and with no key in the exterior cylinder. The key being in the cylinder during installation can shift the tailpiece orientation during the reinstallation process. Insert the key only after the lock is fully reinstalled and test operation.

 

Test Both Directions from Both Sides

Test with the exterior key in both locking and unlocking directions. Test with the interior thumb turn in both directions. If the lock now operates correctly, the issue was orientation only. No parts are needed. If the lock still does not operate after correct orientation, the tailpiece itself may be worn or stripped and requires replacement.

 

Key-Sticking and Cylinder Failure: When to Replace vs Lubricate

A stiff key on a B Series deadbolt is one of the most common service calls. The correct response depends on how long the stiffness has been present and what lubricant history the cylinder has.

 

New or recent installation, key stiff immediately: Check the cylinder alignment in the rose. A slightly off-center cylinder causes the key to bind against the cylinder housing on entry. Verify the exterior rose is seated flush before assuming cylinder failure.

Key stiff after months or years of use, never lubricated: Apply graphite powder to the key blade and work it in and out of the cylinder several times. For most B Series cylinders in commercial service, graphite applied every 12 months is sufficient maintenance. Do not use WD-40 or any oil-based product.

Key stiff after months or years of use, previously lubricated with oil-based product: The pin stack has collected oil-carried debris. Graphite will not flush this out. The cylinder requires replacement. Part numbers for B600 replacement cylinders must match the security level (standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP) of the original installation.

Key turns freely but bolt does not move: The tailpiece connection has failed. The key is operating the cam but the cam is no longer driving the tailpiece into the bolt mechanism. Remove the lock, inspect the tailpiece for wear or stripping, and replace with the correct length tailpiece (B202-557 for standard doors or B202-558 for thicker doors).

Key can only be removed in one position (locked or unlocked) but not the other on a new installation: Rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges and reinstall. This is a tailpiece orientation issue identical to the general non-operating procedure above.

 

Strike Plate Alignment: The Most Common Source of Binding

A deadbolt that operates smoothly with the door open but feels stiff or fails to fully extend when the door is closed is almost always a strike plate alignment problem. The bolt pocket in the strike must be centered on the bolt throw for the bolt to enter cleanly and without side friction.

Door settling is the most common cause of gradual strike plate misalignment in commercial buildings. Wood frame doors settle as the building ages and the door shifts slightly in its frame. Hollow metal frame doors can shift if the frame anchoring fasteners loosen over time. Either way, the result is a bolt that contacts the edge of the strike pocket rather than entering it cleanly.

Correcting strike plate misalignment does not always require a new strike. If the misalignment is small (2mm or less), enlarging the bolt pocket with a chisel is the fastest correction. If the misalignment is larger, the strike must be relocated or a new strike installed with a bolt pocket at the corrected position.

A strike that has been in service for 10 or more years on a high-traffic exterior door may also show deformation of the bolt pocket lip where repeated bold throw impact has worn or bent the steel. A deformed strike produces a deadbolt that feels rough on every locking cycle. Replace the strike when deformation is visible.

 

How to Identify Your B Series Model Before Ordering Parts

Three pieces of information are required before any B Series parts order.

1. Series designation (B500 or B600): The series is stamped or labeled on the lock body, visible when the interior assembly is removed. If the label is missing or worn, the grade level can sometimes be identified by the security features: if the exterior cylinder collar spins freely when gripped and twisted, it is a B600. If it is fixed, it may be a B500 or an older B series.

2. Cylinder security level: Standard Everest 29, Primus, or Primus XP. The key itself will have Primus branding if a Primus cylinder is installed. UL 437 markings on the cylinder face confirm Primus XP. Ordering a standard cylinder to replace a Primus cylinder downgrades security without any visible indication to building management.

3. Finish code: The finish is on the original specification or visible on the hardware. Common B Series finishes include 605 (bright brass), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), 626 (satin chrome), and 643e (aged bronze). Trim components are finish-specific. A replacement thumb turn or rose in the wrong finish requires a return and reorder.

Browse the Schlage B Series deadbolt parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams by model. For the complete Schlage commercial hardware range including ND Series cylindrical locks, L Series mortise locks, and B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts

Tailpiece guidance, cylinder security level documentation, dust box importance, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Tailpiece Orientation Guidance

We document the driver bar rotation fix that resolves most new installation failures without any parts replacement. Knowing this before calling in a service order saves time and unnecessary returns.

 

Cylinder Security Level

We document that standard and Primus cylinders look identical from outside. Replacing a Primus with standard downgrades security silently. We confirm the security level before the order ships.

 

Dust Box Documentation

We explain why the metal dust box with 3-inch screws is the most cost-effective security upgrade per opening. Most facilities don't know it was omitted until after a kick-in incident.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most B Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Schlage Deadbolt Parts

  • We document the tailpiece orientation procedure that resolves most new installation failures without ordering any parts. No other parts supplier explains this in buyer-facing content, which means unnecessary part orders happen constantly.
  • We explain that B700 and B800 Series locks are now incorporated into B600 Series with Primus cylinder specifications. Facilities maintaining these older specifications can order confidently without confusion about what has changed.
  • We document the metal dust box importance as the most cost-effective physical security upgrade per deadbolt opening. The 3-inch screws that anchor into the stud are the difference between a door that fails a kick-in and one that holds.
  • We document the oil lubricant contamination failure mode. Cylinders lubricated with WD-40 or similar products need replacement, not additional lubrication. This prevents repeated unnecessary service calls on the same cylinder.
  • We carry Schlage B Series parts alongside Schlage ND and ALX Series cylindrical lock parts, Schlage L Series mortise lock parts, and LCN door closer parts. One order services the complete building opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Schlage B Series deadbolts are typically installed alongside cylindrical locksets on the same door or in the same building. A complete commercial service call for a building's lock hardware often covers all of these at once.

For Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, and Falcon T Series cylindrical lock parts on interior corridor and office doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security entry doors in the same building, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries in the same facility, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same building, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Schlage B Series Deadbolt Parts

 

What is the difference between the Schlage B500 and B600 Series deadbolts?

The B500 is Grade 2 for lighter commercial and multi-family applications with 7 functions and an optional fire rating. The B600 is Grade 1 with hardened steel anti-saw pins, ball bearings to stop drilling on through bolts, a free-spinning cylinder collar to resist wrenching, a security shield against cylinder manipulation, and a steel fire cup plate insert for UL 3-hour fire door listing. The former B700 and B800 Series names are now incorporated into B600 with Primus cylinder specifications.

 

What is the tailpiece on a Schlage B Series deadbolt and how do I replace it?

The tailpiece (driver bar) connects the cylinder cam and thumb turn to the deadbolt bolt mechanism. Standard single cylinder tailpiece is part B202-557 (1.85 inch). Longer single cylinder tailpiece is B202-558 (2 inch). Double cylinder tailpiece is B220-032 (1.031 inch). If a new installation won't lock, rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges before reinstalling. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move after correct orientation, the tailpiece is stripped and requires replacement.

 

What keyway does the Schlage B600 Series use by default?

The B600 Series uses the Everest 29 S123 patented keyway as standard. This prevents unauthorized key duplication. The B600 is upgradable to Primus for geographic exclusivity and a second pin set, and to Primus XP for UL 437 high-security listing. The B700 and B800 Series names previously identified Primus levels and are now B600 variants.

 

What causes a Schlage deadbolt to not lock or unlock after installation?

The most common cause on new installations is incorrect tailpiece orientation. Remove the lock, rotate the driver bar fully toward the hinges, and reinstall with the bolt retracted and key removed. If the bolt operates with door open but binds when closed, the strike plate is misaligned. If the key turns but the bolt doesn't move, the tailpiece has failed and needs replacement. A key that sticks after extended use requires cylinder replacement.

 

What strike plate does the Schlage B600 Series use?

The B600 standard strike is 1-1/8 inch by 2-3/4 inch with square corners. The metal dust box (part B520-283) installs behind the strike using 3-inch screws that anchor into the door frame stud. This is the critical component that prevents kick-in failures. Many B Series installations are missing the dust box, making this the most cost-effective physical security upgrade available per opening.

 

What is the Schlage B Series single cylinder vs double cylinder deadbolt?

Single cylinder (B60N, B600 single) uses a key exterior and thumb turn interior. Double cylinder (B62N, B600 double) requires a key on both sides. Double cylinder is specified on doors with glass near the deadbolt where someone could break the glass and reach a thumb turn. Many building codes prohibit double cylinder deadbolts on required egress doors because they delay exit during emergencies. Always verify local code before specifying double cylinder on any egress path.

Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series Mortise Lock Parts: Complete Field Guide

Mortise locks are the most complex mechanical lock type to source replacement parts for because the function code determines which components are correct, and parts across different function codes are not interchangeable even when the cases look identical. SecurityParts.com carries parts for the Schlage L Series Grade 1 (40-plus functions, 33 lever styles) and Falcon MA Series Grade 1 (high-traffic institutional, SFIC-compatible). The function code, door handing, and manufacture date are all required before ordering any chassis, armor front, latchbolt, spindle, or cylinder cam. The L9050 universal case is the single most important inventory item because it can be transformed into nine different L Series functions with the right additional parts.

Mortise locks outlast cylindrical locks by a factor of 3 to 5 in commercial service. They are on the entry doors, the main corridors, the healthcare and government facilities where reliability is not optional. When one needs service, the parts tree is deeper and more function-specific than anything in the cylindrical lock world.

The Schlage L Series alone covers more than 40 functional options, 33 lever designs, and 14 finishes. Its parts split into chassis components, cylinder components, trim components, and function-specific parts that are not interchangeable even within the same L Series family. A lever return spring for an L9010 passage function is not the same servicing need as a spindle assembly for an L9080 storeroom function. Getting any one of these wrong means a return, a reorder, and a door that stays out of service for another week. Browse the complete mortise lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every function and model.

40+ Mechanical functions in the Schlage L Series
33 Lever designs in solid brass or stainless steel in the Schlage L Series
3-5x Longer service life of mortise vs cylindrical locks in commercial settings
UL 3hr Fire door rating on both Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series
 

How a Mortise Lock Differs from a Cylindrical Lock

A mortise lock installs into a pocket (the mortise) cut into the edge of the door, typically 4 inches deep, 6 inches tall, and 1 inch wide. The entire lock mechanism lives inside this pocket with only the armor front plate visible on the door edge and the levers and roses visible on the door face. This concealed mounting is what gives mortise locks their tamper resistance advantage over cylindrical bore locks where the mechanism is partially exposed.

Inside the mortise case, the mechanism includes a spring latchbolt for automatic latching, an auxiliary deadlatch plunger that deadlocks the latchbolt when the door closes against the strike, a separate deadbolt on many functions, a spindle connecting the inside and outside levers through the case, and a mortise cylinder that controls the deadbolt cam. All of these operate in a single cast body. This is what makes mortise locks the strongest lock type for high-security commercial doors but also the most complex to source replacement parts for correctly.

 

The auxiliary deadlatch detail that costs locksmiths service calls: The auxiliary deadlatch plunger beside the latchbolt must be fully depressed by the strike plate when the door closes for the deadlocking function to engage. If the strike is positioned so the plunger does not contact the strike face, the latchbolt is not deadlocked and can be retracted by a credit card, a loiding tool, or end pressure. Strike misalignment greater than approximately 1.5mm vertical is enough to defeat deadlocking on any mortise lock. When a customer reports a door that feels secure but opens with shim pressure, the strike alignment is almost always the cause, not a failed latchbolt.
 

Schlage L Series: The Commercial Benchmark Mortise Lock

The Schlage L Series has been the benchmark commercial mortise lock specification in North America for decades. Government buildings, healthcare facilities, higher education campuses, institutional projects. If a building was built to a commercial standard after 1970, there is a very high probability it has L Series locks on the entry and secured doors.

The L Series offers beyond-Grade-1 strength in a mortise chassis. The anti-saw pin in the deadbolt prevents cut-through attacks. The security blocking hub prevents lock access by removing the levers. Lock monitoring options including request to exit (RX), latchbolt monitoring (LX), door position sensor (DPS), and deadbolt monitoring (DM) are available depending on the function. The patented Everest 29 S123 keyway prevents unauthorized key duplication as standard. Primus restricted cylinders with geographic exclusivity and advanced key control are available for facilities requiring maximum key system security.

 

Reading the Schlage L Series Model Number

The model number decodes every specification needed to source the correct replacement parts. The format is L or LV plus function group plus deadbolt indicator plus cylinder suffix.

 

Code ElementMeaningExample
LStandard Schlage L Series chassisL9080
LVVandlgard chassis for abuse/vandalism resistanceLV9080
Function groupThe lock operating function (e.g. 9080 = storeroom)L9080
Deadbolt indicator0 = no deadbolt. 4 = with deadbolt (L9460 adds deadbolt to basic functions)L9460
P6-pin full-face mortise cylinder with Schlage logo includedL9080P
LLess cylinder (customer supplies cylinder)L9080L
CConcealed mortise cylinder includedL9080C
RFull-size interchangeable core cylinderL9080R

 

The Most Common Schlage L Series Functions

 

FunctionANSIHow It WorksApplication
L9010PassageLatchbolt retracted by lever from either side. No locking.Corridors, vestibule passages, non-secured internal doors
L9020PrivacyInside push button locks outside lever. Emergency coin release from outside.Restrooms, private offices
L9040ClassroomOutside lever locked by key from outside. Inside always free. No deadbolt.Classrooms, conference rooms requiring exterior key lockdown
L9050Entrance/OfficePush button locks outside lever. Key or inside lever unlocks. Latch and deadbolt.Executive offices, secured administrative areas
L9060VestibuleKey in outside lever locks/unlocks it. Inside lever always free.Building lobby control, vestibule entries
L9070Classroom SecurityOutside lever locked by key from outside only. Inside always free. With latch and deadbolt.K-12 classrooms with full deadbolt lockdown requirement
L9080StoreroomOutside lever always inoperative, entry by key only. Inside always free.Storage, server rooms, supply areas, secure labs
L9082Storeroom/ClosetSame as L9080 but latchbolt retracted by key from either side. Both levers always inoperative.Secure closets, equipment rooms requiring full key control
 
The escutcheon vs rose trim mistake: When a function change is needed on an L Series installation that currently has escutcheon trim, the entire escutcheon set (inside and outside) must be replaced when converting to a different function. If the door uses rose (sectional) trim, no additional trim parts are required for most function conversions. Ordering just the chassis for a function conversion on an escutcheon-trim installation and not ordering the matching escutcheon set for the new function leaves the job incomplete and the door with mismatched trim.
 

The L9050 Universal Case: The Most Important Inventory Item

 

Schlage designed the L9050 universal case to be transformed into nine different L Series functions by adding specific conversion components. This is the single most important piece of knowledge for facilities managers who maintain large L Series inventories.

A facility stocking the L9050 universal case can reconfigure it for passage, entrance/office, classroom, storeroom, and other functions using the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide (document 109436). The guide specifies exactly which additional parts are required for each function conversion. This approach eliminates the need to stock nine separate configured cases and eliminates the lead time required to order an uncommon factory-configured function combination.

The transformation requires only a few additional parts per function change, typically a chassis conversion kit and potentially trim components. The labor time is minimal for a locksmith familiar with the L Series. For facilities with 50-plus L Series locks across multiple functions, this single knowledge point eliminates thousands of dollars in stocked inventory and weeks of lead time across the building's service life.

 

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage L Series

 

Lock Case (Chassis)

The Schlage L Series chassis (also called the lock case or case body) is the cast iron or steel housing that lives inside the mortise pocket. The chassis contains the latchbolt mechanism, the auxiliary deadlatch plunger, the deadbolt (on applicable functions), the spindle hubs, the cylinder cam track, and the internal function mechanism. The base chassis for L9050 is part L283-133. The LV-series Vandlgard chassis substitutes the standard function mechanism with the Vandlgard clutch assembly that prevents forced lever torque from engaging the deadbolt or latch.

Chassis replacement is required when the internal mechanism fails, when a function change is needed on an ND-style installation, or when the case sustains physical damage from a break-in attempt. Chassis replacement requires door disassembly, which typically means removing the levers, roses or escutcheons, through-bolts, and the case itself from the mortise pocket. Always verify the backset (2-3/4 inch standard on L Series) and door thickness accommodation before ordering a replacement case.

 

Latchbolt Assembly

The latchbolt is the beveled spring bolt that extends from the lock case and clicks into the strike plate when the door closes. On the Schlage L Series, the standard latchbolt is a two-piece deadlocking latchbolt with a separate auxiliary plunger alongside the main bolt. The auxiliary plunger, when depressed by the strike plate face on door closing, deadlocks the latchbolt against being retracted from the latch edge by a shimming tool or card.

The two-piece construction means the main bolt and the auxiliary plunger are separate components within the latchbolt assembly. If the auxiliary plunger fails to depress or return correctly, the deadlocking function is compromised even though the latch itself still operates normally. This is a silent failure: the door latches and appears secure but the deadlocking protection is absent. Inspect the auxiliary plunger on any L Series installation where security has been questioned, even if the latch seems to operate normally.

 

Armor Front (Armored Front / Scalp Plate)

The armor front is the hardened steel face plate visible on the door edge that covers the mortise case opening. It presents the latchbolt and deadbolt holes aligned with the case components below, and it resists pry, drill, and chisel attacks on the lock body. The Schlage L Series armor front is 1-1/4 inch by 8 inch and adjustable for door bevel.

Armor fronts are finish-specific and function-specific. The Schlage part 09-663 in 626 (satin chrome) finish covers the L9050, L9056, L9060, L9070, L9071, L9080, and L9082 functions. Part 09-666 covers a different configuration. Ordering an armor front without confirming the finish code and function produces a part that either does not fit or does not match the door hardware. Always pull both pieces of information from the installed hardware before ordering.

 

Spindle and Hub Assembly

The spindle is the square connecting rod that passes through the case and links the inside and outside levers. The hub is the internal component that connects the spindle to the case mechanism and holds the lever return springs. The lever return springs in the hub are sized to provide approximately 2 pounds of return force at the lever tip. When these springs fatigue, the lever droops below horizontal even with no other visible damage to the lock.

The Schlage L Series uses a security blocking hub that prevents gaining access to the lock mechanism by removing the levers. On locks where this is not a concern, a standard hub is fitted. Vandlgard versions use a hub with a clutch mechanism that allows the outside lever to rotate freely without engaging the mechanism when excessive torque is applied, preventing the forced-lever attack that can defeat a standard L Series lock in some configurations.

 

Mortise Cylinder and Cylinder Cam

The mortise cylinder screws into the case face and drives the deadbolt cam. The cylinder body is threaded at approximately 1.156 inch diameter with 32 threads per inch. Standard L Series cylinders include the Everest 29 S123 patented keyway in 6-pin conventional format. The cam is the component on the back of the cylinder that engages the deadbolt throw mechanism inside the case.

Cylinder cam replacement is one of the most frequently misunderstood service tasks on mortise locks. The cam must match both the cylinder type and the function. The Schlage L583-254 cam is used on standard conventional Schlage L Series mortise cylinders. The L583-446 cam is for Schlage modular mortise cylinders. The K510-730 cam is the standard cam for IC housings and works across Schlage IC configurations, Falcon non-deadbolt functions, and several other manufacturer applications. Using the wrong cam on a mortise cylinder produces a lock that either cannot throw the deadbolt or throws it only in one rotation direction.

 

Thumbturn Assembly

The thumbturn (T-turn) is the interior control that throws the deadbolt on applicable L Series functions. The Schlage part 09-509 T-turn fits doors from 1-3/8 inch to 1-7/8 inch thick with a rose diameter of approximately 1-3/4 inch. Thumbturn replacement is required when the thumbturn becomes stiff, when the internal cam connection wears and the turn no longer throws the deadbolt cleanly, or when the turn is damaged by abuse or attempted tampering. Always confirm door thickness before ordering a thumbturn replacement to ensure the correct depth is specified.

 

Lever Return Spring

The lever return spring (Schlage part L283-040 for the L Series) provides the return force that brings the lever back to horizontal after it is depressed. This is the highest-wear component in the L Series hub assembly and fails through fatigue on high-traffic doors. Lever sag is the primary symptom. The lever return spring is available individually and is far less expensive than replacing the full hub assembly. Replace the spring first before assuming the hub or spindle requires replacement.

 

Strike Plate

The L Series strike is the steel plate mortised into the door frame that receives the latchbolt and deadbolt. The standard L Series strike is a full-length plate matching the 8-inch armor front. Strike replacement is needed when the bolt pockets deform from extended high-traffic use, when the door has settled and the bolt pockets no longer align with the bolts, or when the frame is repaired and the original strike prep is modified. Always confirm whether the strike is a standard or a high-security box strike before ordering.

 

Falcon MA Series: The High-Traffic Value Mortise Lock

The Falcon MA Series is the Grade 1 mortise lock positioned below the Schlage L Series in price but at the same ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certification level for both operational and security performance. It meets ANSI A156.13 Series 1000 Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims and conventional mortise cylinders. It is UL listed for 3-hour fire doors under both UL 10B neutral pressure and UL 10C positive pressure testing, the same fire listing as the L Series.

 

Falcon MA Series Key Specifications

 

SpecificationDetail
ANSI ratingA156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational and Security
Fire ratingUL 10B, UL 10C, UBC 7-2 (3-hour fire door)
LatchboltTwo-piece stainless steel, mechanical anti-friction bolt, 3/4 inch projection, field reversible
SpindleIndependent, breakaway design at maximum 480 in-lb to protect chassis
Armor front1-1/4 inch by 8 inch, brass or stainless steel, adjustable for door bevel, reinforced with heavy gauge steel stabilizing ribs
Backset2-3/4 inch standard
Door thickness1-3/4 inch to 1-7/8 inch standard
Cylinder format6-pin solid brass conventional, 5-pin keyed standard. SFIC available in 6 or 7-pin.
Cylinder keywayFalcon G keyway on conventional cylinders. A keyway on IC cores.

 

Falcon MA Series Spindle Breakaway

The Falcon MA Series uses independently mounted spindles designed to break away at a maximum of 480 inch-pounds of torque. This is the Falcon equivalent of the Schlage Vandlgard function: when someone applies excessive forced torque to the outside lever in an attempt to retract the latch or deadbolt, the spindle detaches from the chassis before that force reaches the internal mechanism. The chassis remains intact and functional. The spindle requires replacement after a breakaway event, but the chassis and all other components are preserved.

This matters for parts ordering. After a forced entry attempt on a Falcon MA Series installation where the door resisted entry, the spindle is likely broken or detached even if the door looks fine from the outside. Always check the spindle engagement when servicing an MA Series lock that has experienced a forced entry attempt. A loose or rattling lever with a firm chassis is the diagnostic sign of a broken spindle.

 

Falcon MA Series Cylinder Compatibility

The Falcon MA Series accepts cylinders from multiple sources. Conventional cylinders ship with the Falcon G keyway standard. SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core) cylinders are available in 6-pin or 7-pin configurations and accept Falcon SFIC cores as well as compatible cores from other manufacturers. Schlage Classic cylinders in C, E, and CE keyways operate the Falcon MA Series using the 5622-STD cam, which is a notable cross-brand compatibility feature that simplifies cylinder sourcing on projects where a Schlage key system is already in use.

The cylinder guard (parts A08790 and A08794) accommodates different cylinder lengths and door thicknesses. The correct cam must be specified based on the cylinder type and function. The factory supplies the correct cam when the function and door thickness are specified at order time. On field replacements, always confirm which cam is installed before ordering a replacement cylinder, as mismatching the cam to the cylinder produces a lock that operates in only one direction.

 

Falcon MA Series Functions

The Falcon MA Series uses a different function coding system from the Schlage L Series but covers similar ANSI function categories. Common functions include MA101 (passage), MA301 (privacy), MA381 (entrance), MA461 (classroom), and MA481 (storeroom). All function codes in the MA Series follow the pattern MA + function number + keyway/cylinder designation. When ordering replacement parts for the MA Series, confirm the MA function code from the label on the case body before selecting any chassis, latchbolt, or trim component.

 

Mortise Lock vs Cylindrical Lock: When Does Mortise Make Sense?

Mortise locks cost significantly more than cylindrical locks to purchase and install. They require a deeper and more complex door preparation. Parts are more function-specific and more expensive per component. Despite all of this, mortise locks are the correct specification in specific contexts where their advantages justify the cost.

 

FactorMortise LockCylindrical Lock
Deadbolt integrationDeadbolt integrated into case on applicable functionsSeparate deadbolt required for deadbolt security
Anti-shim protectionAuxiliary deadlatch plunger standard on most functionsDeadlatch feature present on commercial Grade 1 models
Attack resistanceConcealed mechanism, harder to attack from exteriorMechanism partially exposed at bore through door
Service life3 to 5x longer than cylindrical in commercial useStandard commercial service life
Function flexibility40-plus functions on L Series, electrified options extensive24 functions on ND Series Grade 1
Installation complexityHigher. Requires mortise pocket, precise alignmentLower. Standard cylindrical bore prep
Parts costHigher. Function-specific, finish-specific componentsLower. More universal components across functions

 

Mortise locks are correctly specified on main building entries, secured office suites, healthcare patient area doors where tamper resistance is required, government facility doors, and any opening that justifies the higher purchase cost through extended service life. For interior corridor doors, storage rooms on lower-security floors, and any door where Grade 2 performance is sufficient, browse the cylindrical lock parts catalog for Schlage ALX Series or Falcon T Series alternatives that serve the application at lower cost.

 

How to Identify Your Mortise Lock Before Ordering Parts

The correct identification process for mortise lock parts ordering requires three pieces of information, all of which come from the installed hardware.

 

Find the Model Number on the Case

Remove the inside lever and rose or escutcheon to expose the lock face. The model number (L9080, LV9070, MA481) is stamped or labeled on the case face or on the armor front. On Schlage L Series, the LV prefix confirms a Vandlgard chassis. On Falcon MA Series, the MA prefix and function number identify the model. Do not order parts based on the door hardware appearance alone. A standard L9080 and an LV9080 Vandlgard look identical from the outside but use different internal components.

 

Confirm the Cylinder Type

The cylinder type (conventional, FSIC, SFIC, less cylinder) determines which cam is installed and which replacement cylinders are compatible. Conventional cylinders have a solid body with a visible keyway. IC cylinders have a removable core with a control key function. The P, R, L, or C suffix in the model number confirms the original cylinder specification. If the label is worn, remove the cylinder and measure the body diameter and check whether a core is present.

 

Note the Finish Code and Door Handing

Armor fronts, levers, roses, and escutcheons are finish-specific. The finish code is typically a three-digit number (626 = satin chrome, 619 = satin nickel, 613 = oil rubbed bronze). On Falcon MA Series, the door handing must also be specified for most keyed functions because the chassis is handed. Schlage L Series locks are non-handed for most standard functions, but some specialized function configurations require hand specification.

 

SecurityParts.com organizes both series in the mortise lock parts catalog by brand and series with interactive exploded diagrams on every model. For the complete Schlage hardware catalog including L Series, ND Series, and B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage commercial hardware parts catalog. For Falcon hardware including MA Series mortise locks and T Series cylindrical locks, browse the Falcon commercial hardware parts catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Mortise Lock Parts

Function-specific diagrams, cylinder cam guidance, L9050 universal case knowledge, and same-day shipping on stocked components.

 

Function Code Guidance

Armor front, chassis, latchbolt, and cam are all function-specific. We document which part applies to which function so you do not receive a physically fitting part that does not operate correctly.

 

L9050 Universal Case

We document the universal transformation capability of the L9050 case. Facilities that know this stock one case type instead of nine and reduce inventory costs significantly.

 

Cross-Brand Cylinder Support

Falcon MA Series accepts Schlage Classic cylinders with the 5622-STD cam. We document this compatibility so you do not need to maintain separate cylinder inventories for mixed-brand buildings.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most L Series and MA Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. A failed mortise lock on a secured entry is not a problem that waits a week for parts. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order confirmation.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Mortise Lock Parts

  • We document the auxiliary deadlatch plunger alignment requirement. Strike misalignment greater than 1.5mm vertical defeats deadlocking without any visible symptom. This field fact prevents misdiagnosed latchbolt replacements that do not fix the actual problem.
  • We document the L9050 universal case transformation capability. Facilities managers who know this use one case type for nine functions instead of stocking nine separate cases. No other parts supplier explains this in their buyer-facing content.
  • We document the Falcon MA Series spindle breakaway mechanism. A loose lever after a forced entry attempt means spindle replacement, not chassis replacement. Ordering the less expensive spindle instead of a full chassis saves significant cost on post-incident repairs.
  • We document the Schlage Classic cylinder cross-compatibility on Falcon MA Series using the 5622-STD cam. Buildings with mixed L Series and MA Series locks can use one cylinder inventory rather than two.
  • We carry Schlage and Falcon mortise lock parts alongside cylindrical lock parts, deadbolt parts, and door closer parts. One order services the complete commercial door opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Mortise locks are part of a complete commercial door opening. The main entry door that has an L Series mortise lock also has a door closer, often an electric strike or exit device, and sometimes alarm hardware on the same opening or building.

For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on doors that use a separate deadbolt alongside a mortise lock on a secondary opening, browse the deadbolts catalog. For Schlage ND Series, ALX Series, and Falcon T Series cylindrical lock parts on interior doors in the same facility, browse the cylindrical locks catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries in the same building, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same facility, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door in the facility with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Mortise Lock Parts

 

What mortise lock series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Schlage L Series Grade 1 mortise lock and the Falcon MA Series Grade 1 mortise lock. Both series have dedicated model pages organized by function code with exploded diagrams for visual part confirmation before ordering.

 

What is the Schlage L Series function code and why does it matter for parts ordering?

The function code identifies how the lock operates: which side is always free, which side is keyed, whether a deadbolt is present. Common codes include L9010 (passage), L9050 (entrance/office), L9070 (classroom with full deadbolt), and L9080 (storeroom, outside lever always locked). The function code determines which chassis, latchbolt, armor front, and cylinder cam are correct. Parts across different function codes are not interchangeable even when the cases appear identical.

 

What is the L9050 universal case and why is it important?

The Schlage L9050 universal case can be transformed into nine different L Series functions using specific conversion parts per the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide. A facility stocking the L9050 can reconfigure it for multiple functions without ordering nine separate configured cases. This eliminates significant inventory carrying cost and lead time for uncommon function combinations. It is the most important single inventory knowledge point for facilities maintaining large L Series installations.

 

What is the difference between the armor front and the latch front on a mortise lock?

The armor front (armored front/scalp plate) is the hardened steel face plate on the door edge covering the mortise case and resisting pry and drill attacks. It is finish-specific and function-specific. The latch front is the internal component housing the latchbolt mechanism inside the case. Both are separate replaceable parts. The Schlage L Series armor front part 09-663 fits L9050, L9056, L9060, L9070, L9071, L9080, and L9082 functions in the 626 satin chrome finish.

 

Can the Falcon MA Series accept interchangeable core cylinders?

Yes. The Falcon MA Series accepts SFIC cylinders compatible with Falcon and some other manufacturers' cores. The core removes by rotating the control key and pulling gently, enabling immediate rekeying without disassembling the lock. SFIC cylinders are available in 6-pin or 7-pin configurations. Schlage Classic cylinders in C, E, and CE keyways also operate the MA Series using the 5622-STD cam.

 

What causes drooping levers on a mortise lock and how do I fix it?

Drooping levers are most commonly caused by fatigued lever return springs in the hub assembly. The springs provide approximately 2 pounds of return force at the lever tip and fatigue over extended service. Replace the lever return spring (Schlage L283-040) before assuming the hub or spindle requires replacement. On Falcon MA Series, also check whether the spindle breakaway has engaged after a forced entry attempt, as a detached spindle produces a loose lever that requires spindle replacement, not spring replacement.

Schlage ND Series, ALX Series and Falcon T Series Cylindrical Lock Parts Guide

SecurityParts.com carries parts for three commercial cylindrical lock series: the Schlage ND Series Grade 1 (24 mechanical functions, beyond-Grade-1 strength), the Schlage ALX Series Grade 2 (single modular chassis, field function change), and the Falcon T Series Grade 1 (extra heavy-duty, accepts any manufacturer's cylinder). The function code determines the correct chassis, spring cage, and trim components. Never order parts by appearance alone. The ND Series and ALX Series share lever styles for visual suiting but use different chassis and function kits. Parts that fail first are the spring cage, latch, and cylinder. Always confirm function code and manufacture date before ordering.

Commercial cylindrical locks are on more doors per building than any other lock category. Office corridors, storage rooms, restrooms, classrooms, patient rooms, server closets. Every one of those doors has a chassis, a latch, a spring cage, a cylinder, levers, and a strike. When one component wears or fails, replacing it correctly the first time depends entirely on having the right series and function code before you open any catalog page.

SecurityParts.com stocks parts for the three most widely installed commercial cylindrical lock series: the Schlage ND Series, the Schlage ALX Series, and the Falcon T Series. This guide covers every component, the function codes that determine which parts you need, what fails first, and how to order without a return. Browse the complete cylindrical lock parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for interactive diagrams on every model.

24 Mechanical functions available in the Schlage ND Series
3,100 in-lb Abusive lever torque resistance on the Schlage ND Series
Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA rating on both the ND Series and Falcon T Series
1,600 lbs Offset lever pull resistance on the Schlage ND Series
 

The Three Series at Security Parts: How They Compare

Schlage ND Series

 

Grade 1 | Beyond-Grade-1 Strength

The strongest-selling commercial cylindrical lock in North America. 24 mechanical functions. Withstands 3,100 in-lb of abusive lever torque, 2.5x the Grade 1 standard. 1,600 lb offset lever pull resistance. Supports conventional, FSIC, and SFIC cylinder formats. Available with Vandlgard anti-ligature protection on all locking functions.

Schlage ALX Series

 

Grade 2 | Modular Field-Configurable

Single patented chassis design supports most functions and all cylinder applications. In-field function change without ordering a new lock. Grade 1 compression springs prevent lever droop. Stainless steel latchbolt. 5-point spindle engagement. Field-selectable Vandlgard on all locking functions. Suites visually with ND Series levers.

Falcon T Series

 

Grade 1 | Extra Heavy Duty

Extra heavy-duty Grade 1 cylindrical lock with Pressure Release lever rotation standard to protect internal components under excessive force. Accepts any manufacturer's cylinder including Schlage, Sargent, and Corbin Russwin. Compression spring eliminates lever sag. 3-hour UL fire rated. Suited for government, military, institutional, and high-abuse applications.

The suiting strategy nobody explains clearly: The Schlage ND and ALX Series are specifically designed to suite visually. Use ND Grade 1 on exterior entry doors, secured offices, server rooms, and any opening requiring Grade 1 performance. Use ALX Grade 2 on storage, interior corridors, and lower-traffic interior doors where budget matters. Both series share the same lever designs and finishes, so the building maintains a consistent visual appearance while the hardware grade matches the security requirement of each individual opening.
 

Schlage ND Series: Understanding Function Codes Before Ordering Parts

The ND Series function code is the most critical piece of information needed before any parts order. The function code determines the chassis configuration, the spring cage type, and which trim components are compatible. Ordering a spring cage or adjustment plate from the wrong function creates a non-functional lock even when the physical parts fit together.

 

The Most Common ND Series Functions in Commercial Buildings

 

Function CodeANSI DesignationHow It WorksTypical Application
ND10PassageBoth levers always free. No locking.Closet doors, non-secure corridors
ND40F76 PrivacyInside push button locks outside lever. Emergency turn release from outside.Restrooms, private offices, ADA-compliant privacy
ND44Hospital PrivacyIndicator on inside shows room status. Key override from outside.Healthcare patient rooms, behavioral health
ND50F82 Entrance/OfficePush button locks outside lever until unlocked by key or inside lever.Private offices, executive suites, retail entry
ND53F109 EntranceTurn/push button locks outside lever. Key required to unlock (inside lever does not release).Secured offices, admin areas requiring key-only unlock
ND60F88 VestibuleKey in outside lever locks/unlocks it. Inside lever always free.Vestibule entry doors, building lobby control points
ND70F84 ClassroomOutside lever locked by key from outside only. Inside lever always free for immediate egress.K-12 and higher ed classrooms (standard classroom lockdown)
ND73F90 CorridorKey retracts latch from outside. Inside lever always free.Corridor doors on egress paths
ND80F86 StoreroomOutside lever always locked, key required. Inside lever always free.Storage rooms, server rooms, secure supply areas
 
The Vandlgard function ordering mistake: ND70 (standard classroom) and ND94 (Vandlgard classroom) look identical in the door after installation. The parts are not interchangeable. If a building was specified with ND94 Vandlgard and a non-Vandlgard spring cage or chassis is ordered for a repair, the anti-ligature protection is compromised. Always pull the function code from the original specification or the label on the chassis before ordering any internal component.
 

Vandlgard: What It Is and Why It Matters for Parts Ordering

Vandlgard is a Schlage-patented feature that prevents forced lever torque from retracting the latch. On a standard ND Series lock, applying enough sustained downward force to the outside lever can, in some cases, retract the latch through the mechanical connection between the lever and the chassis. Vandlgard adds a clutch mechanism that breaks the lever-to-chassis connection before that force threshold is reached, while the lever can still operate normally when the door is unlocked.

Vandlgard function suffixes are ND91 (entrance/office), ND92 (entrance), ND94 (classroom), ND96 (storeroom), and ND97 (corridor). The Vandlgard function is field-selectable on the ALX Series, which means you can enable or disable it without ordering a different lock. On the ND Series, the Vandlgard feature is built into the function-specific chassis and cannot be retrofitted to a standard chassis without replacing the chassis assembly.

Most current institutional specifications for K-12, higher education, and healthcare require Vandlgard on classroom, storeroom, and secured office functions. If your building was originally specified with Vandlgard functions, all replacement parts must be sourced for the Vandlgard version of that function, not the standard version.

 

Every Replaceable Component in Commercial Cylindrical Locks

Chassis Assembly

The chassis is the internal mechanism housing that sits inside the door bore and contains the locking mechanism, the spindle engagement, and the spring return components. The chassis determines the function of the lock. It is not universal across functions on the ND Series. An ND50 chassis is configured differently from an ND70 or ND80 chassis, even though they look similar from the outside.

The Schlage ND Series chassis is zinc and steel with zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Door thickness accommodation is 1-3/4 inch standard with spacer kits available for 1-3/8 inch through 1-11/16 inch doors. The ALX Series uses a single chassis design that accommodates most functions, which is its key advantage for inventory management: one chassis type covers most of a building's lock schedule.

Replace the chassis when the internal mechanism fails to hold the locked state, when the spindle has developed severe play that cannot be addressed by spring cage replacement, or when a function conversion is required on the ALX Series. On the ND Series, function changes require a complete chassis replacement along with matching trim.

 

Spring Cage Assembly

The spring cage holds the lever in the horizontal position and provides the return force that brings the lever back after it is depressed. This is the most frequently replaced component on high-use cylindrical locks. Spring cage failure presents as lever sag, lever that does not return fully after being depressed, or a lever that rattles in the horizontal position.

Both Schlage ND and ALX Series use Grade 1 compression springs in the spring cage assembly specifically to resist lever droop under sustained use. The Falcon T Series uses a compression spring behind the cylinder that serves a similar function. When replacing a spring cage, confirm whether the outside or inside spring cage is failing before ordering. Both sides have their own spring cage assembly and they are not interchangeable with each other.

Diagnostic test before ordering a spring cage: Grip the lever and manually push it upward from below. A failing spring cage will feel as if it has almost no resistance before reaching the horizontal stop position. A functioning spring cage will feel firm from the moment you begin pushing upward. This test takes 5 seconds and confirms the spring cage diagnosis before ordering, preventing the more expensive mistake of ordering a full chassis assembly when only the spring cage needs replacement.
 

Latch Assembly

The latch is the spring-loaded bolt that extends from the door edge and clicks into the strike plate on the frame. On commercial cylindrical locks, the standard latch is a deadlatch, not a simple spring latch. A deadlatch has a plunger alongside the latch bolt that, when depressed by the strike plate on closing, prevents the latch bolt from being pushed back by a credit card or similar tool from the latch side of the door.

The Schlage ND Series default latch is part 13-247 with a 2-3/4 inch backset and 1-1/8 inch by 1-1/4 inch faceplate. The Falcon T Series default latch is part 23981145, a deadlatch with 2-3/4 inch backset and 1-1/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch square corner faceplate. Always confirm the backset (2-3/4 inch standard, 2-3/8 inch available) before ordering a latch replacement.

Latch failures on commercial cylindrical locks include the latch not retracting smoothly when the lever is depressed, the latch bolt not springing back after depression, and the deadlatch plunger binding or not depressing correctly. A latch that does not retract when the lever operates normally indicates the latch has failed, not the chassis. A latch that retracts but the lever feels stiff typically indicates the spring cage, not the latch.

 

Strike Plate

The standard ND Series strike is part 10-025, an ANSI curved lip strike, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch, no box. The Falcon T Series default strike is part 5164, ANSI 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch with 1-3/16 inch lip length. The ALX Series uses the same ANSI curved lip strike as the ND Series.

Strike replacement is required when the strike is damaged by door misalignment, when the latch bolt fails to engage cleanly due to strike wear, or when a door handing change requires a different strike orientation. An ANSI box strike is used when hollow metal frame reinforcement is required. Always measure the existing frame cutout before ordering a strike replacement to confirm whether a standard or box strike fits the existing frame preparation.

 

Cylinders and Cylinder Formats

All three series at SecurityParts.com support multiple cylinder formats. Understanding the cylinder format installed is essential before ordering any cylinder replacement.

 

Cylinder FormatAbbreviationDescriptionBest Application
ConventionalStandardStandard pinned cylinder, 6-pin. Rekeyed by pulling and repinning.Small to medium facilities with stable occupancy
Full-Size Interchangeable CoreFSICCore removed and replaced without disassembling the lock. Standard ANSI size.Campuses and large facilities with frequent rekeying needs
Small Format Interchangeable CoreSFICSmaller core, used in Best SFIC and compatible systems.Facilities with an existing SFIC key system
Less Cylinder (LC)LCOrdered without any cylinder. Customer supplies their own.Facilities with proprietary key systems or restricted keyways

 

The Falcon T Series is specifically designed to accept cylinders from competing manufacturers including Sargent and Corbin Russwin in addition to Schlage. Some cylinders require modification of the lock for proper fit. Always specify the cylinder manufacturer when ordering a T Series with a non-standard cylinder.

 

Levers, Roses, and Trim

Levers on the ND Series are available in 9 designs including Athens, Rhodes, Sparta, Saturn, Broadway, Latitude, and Omega styles. The ALX Series shares these same lever designs, which is the visual suiting feature that allows mixed Grade 1/Grade 2 buildings to maintain a consistent appearance. Levers are pressure cast zinc finished to match mating parts.

The rose is the circular cover plate that conceals the chassis bore and the mounting screws on each side of the door. The ND Series rose is 3-7/16 inch standard diameter. The ALX Series rose is 3-7/16 inch standard, matching the ND Series for a seamless appearance when both are installed in the same building.

On the ALX Series, an optional break-away feature is available on Rhodes levers for most locking functions. When excessive torque is applied, the handheld portion of the lever breaks away from the shank, protecting the internal chassis from the torque damage that would otherwise require chassis replacement. This is a documented X Factor feature of the ALX Series and worth specifying on doors that receive frequent abuse.

 

Schlage ALX Series: The Modular Advantage and What It Means for Parts

The ALX Series modular design is the most significant feature for facilities managers and locksmiths who maintain large building inventories. A single chassis type supports most functions and all cylinder applications. This means a building can stock one chassis type and change functions in the field when a room's use changes, rather than ordering a new configured lock for every function change.

 

How In-Field Function Change Works

The ALX Series function is determined by a separate function kit that drops into the chassis. Changing from an ALX50 office function to an ALX70 classroom function requires the ALX70 function kit, not a new lock. The chassis stays. The lever stays. Only the function kit changes. This approach reduces inventory carrying costs, eliminates lead time waiting for factory-configured stock, and lets locksmiths carry a small number of kits on their truck rather than multiple configured lock units.

The installation sequence is designed for this: drop in the interior lever, install the function into the chassis, place the chassis in the door bore with the outside lever on the spindle, drop in the latch, drop in the cylinder or exterior function part. The separate compartment packaging keeps parts organized and prevents the small-part loss that often delays field service calls.

 

Captured Screws

The ALX Series uses captured screws in the latch, strike, and inside spring cage. Captured screws are retained in the component and do not fall out when the component is removed from the door. This eliminates the most common cause of rework on cylindrical lock service calls: small screws falling into wall cavities or onto floors during disassembly. On a building with dozens or hundreds of locks being serviced in a single shift, this feature has a real cumulative impact on service time.

 

Falcon T Series: The Multi-Cylinder Advantage and Pressure Release

The Falcon T Series occupies a distinct position in the cylindrical lock market. It is Grade 1 extra heavy-duty, designed for the highest-abuse institutional applications including government and military facilities, correctional housing, and any environment where locks receive deliberate physical attack rather than normal use.

 

Pressure Release Lever Rotation

The Falcon T Series includes Pressure Release lever rotation as a standard feature. When excessive torque is applied to the outside lever beyond the normal operating range, the lever rotates to a stop position that breaks the mechanical connection to the chassis rather than transmitting that force into the internal mechanism. This prevents the internal chassis damage that requires replacement after a forced entry attempt. The Pressure Release mechanism returns to normal operation after the excessive force is removed, without requiring any parts replacement, which is what makes it a standard feature rather than a consumable component.

 

Universal Cylinder Acceptance

The Falcon T Series is designed and marketed specifically on its ability to accept cylinders from competing manufacturers. In retrofit applications, this means a facility with an existing Corbin Russwin or Sargent key system can install T Series locks and retain their existing key system without rekeying. The T Series ships with 6-pin chambers drilled in 5-pin configuration as standard. 6-pin pinning is available at no extra cost when specified at ordering. This cylinder flexibility is the primary reason the T Series is specified on government and military retrofit projects where key system continuity is a security requirement.

 

Parts That Fail First: Realistic Replacement Frequency

Here is the actual field replacement order across all three series based on service call frequency.

1. Spring cage assembly. The most common replacement item on cylindrical locks with more than five years of high-traffic use. Lever sag, incomplete lever return, and lever rattle all trace to spring cage fatigue. Always try spring cage replacement before ordering a chassis.

2. Latch assembly. Latch bolts wear at the tip from repeated contact with strike plates that are slightly misaligned. The deadlatch plunger binding is a specific failure mode on latches that have been in service for more than 10 years without lubrication. Latches are inexpensive individual components and should be replaced rather than lubricated repeatedly once wear is visible on the bolt tip.

3. Cylinder. Cylinders wear from key insertion, especially in high-traffic entry doors. Signs of cylinder wear include a key that operates stiffly, a key that only works in one rotational direction, or a cylinder that spins without retracting the latch. FSIC and SFIC cylinders in interchangeable core systems can be replaced in seconds without disassembling the lock. Conventional cylinders require pulling the lock for cylinder removal.

4. Lever assembly. Levers bend, crack, or have their finish worn off from high-contact use. Lever replacement is cosmetic when the lock function is not impaired. Lever replacement is functional when a bent lever fails to return to horizontal or fails to fully depress the chassis mechanism on operation.

5. Strike plate. Strike wear accelerates when the door has settled and the latch bolt contacts the strike lip rather than entering the pocket cleanly. A worn or deformed strike allows a door that feels locked to actually be holdable open with sustained pressure. Strike replacement is inexpensive and should be done proactively when door alignment has been corrected.

 

What nobody else documents about ND Series manufacture dates: Schlage updated the ND Series manufacturing specifications on January 31, 2017. Components manufactured after that date have revised internal geometry in some function configurations. The service manual specifies two separate parts lists: one for locks manufactured before January 31, 2017, and one for locks manufactured after. Always check the manufacture date on the chassis label before ordering internal function components for a Schlage ND Series lock. Ordering a post-2017 spring cage for a pre-2017 chassis can result in a part that fits physically but does not function correctly.
 

How to Identify Your Lock Model Before Ordering

The model label is on the chassis body, visible when the inside lever and rose are removed. The label shows the series designation (ND Series, ALX Series, T Series), the function code (ND70, ALX50, T581), the finish code (626, 622, 619), and the handing if the lock is handed. For Schlage ND Series, the manufacture date is also on this label and is critical for selecting the correct parts revision.

If the label is worn or missing on an older ND Series unit, the function can often be determined by testing: the way the inside and outside levers behave without a key present tells you the function. A lever that is always free on one side and always locked on the other is storeroom (ND80). A lever that locks with a button from inside is entrance/office (ND50). A lever that locks from the outside with a key but the inside is always free is classroom (ND70).

For Falcon T Series locks, the model is stamped or cast into the chassis body itself. Common T Series model codes include T501 (passage), T521 (privacy), T561 (storeroom), T571 (classroom), and T581 (entrance/office).

SecurityParts.com organizes all three series in the cylindrical locks parts catalog by brand and model with interactive exploded diagrams. For Schlage commercial hardware parts including the ND Series, ALX Series, and Schlage B Series deadbolts, browse the Schlage catalog. For Falcon commercial hardware parts including the T Series and Falcon exit devices, browse the Falcon catalog. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Cylindrical Lock Parts

Series-specific diagrams, function code guidance, and same-day shipping on the components that get a building's locks back in service.

Function Code Guidance

We document which parts belong to which function. ND70 Vandlgard vs standard ND70. Pre-2017 vs post-2017 ND Series. These distinctions prevent wrong-part orders that cost time and freight.

Three Series Covered

Schlage ND Grade 1, Schlage ALX Grade 2, and Falcon T Series Grade 1 all on one catalog page with model-specific diagrams. One order covers a full building service call.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most cylindrical lock parts ship same day from US warehouses. A failed classroom or storeroom lock is an operational and security issue that cannot sit open for a week.

 

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. Our team confirms series, function, manufacture date, and cylinder format before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Cylindrical Lock Parts

  • We document the Schlage ND Series January 31, 2017 specification change. Pre-2017 and post-2017 units require different internal components for some function configurations. No other parts supplier explains this before the order is placed.
  • We distinguish between standard function codes and Vandlgard function codes. ND70 and ND94 are not interchangeable. Parts are listed under the correct function designation so the Vandlgard protection is not inadvertently removed during a repair.
  • The ALX Series modular function-change advantage is documented on our model pages. Facilities managers who do not know about the in-field function kit change continue to order full configured locks when only the function kit is needed.
  • We carry Schlage cylindrical lock parts alongside Schlage L Series mortise lock parts, Schlage B Series deadbolt parts, and Von Duprin exit device parts. One order services the complete building opening.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience behind every pre-order compatibility confirmation.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Cylindrical locks are part of a complete commercial door opening. The complete assembly on most institutional doors also includes a door closer, exit device, or mortise lock at higher-security openings.

For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security and main entry doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Schlage B Series deadbolt parts on doors that use a deadbolt alongside a cylindrical lock, browse the deadbolts catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any door with automatic closing hardware, browse the door closers catalog. For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on egress doors in the same building, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on access-controlled entries, browse the electric strikes catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Schlage, Falcon, Von Duprin, LCN, and Detex in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Commercial Cylindrical Lock Parts

 

What cylindrical lock series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Schlage ND Series Grade 1, Schlage ALX Series Grade 2, and Falcon T Series Grade 1 cylindrical locks. All three series have dedicated model pages with exploded diagrams organized by series and function code for visual part confirmation before ordering.

 

What is the difference between the Schlage ND Series and ALX Series?

The ND Series is Grade 1 with 24 mechanical functions and beyond-Grade-1 strength ratings (3,100 in-lb lever torque resistance). The ALX Series is Grade 2 with a single modular chassis that allows in-field function changes without ordering a new lock. Both use Grade 1 compression springs and share the same lever designs and finishes for visual suiting in mixed-grade buildings.

 

What does the Schlage ND function code mean?

The ND function code identifies how the lock operates on each side. ND10 is passage. ND40 is privacy. ND50 is entrance/office with push button. ND70 is classroom with outside key lock only. ND80 is storeroom with always-locked outside lever. Vandlgard versions add anti-ligature protection: ND94 is Vandlgard classroom, ND96 is Vandlgard storeroom. Always confirm the function code before ordering chassis, spring cage, or trim components.

 

What is Vandlgard on the Schlage ND Series?

Vandlgard is a Schlage feature that prevents forced lever torque from retracting the latch. It adds a clutch mechanism that breaks the lever-to-chassis connection under excessive force while allowing normal lever operation when the door is unlocked. Vandlgard functions are designated with specific codes: ND91, ND92, ND94, ND96, ND97. Parts for Vandlgard functions must be ordered for the correct Vandlgard version, not the standard function version.

 

Can the Falcon T Series accept any manufacturer's cylinder?

Yes. The Falcon T Series is designed to accept cylinders from Schlage, Sargent, Corbin Russwin, and other manufacturers. The cylinder removes easily for quick re-keying. Some cylinders require modification to the lock for proper fit. Always specify the cylinder manufacturer when ordering. Standard configuration ships with 6-pin chambers pinned in 5, with 6-pin pinning available at no extra cost when specified.

 

What causes cylindrical lock lever sag and how do I fix it?

Lever sag is caused by spring cage fatigue or spindle wear. Try the diagnostic: grip the lever and push it upward from below. Minimal resistance confirms a failing spring cage. Replace the spring cage assembly first before assuming the chassis has failed. Both Schlage ND and ALX Series use Grade 1 compression springs to resist this failure. Falcon T Series uses a compression spring behind the cylinder that virtually eliminates lever sag in normal service.

Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts: 5100, 6100, 6200 and 6300 Series Complete Guide

Von Duprin electric strikes replace the fixed strike plate on a door frame and allow remote unlocking via access control. The 5100 is medium-duty, the 6100 and 6200 are heavy-duty stainless steel, and the 6300 is a fire-rated no-cut surface-mounted rim strike. Parts that fail most often are the solenoid assembly, the keeper, and the faceplate. Solenoid kits are voltage-specific: part 050237 for 12VDC, part 050240 for 24VDC. Always confirm wire color before ordering a replacement solenoid: black wires mean 24VDC, yellow wires mean 12VDC. Getting this wrong destroys the solenoid immediately.

Electric strikes are the most widely replaced access control hardware component in commercial buildings. Unlike mechanical strike plates, which are passive, an electric strike has a moving keeper, a solenoid, a spring, and electrical connections that all wear, corrode, and fail over time. The Von Duprin electric strike series is the most common in institutional and commercial buildings across North America, installed alongside Von Duprin and Falcon exit devices on virtually every category of egress door.

When one fails, you need the right part fast. A failed electric strike on a secured entry either leaves a door that cannot be locked or a door that cannot be opened from a credential. Both are problems that shut down operations. This guide covers every series, every replaceable component, the fail safe vs fail secure distinction that creates the most field confusion, and the exact diagnostic steps that identify the failed component before you order anything. Browse the complete Von Duprin electric strikes parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for model-specific diagrams on every series.

4 Active Von Duprin electric strike series: 5100, 6100, 6200, 6300
17 Configurations available in the 6200 Series alone
1,500 lbs Static holding force on the 6300 Series
UL 10C 3-hour fire door rating on the 6300 Series (fail secure only)
 

How Von Duprin Electric Strikes Work

A standard mechanical strike plate is fixed. The latch bolt from the door lock clicks into it and stays. An electric strike replaces that fixed plate with a mechanism that includes a movable keeper, called the lip or gate. When the door is closed, the keeper is rigid and holds the latch bolt securely. When an authorized credential or button press energizes the solenoid, the keeper pivots and allows the latch bolt to pass through, letting the door open without anyone touching the lock on the door.

This is the design advantage over fully electrified locksets. The mechanical lock on the door stays completely unchanged. The electric strike handles the access control function at the frame. You can retrofit access control onto existing doors with mechanical locks without replacing the lock itself, which is significantly less expensive and less invasive.

The solenoid is the electrical component that drives the keeper. When powered, it either locks or unlocks the keeper depending on the fail mode configuration. The solenoid connects to an access control panel output relay, a door release button, or a credential reader. The electrical connection is low voltage, typically 12VDC or 24VDC DC, and the wire run from the panel to the frame is carried through the wall or concealed in the frame cavity.

 

The Four Active Von Duprin Electric Strike Series

5100 Series: Medium Duty

An all-in-one boxed solution for rim exit device applications. The 5100 is the entry-level Von Duprin electric strike. Parts include the faceplate package (standard 4-7/8 inch or long 7-11/16 inch), screw package, mounting package, and solenoid replacement kit. The solenoid kit for the 5100 (part 050034) is specific to this series and includes the plunger and plunger spring as a single kit.

 

6100 Series: Heavy-Duty Rim

Heavy-duty stainless steel construction for rim exit device applications. The 6100 is the standard specification for rim exit device openings in commercial and institutional buildings. Compatible with Von Duprin 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 75, 78, 88, and 55 Series rim devices, and Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series rim devices. Uses the 6000 Series solenoid kits (050237, 050239, 050240) shared with the 6200 series.

 

6200 Series: Heavy-Duty, 17 Configurations

The most versatile series in the Von Duprin electric strike lineup. 17 configurations cover cylindrical lock, mortise lock, and rim exit device applications for new construction and retrofit. Integrated faceplates provide cleaner aesthetics. Uses Type A, Type B, Type C, and Offset Box assemblies depending on configuration. The preferred series for new construction projects with frame preparation in the door schedule.

 

6300 Series: Fire-Rated No-Cut

Surface-mounted rim strike requiring no frame cutting or modification. Attaches directly to the door frame stop face. Compatible with most rim exit devices from Von Duprin, Falcon, and other manufacturers. Fail secure only. UL 10C 3-hour fire-rated. Static strength 1500 lbs. Dynamic strength 70 ft-lbs. The correct specification when frame modification is not possible on aluminum storefronts or retrofit projects.

 

Fail Safe vs Fail Secure: The Most Important Decision Before You Order

This is the distinction that causes more wrong-part orders and post-installation failures on electric strikes than any other single factor. Getting it backwards means the door either cannot be secured or cannot be exited, depending on which way it is wrong.

 

Fail Safe (FS): Unlocks When Power is Lost

In a fail safe configuration, the strike is continuously powered to stay locked during normal operation. When power is cut, whether from a power outage, a tripped breaker, or a fire alarm activation, the solenoid releases and the keeper becomes free. The door can be pushed open without any credential. This is the required configuration for any fire-rated egress door where free exit must be maintained at all times, including during a power failure. It is also required for egress paths covered by IBC Chapter 10 where electronic locking is permitted only if the lock releases on fire alarm.

 

Fail Secure (FSE): Stays Locked When Power is Lost

In a fail secure configuration, the strike is energized only momentarily to unlock. During a power failure, the keeper remains rigid and the door cannot be opened without a credential. This is the correct configuration for server rooms, exterior building entries, secure storage areas, and any location where security must be maintained even during a power outage. The Von Duprin 6300 Series is fail secure only, which is required to achieve its UL 10C fire door rating.

 

Fire door rule that competitors rarely explain clearly: On a fire-rated egress door, a fail secure electric strike is only permitted if it is connected to the building fire alarm system and releases automatically on alarm activation. Using a fail secure strike on a fire door without fire alarm integration is a NFPA 101 and IBC code violation. The 6300 Series ships fail secure but requires fire alarm integration on fire-rated assemblies.
 

How to Identify the Fail Mode on an Installed Strike

There is a reliable field test that works on any installed electric strike. Remove power from the strike. Try to open the door by pressing or pulling the exit device. If the door opens without power, the strike is fail safe. If the door stays locked without power, the strike is fail secure. This takes 30 seconds and eliminates any ambiguity from worn or missing labels on the hardware.

For Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series units, the fail mode can be field-converted between fail safe and fail secure by repositioning the actuator inside the strike body without replacing the solenoid. The 050237 (12VDC) and 050240 (24VDC) solenoid kits are field-selectable between both modes. This conversion capability is one of the most valuable features of the 6000 Series and is documented in the service manual diagrams available on the SecurityParts.com model pages.

 

Every Replaceable Component in Von Duprin Electric Strikes

Solenoid Assembly: The Most Commonly Replaced Component

The solenoid is the electromagnetic coil that converts electrical current into the mechanical movement that drives the keeper. It is the component under the most electrical and thermal stress in normal operation and the one that fails most often in high-use installations.

Von Duprin 6000 Series solenoid kits are voltage-specific. This is the single most important detail in electric strike parts ordering.

 

Part NumberVoltageCompatible SeriesFail ModeWire Color
050034Varies5100 Series onlySeries-specificCheck label
05023712VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSEYellow wires
05023916VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSECheck label
05024024VDC6100 and 6200 SeriesField selectable FS/FSEBlack wires
 
Never swap solenoids by appearance alone. The 12VDC and 24VDC solenoid kits for the 6000 series look physically identical. The only reliable distinguisher is the wire color: yellow wires are 12VDC, black wires are 24VDC. Installing a 24VDC solenoid on a 12VDC system causes slow, incomplete keeper movement. Installing a 12VDC solenoid on a 24VDC system burns the coil immediately and permanently. Always verify wire color and system voltage before ordering.
 

Box Assembly

The box assembly is the metal housing that mounts in the door frame cutout and contains the solenoid, keeper spring, and electrical components. Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series strikes use several box assembly types depending on the frame configuration and application.

 

Type A Box: Standard box assembly for typical hollow metal frame applications. The most common configuration.

Type B Box: Used on 6200 series mortise and cylindrical applications with specific frame geometry requirements. Type B Box images in the parts manual confirm the installation orientation.

Type C Box: Used on 6100 and 6200 series applications requiring a different frame depth. Available in DS (door status) and DS-LC (door status with latch check) versions that add monitoring capability to the box assembly without a separate monitor switch.

Offset Box: For frame applications where the standard solenoid position creates a conflict with the frame construction. The offset box repositions the solenoid 90 degrees from the standard orientation.

 

Faceplate Package

The faceplate is the visible plate on the frame face that covers the strike body and presents the keeper opening. Von Duprin 5100 series faceplate packages are available in three configurations.

Part 050031: Standard 4-7/8 inch faceplate package for typical commercial frame applications.

Part 050032: Round corner 4-7/8 inch faceplate for frames with rounded corners or decorative trim.

Part 050033: Long 7-11/16 inch faceplate for applications requiring extended coverage of the frame face.

Faceplate packages include the faceplate, wire nuts, and all fasteners required for installation. Always specify the finish when ordering, as faceplates are available in multiple finishes and the finish code is required for the correct part.

 

Keeper (Strike Lip)

The keeper, also called the strike lip or gate, is the moving component that holds the latch bolt when locked and releases when the solenoid is activated. The keeper takes direct mechanical contact from the latch bolt on every door close, which makes it a wear component on high-traffic openings. The correct keeper for each 6200 series model varies because the lip design differs between cylindrical and mortise applications. Always confirm the exact strike model when ordering a keeper replacement.

A keeper with visible wear marks, deformation, or a loose pivot shows up as inconsistent latching or a door that does not feel firmly latched even when the access control system shows it as locked. Replacing the keeper alone is significantly less expensive than replacing the full strike assembly when the box and solenoid are still functional.

 

Screw Package and Mounting Package

Screw Package (PKGSCR.1003 for US32D finish, PKGSCR.1004 for black finish): Includes the #10-24 5/16 inch UFPHMS, 12-24 1/2 inch UFPHMS, 12-14 1 inch UFPHWS, and blue wire nut. Required when reinstalling a strike with damaged or missing original hardware.

 

Mounting Package (PKGMTG.1004 for US32D, PKGMTG.1005 for black): Includes the mounting tab zinc, mounting tab shim nylon, and 10-24 1/2 inch UFPHMS. The mounting tab allows the strike to be positioned horizontally in the frame cutout for precise latch alignment.

 

Solenoid Washer and Solenoid Spring

Part 964037 Solenoid Washer: Seats the solenoid in the box assembly and ensures proper alignment of the plunger. A missing or damaged washer causes solenoid misalignment that results in incomplete keeper movement even when the solenoid itself is functional.

Part 968713 Solenoid Spring: Returns the plunger to its resting position after each activation cycle. Spring fatigue is a legitimate failure mode on doors that are released hundreds of times per day. Symptoms include a keeper that activates correctly but returns slowly or incompletely to the locked position, creating a security gap on fail secure applications.

 

The 6300 Series: What Makes It Different and When to Use It

The 6300 is the only Von Duprin electric strike that requires no frame cutting. Every other series in the Von Duprin lineup requires cutting or modifying the door frame to recess the strike body. The 6300 mounts surface on the frame stop face, which makes it the correct specification in three specific situations where no other series works.

 

When the 6300 Is the Right Choice

Aluminum storefront retrofit: Aluminum storefronts have thermal breaks inside the frame profile. Cutting into the frame to recess a strike destroys the thermal break and compromises the building envelope. The 6300 mounts on the frame face without cutting, preserving the thermal break.

 

Historic preservation projects: Frame modification is not permitted on many historic building projects. The 6300 provides electrified access control without permanent modification to the original frame.

 

Tenant fit-out on leased space: When a tenant cannot modify the building structure, the 6300 delivers access control capability that can be removed at lease end without leaving a frame cutout.

 

6300 Key Specifications

The 6300 is fail secure only. It achieves UL 10C 3-hour fire door rating in the fail secure mode. UL 1034 burglary-resistant and UL 294 access control system listed. Static strength is 1500 lbs. Dynamic strength is 70 ft-lbs. Compatible with 12VDC or 24VDC using the plug-in voltage connectors shipped with the unit. Two voltage connectors ship in the package and only the correct one for the available system voltage is used.

 

6300 Exit Device Compatibility

The 6300 works with a broad range of rim exit devices. Von Duprin compatibility includes the 22/22-F Rim, 33A/35A Rim, 55 Rim, 88/88-F Rim, and 98/99/98-F/99-F Rim. Falcon compatibility includes the 19/19-F Rim, 24/24-F Rim, and 25/25-F Rim. The entry buzzer accessory (part 050242, for fail secure applications) is also compatible with the 6300 and is wired in parallel with the circuit to sound an audible alert when the strike is unlocked remotely.

 

6300 field fact that nobody documents: The 6300 is designed for "indoor use only" unless it is not continuously exposed to an outdoor environment. This means an exterior application where the 6300 is in a covered vestibule or recessed alcove is acceptable. A 6300 on a fully exposed exterior frame in a coastal or high-humidity environment will have a significantly shorter service life due to accelerated corrosion of the surface-mounted components. For fully exposed exterior applications, the 6100 or 6200 series with proper frame prep is the correct specification.
 

Troubleshooting Von Duprin Electric Strike Problems

Before ordering any replacement part, run this diagnostic sequence. Half of all reported electric strike failures are not component failures at all. They are power delivery problems, wiring issues, or latch alignment problems that require no parts whatsoever.

 

Verify Voltage at the Strike Terminals

Use a multimeter and confirm that the correct voltage is arriving at the strike terminals during an access grant signal. For 12VDC systems, confirm 12VDC plus or minus 10 percent. For 24VDC systems, confirm 24VDC plus or minus 10 percent. If voltage is not present at the strike terminals, the problem is upstream in the access control panel, the wiring run, or the power supply. No hardware replacement fixes a wiring or panel problem.

 

Confirm Voltage Matches the Solenoid

Check the wire color inside the strike. Black wires indicate 24VDC. Yellow wires indicate 12VDC. Confirm that the system voltage matches the solenoid voltage. A 12VDC solenoid receiving 24VDC burns immediately. A 24VDC solenoid on a 12VDC system will not actuate fully. This is the most common cause of a brand-new or recently serviced strike that still does not function correctly after replacement.

 

Eliminate Frame Pre-Load

Remove the strike from the frame completely. Apply the correct voltage directly to the strike terminals and observe the keeper. There must be 1/32-inch clearance between the latch bolt and the keeper lip when installed. If the latch bolt presses against the keeper, an internal protrusion prevents the slider from moving even when the solenoid activates correctly. If the strike works outside the frame but not inside it, the problem is latch bolt alignment, not the strike itself.

 

Check the Fail Mode Configuration

If the strike operates oppositely from what is expected, the wrong fail mode is specified. If the door unlocks when it should stay locked during a power cut, the strike is fail safe when it should be fail secure. If the door stays locked when it should free-exit during a power cut, the reverse is true. For 6100 and 6200 series units, the fail mode can be field-converted by repositioning the actuator without replacing the solenoid.

 

Test the Solenoid Directly

Apply the correct voltage directly to the strike terminals with the unit out of the frame. If the keeper does not move with correct voltage and no pre-load, the solenoid has failed and requires replacement. Confirm the solenoid spring and white washer are inside the solenoid body and that the plunger moves freely before concluding the solenoid has failed. A plunger that is stuck or binding due to debris may restore function after cleaning without requiring replacement.

 

Entry Buzzer and AC Rectifier Accessories

Two accessories for the Von Duprin electric strike series are commonly missing from parts orders because they are rarely described in detail anywhere.

 

Entry Buzzer (Part 050242)

The entry buzzer is available for fail secure strike applications only. It mounts in the door frame and wires in parallel with the strike circuit. When the strike is energized to unlock (in a fail secure configuration, this is when the door is being released for entry), the buzzer sounds an audible alert to notify the person inside that someone is requesting entry. This is the standard specification for any secured entry point where the occupant should be aware of remote unlock events. The buzzer is not compatible with fail safe strikes because in fail safe, the strike is powered continuously and the buzzer would sound constantly.

 

AC Rectifier Kits (SO12 and SO24)

Von Duprin electric strike solenoids are DC devices. Some access control panels and power supplies output AC rather than DC. The SO12 kit converts 12VAC to 12VDC for the strike solenoid. The SO24 kit converts 24VAC to 24VDC. These kits are field-installable and plug in-line to the solenoid wiring. If a newly installed strike chatters, hums, or activates erratically despite correct voltage at the terminals, the panel may be outputting AC to a DC solenoid. The SO12 or SO24 rectifier kit is the correct fix, not a solenoid replacement.

 

How to Order Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts Without a Return

Three pieces of information are required before any electric strike parts order.

1. The exact series and model number. The model number is stamped or labeled on the faceplate or on the box housing. Von Duprin 4200, 5100, 6100, 6200, 6300, and 6400 series all use different part numbers for components with the same name. A solenoid kit for the 5100 series (part 050034) is completely different from the 6000 series kit (050237 or 050240). Order by series designation, not by component name.

 

2. The system voltage. Confirm whether the access control panel outputs 12VDC or 24VDC at the lock output. This determines whether you order the 050237 (12VDC) or 050240 (24VDC) solenoid kit. If uncertain, measure with a multimeter during an access grant signal before ordering.

 

3. The fail mode. Confirm fail safe or fail secure before ordering any solenoid, box assembly, or complete strike. Solenoid parts for fail safe and fail secure configurations on the same series are not always interchangeable. The 6100 and 6200 series field-selectable kits cover both modes with the same part number, but the 6300 is fail secure only and no conversion is available.

SecurityParts.com organizes the complete Von Duprin electric strikes parts catalog by series with interactive exploded diagrams. You confirm the exact component visually before ordering. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts

Diagram-based identification, individual part stocking, and same-day shipping on components that cannot wait.

Diagram-Based Part ID

Every Von Duprin electric strike model page has an interactive exploded diagram. See exactly where each component sits before adding it to cart. No guessing from text descriptions.

 

Correct Solenoid Guidance

We document the wire color and voltage difference between the 050237 and 050240 kits. Ordering the wrong voltage destroys the solenoid. We prevent that before the order ships.

 

Same-Day Shipping

A failed electric strike on a secured entry or egress path cannot wait a week. Most Von Duprin electric strike components ship same day from US warehouses.

 

Full Series Coverage

5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series all on one catalog page. Browse by series and model. One order covers the complete opening.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Electric Strike Parts

  • We document the wire color difference between 12VDC and 24VDC solenoid kits (yellow vs black) so technicians do not destroy a new solenoid with the wrong voltage. No other parts supplier explains this upfront.
  • We explain the field conversion between fail safe and fail secure on 6100 and 6200 series units, which eliminates the need to order a whole new strike when only the fail mode needs to change.
  • We stock individual components including solenoid kits, faceplate packages, screw packages, mounting packages, solenoid washers, and solenoid springs. You do not need to buy a complete strike assembly to replace a single worn keeper or failed solenoid spring.
  • The 6300 outdoor limitation (indoor use only unless not continuously exposed) is documented on our model pages. Ordering the wrong strike for a fully exposed exterior application is prevented at the selection stage.
  • We carry Von Duprin electric strikes alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, LCN door closer parts, and exit alarm parts. One order services the complete door opening.
  • Same-day shipping on stocked parts from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450.

 

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin electric strikes are always part of a larger door opening assembly. The complete opening typically includes an exit device, a door closer, and sometimes a cylindrical or mortise lock on the same door.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on the same door, browse the commercial exit devices catalog. The electric strike and exit device on a rim-style opening must be matched for latch bolt geometry and throw depth. For Von Duprin parts by series including the 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 75, 88, and Guard-X, browse the Von Duprin brand catalog. For LCN door closer parts on the same commercial door, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on high-security doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex exit alarm parts on secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source across all brands in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts

 

What Von Duprin electric strike series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and interactive diagrams for the Von Duprin 5100 Series medium-duty electric strikes, 6100 Series heavy-duty rim exit strikes, 6200 Series heavy-duty strikes for mortise, cylindrical, and rim applications, and 6300 Series fire-rated surface-mounted rim strikes. All four series have dedicated model pages with exploded diagrams for visual part identification before ordering.

 

What is the difference between fail safe and fail secure on a Von Duprin electric strike?

Fail safe unlocks when power is removed. Required on fire-rated egress doors where free exit must always be maintained. Fail secure stays locked when power is removed. Required on secured perimeters where security must be maintained during a power outage. The 6300 Series is fail secure only. The 6100 and 6200 series solenoid kits (050237 for 12VDC, 050240 for 24VDC) are field-selectable between both modes.

 

What solenoid kit do I need for a Von Duprin 6100 or 6200 series electric strike?

Part 050237 for 12VDC systems. Part 050240 for 24VDC systems. Part 050239 for 16VDC AC rectifier applications. Confirm wire color before ordering: yellow wires mean 12VDC, black wires mean 24VDC. Installing the wrong voltage solenoid burns the coil immediately on 24V systems or causes incomplete activation on 12V systems.

 

Why is my Von Duprin electric strike not unlocking when power is applied?

Run the diagnostic in order: confirm correct voltage at the terminals, confirm wire color matches system voltage, remove the strike from the frame to eliminate latch pre-load, test the keeper movement with correct voltage applied directly. If the keeper moves outside the frame but not inside, latch alignment is the problem. If the keeper does not move even with no frame pre-load and correct voltage, replace the solenoid kit.

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 6100 and 6200 series electric strikes?

The 6100 is designed specifically for rim exit device applications. The 6200 offers 17 configurations for cylindrical lock, mortise lock, and rim exit device applications, making it the most versatile series in the lineup. The 6200 uses integrated faceplates for cleaner aesthetics and is preferred for new construction where frame preparation is part of the original door schedule.

 

What is the Von Duprin 6300 and when should I use it?

The 6300 is a fire-rated, surface-mounted rim electric strike that requires no frame cutting. It mounts on the frame stop face and is compatible with most rim exit devices from Von Duprin, Falcon, and other manufacturers. Fail secure only. UL 10C 3-hour fire-rated. Use it when retrofitting access control on aluminum storefronts, historic preservation projects where frame modification is not permitted, or tenant fit-outs where the frame cannot be permanently modified.

LCN Door Closer Parts: 4040XP, 4000 Series and Complete Service Guide

LCN door closers use a rack-and-pinion mechanism with hydraulic fluid to control closing speed. The 4040XP is the institutional flagship with cast-iron cylinder, forged steel arm, Liquid X all-weather fluid, Green Dial spring sizing (1 through 6, ships at size 3), and four adjustment valves. Arms are model-specific and not interchangeable between series. A leaking cylinder cannot be refilled in the field. If the sweep valve is fully open and the door still slams, replace the cylinder assembly. Always use the model number stamped on the body, not the body's physical appearance, to identify the correct replacement part.

LCN has manufactured commercial door closers since 1877. Walk through any school, hospital, government building, or office in North America and you will almost certainly pass an LCN closer. They are on more institutional doors than any competing brand, which also means they generate more field service calls than any competing brand.

Most of those service calls come down to the same handful of failures. Hydraulic leaks. Stripped spindles. Broken or bent arms. Valves that no longer hold their settings. Getting the right replacement part fast without a wrong-part return is what determines whether the door is back in service today or next week. This guide covers the complete LCN door closer parts catalog at the field level, starting with what actually fails and ending with how to order correctly.

1877 Year LCN began manufacturing door closers
2M ANSI Grade 1 rated cycles for the 4040XP
Size 1-6 Spring power range on the 4040XP Green Dial
30 Yrs Limited warranty on the LCN 4040XP
 

How LCN Door Closers Work

Every LCN surface-mounted closer operates on the same fundamental principle: a coil spring stores energy when the door opens and releases it to close the door, while hydraulic fluid flowing through calibrated valves controls the speed of that release. Inside the cast-iron body, a rack gear acts as a piston. The pinion shaft connects the rack to the arm outside. When you open the door, the arm rotates the pinion, which drives the rack against the spring. Hydraulic fluid is displaced from one side of the rack to the other through small internal channels with adjustable valve screws.

This is the mechanism that every valve adjustment interacts with. The sweep valve controls how fast fluid moves during the main arc. The latch valve controls the final 10 to 15 degrees. The backcheck valve restricts fluid movement when the door is pushed open hard, creating resistance that protects walls and hardware. None of these valves add or remove force. They only regulate the speed of fluid transfer. If the fluid is gone, no valve setting can correct a slamming or drifting door.

LCN fills every 4040XP with Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid, which maintains consistent viscosity from -30 degrees F to 120 degrees F for manual closers. This temperature stability is why the 4040XP performs correctly on exterior doors and vestibules where temperature swings are significant. Standard hydraulic fluid thins in summer heat and causes uncontrolled fast closing on exterior applications.

 

LCN Series Carried at SecurityParts.com

SecurityParts.com stocks replacement parts and interactive diagrams for every major LCN series currently in commercial service. Understanding which series is installed is the first step before any parts order. Browse the full LCN parts catalog to navigate by series.

 

LCN 1000 Series

Surface-mounted closers for light commercial and residential applications. Economy grade. Parts include cylinder assemblies, arm components, and cover plates.

 

LCN 4000 / 4040XP Series

The institutional flagship. Heavy-duty cast-iron body, Liquid X fluid, Green Dial, 30-year warranty. The most widely installed commercial closer in North America.

 

LCN 4210 / 4510 Smoothee

Parallel arm only. The heaviest-duty LCN surface closer. Designed exclusively for push-side parallel arm applications on very high-traffic exterior doors.

 

LCN 2030 / 5030 / 6030 Series

Heavy-duty concealed closers for high-traffic entrances where surface hardware is architecturally unacceptable. Body conceals in the frame transom.

 

LCN 3030 / 3130 Series

Medium-duty concealed closers. The 3030 uses an exposed double-lever arm. The 3130 uses a concealed track arm for minimal visible hardware.

 

LCN 2010 / 5010 Series

Concealed closers that hide both the body in the frame and the track in the door. Used on high-end institutional openings where no hardware is visible.

 

LCN Sentronic Series

Electromagnetic hold-open closers (3130SE, 4040SE, 4310ME, 4410ME). Integrates with fire alarm systems to hold fire and smoke barrier doors open and release automatically on alarm activation.

 

LCN Auto Equalizer Operators

Low-energy automatic operators (2610, 4810, 4820, 4840, 4630, 4640). For ADA-accessible entrances requiring hands-free push-pad or sensor activation.

 

The LCN 4040XP: Every Component Explained

Cylinder Assembly (4040XP-3071)

The cylinder is the heart of the 4040XP. It contains the spring, rack gear, pinion shaft, bearings, and all hydraulic fluid passages. LCN uses a high-strength cast-iron body with a 1.5-inch diameter piston. The pinion shaft on the 4040XP measures 3/4 inch in diameter, which is larger than the original 4040, giving 44 percent more bearing load capacity. This enlarged shaft is the main structural improvement of the XP designation.

When the cylinder leaks, the entire assembly must be replaced. LCN does not supply rebuild seals for field refilling. Trying to top up hydraulic fluid in a leaking 4040XP body does not restore function because the seal that failed will continue to fail. The correct repair is ordering a replacement cylinder assembly (part 4040XP-3071) matched to the finish code on the existing unit.

 

One of the most common field mistakes: Attempting to refill or re-seal an LCN cylinder in the field. LCN closers are not designed for this. Once the cylinder body leaks, order a replacement. Every minute spent trying to patch a leaking body is time the door is operating without hydraulic control.
 

Arm Assembly and Arm Configurations

The arm connects the closer body to the door or frame and is the component most likely to be physically damaged in service. LCN produces several arm configurations for the 4040XP. Choosing the wrong configuration for the mounting position is the most common installation error in the field.

 

Arm TypePart SuffixMounting PositionBest Application
Regular arm-3077Hinge side (pull side) or top jamb (push side)Interior commercial doors, standard offices, corridors
Parallel arm with PA bracket-RW/PAPush side only, arm folds parallel to frameExterior commercial doors, low-profile push-side requirement
Extra duty arm (EDA)-EDAHinge side or push sideHigh-abuse applications, schools, correctional facilities
Hold-open arm-3049HHinge side or top jambOpenings that must stay open at a fixed position
Cush N Stop arm-CUSHHinge side or top jambReplaces mechanical door stop; built-in cushion stop function
Track arm (4040T)-4040THinge side or push side with track railVariable hold-open position; hospital corridors, loading docks
 
Parallel arm sizing rule no one else explains: Parallel arm mounting is mechanically less efficient than regular arm mounting. LCN specifies adding one full spring size to every sizing table recommendation when using parallel arm. If the chart says size 3 for a regular arm on a 36-inch door, use size 4 for the same door in parallel arm. Skipping this adjustment is why parallel arm installations often fail to latch consistently.
 

The Green Dial Spring Power System

The LCN Green Dial is a patented visual indicator on the spring tube that shows the current spring power setting from size 1 through size 6. The 4040XP ships set to size 3, which provides adequate closing force for a standard 36-inch interior door in a regular arm configuration. Adjust with the 5/32-inch hex screw on the spring tube: clockwise increases spring power, counterclockwise decreases it.

Spring sizing is not guesswork. LCN publishes a sizing chart based on door width and mounting configuration. For interior doors up to 36 inches, size 3 is the starting point. For exterior doors from 36 to 48 inches, size 4 to 5. For exterior doors over 48 inches or high wind exposure locations, size 5 to 6. After setting the spring size, always verify ADA compliance with a calibrated force gauge. The dial setting is a starting point, not a guarantee of the actual force measured at the door face because door weight, hinge friction, weather seal drag, and threshold resistance all affect the actual opening force independently of the spring setting.

 

The Four Valve Adjustments

The 4040XP has four adjustment screws on the face of the closer body, labeled for identification. Each controls a different phase of the door's movement. Use a 3/32-inch hex key for the sweep and latch valves. Use the 5/32-inch hex key for the spring power screw. Turn clockwise to decrease speed (slow down), counterclockwise to increase speed.

 

ValveControlsADA RequirementCommon Problem When Wrong
Sweep (S)Door movement from fully open to 10-15 degrees from latchMinimum 5 seconds from 90 degrees to latch pointToo fast: door slams. Too slow: door drifts and fails to latch in drafty conditions
Latch (L)Final 10-15 degrees before the door fully closesMust engage latch bolt positively on every closeToo slow: door does not latch. On fire doors this is a NFPA 80 compliance failure
Backcheck (B)Resistance when door is opened past 70-75 degreesNo direct ADA requirementToo tight: door feels stuck when opening. No backcheck: hardware damage from hard opens
Delayed Action (D)Pause at 70 degrees before sweep phase beginsRecommended for ADA-accessible entrancesOnly available on CYLDEL-configured units. Not present on standard 4040XP
 
Field rule: Never open any valve more than 1.5 full turns from the fully closed position. Opening a valve beyond this point risks stripping the valve seat, causing a hydraulic leak that requires full cylinder replacement. Make adjustments in 1/8-turn increments and test after each adjustment.
 

Cover Plate (4040XP-72 and 4040XP-72-MC)

The 4040XP ships with a snap-fit non-handed plastic cover (part 4040XP-72) that protects the cylinder body and presents a clean finished appearance. The metal cover (part 4040XP-72-MC) is an optional upgrade for applications where the plastic cover is subject to physical abuse or where a more durable appearance is required. The snap-fit retention design on the current 4040XP cover is an improvement over earlier designs that required fasteners at each end.

 

Drop Plates and Mounting Brackets

Drop plates offset the closer body from the standard mounting position to accommodate non-standard door frame geometry, flush ceiling conditions, or narrow top rails that prevent direct mounting. LCN produces several drop plate configurations for the 4040XP. The 4040XP-18PA is the parallel arm drop plate. The 4040XP-18TJ is the top jamb push-side drop plate, which permits 120-degree maximum opening. Specifying the wrong drop plate or omitting one that is actually required causes arm binding, uneven door travel, and accelerated wear on the spindle.

 

Spindle and Bearing Assembly

The spindle connects the arm to the pinion shaft inside the cylinder body. The 4040XP uses full complement low-friction bearings to distribute load evenly across the full bearing race. Spindle wear produces a loose, rattling arm with noticeable play when the door is opened manually. Continuing to operate a closer with a worn spindle puts progressively increasing side load on the cylinder body, which accelerates wear and can eventually damage the housing threads. Spindle replacement is available without replacing the full cylinder assembly.

 

LCN Concealed Closers: 2030, 3030 and 3130 Series Parts

Concealed closers are specified when surface hardware is architecturally unacceptable. The body mounts inside the door frame transom or within the door top rail, making the hardware invisible when the door is closed. These are the closers found in hotel lobbies, high-end office building entrances, healthcare reception areas, and government buildings where the aesthetic standard prohibits visible surface hardware.

 

LCN 2030 / 5030 / 6030 Series

The 2030 Series is LCN's heavy-duty concealed closer for high-traffic applications. The body conceals in the frame transom and the arm track conceals in the door top rail, making all hardware invisible from both sides of the door. The 5010 variant conceals only the body in the frame while using an exposed double-lever arm. The 6030 is sized for heavy doors in demanding institutional environments. Parts include the track assembly, track roller, cylinder assembly, and mounting package. Track rollers on the 2030 series are among the most frequently replaced components because they take direct mechanical contact on every door cycle.

 

LCN 3030 / 3130 Series

The 3030 uses an exposed double-lever arm with the body concealed in the frame transom. The 3130 adds a concealed single-lever arm with a low-friction track and roller assembly, minimizing visible hardware even further. Both carry ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 ratings. Parts for the 3130 include the track roller assembly (part 3130-3034H), cylinder assembly, and arm components. The track roller on the 3130 is a wear item on high-traffic doors and should be inspected during annual fire door maintenance.

 

LCN Sentronic Electromagnetic Hold-Open Closers

The 3130SE, 4040SE, 4310ME, and 4410ME Sentronic series integrate an electromagnetic hold-open coil that connects to the building's fire alarm system. During normal operation, the electromagnetic coil holds the door open. When the fire alarm activates, power is interrupted, the coil releases, and the spring drives the door closed. This is the correct specification under NFPA 80 Section 6.6.1 for fire and smoke barrier doors that must remain open during occupied hours but close automatically on alarm activation. Parts include the magnet assembly (SEM 7800 Series), coil components, and the closer cylinder assembly specific to each Sentronic model.

 

Parts That Fail First on LCN Closers: A Realistic Ranking

After 30-plus years of supplying commercial door hardware parts, we know the actual failure sequence. Here is what breaks, in the order it breaks.

1. Hydraulic cylinder seals: The most common LCN failure in the field. Oil visible on the door frame or floor confirms seal failure. The cylinder must be replaced as a unit. No field repair. No refill. Order the replacement cylinder matched to your model number and finish.

2. Arm assembly: Arms crack, bend, or strip their spindle connection on high-abuse applications. A bent arm causes uneven door travel and rapidly accelerates spindle wear in the cylinder body. Replace the arm before the cylinder sustains secondary damage. Always match the arm suffix to the exact model on the closer body.

3. Spring tension loss: After 10 or more years of continuous use in high-traffic locations, the coil spring loses tension and the door fails to latch consistently. The Green Dial can compensate for minor tension loss, but cannot overcome a spring that has lost its mechanical memory. Cylinder replacement is the correct resolution.

4. Spindle and bearing wear: Produces noticeable arm play and a loose, rattling door. Most common in correctional, healthcare, and educational environments where doors are opened hard repeatedly. Replace before the side loading damages the cylinder body threads.

5. Cover plate damage: Cracks or breaks from deliberate abuse or cart impact on corridor doors. The plastic cover (4040XP-72) is available individually. In high-abuse settings, upgrade to the metal cover (4040XP-72-MC) on replacement.

6. Drop plate and shoe fastener failure: Loose mounting screws cause arm play that looks like spindle wear. Check and tighten all mounting fasteners before ordering spindle components.

 

How to Identify Your LCN Closer Model Before Ordering Parts

The model number is the only reliable identifier for ordering LCN replacement parts. Physical appearance is not sufficient because multiple LCN series look nearly identical from the outside but use different internal components, different arms, and different mounting hardware.

Remove the cover plate (two fasteners at the ends of the cover on most models). The model and finish code are on a sticker attached to the cylinder body. The model number format is typically: series designation, suffix code, and finish code. For example, 4040XP-3077-689 identifies a 4040XP series with a standard regular arm and aluminum finish.

For older units where the sticker has worn off, measure the horizontal center-to-center hole distance on the closer body. LCN body sizes are standardized across production runs, and those dimensions can narrow the identification to a small number of candidates. If the body casting shows numbers like "71" or "320G," those are internal casting marks, not model numbers. They identify the production run, not the series. Always use the sticker model number for parts ordering.

What nobody else tells you: The 4040XP directly replaces and retrofits the older 4041 closer. All 4041 accessories are compatible with the 4040XP body. If you have an older 4041 body that needs arm replacement, current 4040XP arms and accessories will fit. This eliminates the need to carry legacy 4041 inventory for facilities with older installations.
 

LCN Door Closer Adjustment: Step-by-Step

Proper adjustment prevents the most common LCN service calls and extends cylinder life. Follow this sequence for any new installation or post-repair adjustment.

 

Step 1: Set All Valves to a Known Baseline

Turn all adjustment valves clockwise until they seat gently. Do not overtighten. The valve seats are brass and will strip. From fully closed, open each valve 1.5 turns counterclockwise. This is the approximate factory starting position.

 

Step 2: Set Spring Power with the Green Dial

Use LCN's sizing chart to determine the correct spring size for the door width, door weight, and mounting configuration. Set the Green Dial to that position. For parallel arm mounting, add one size. Check the actual opening force with a calibrated force gauge if ADA compliance is required. 5 pounds maximum is the ADA threshold for interior non-fire-rated doors.

 

Step 3: Set Sweep Speed

Open the door to 90 degrees and time the closing arc from 90 degrees to within 3 inches of the latch. ADA requires a minimum of 5 seconds. Adjust the sweep valve in 1/8-turn increments until the timing is correct. Test at least three consecutive closes to confirm consistency.

 

Step 4: Set Latch Speed

Watch the final 10 to 15 degrees before the door closes. The latch should engage cleanly with a firm click, not a slam. If the door stops short of latching, open the latch valve slightly. If it slams in the final arc, close the latch valve slightly. On fire-rated doors, positive latching on every close is a NFPA 80 compliance requirement, not a preference.

 

Step 5: Set Backcheck

Open the door quickly past 70 degrees and feel for resistance. Backcheck should provide a cushioning effect that prevents the door from slamming into a wall, but should not prevent full opening. If backcheck engages before 70 degrees and restricts normal door use, open the backcheck valve slightly. If there is no backcheck at all and the door swings freely to 180 degrees, close the backcheck valve clockwise until resistance is felt at 70 to 75 degrees of opening.

 

Never unscrew any LCN valve more than 1.5 turns from fully closed. Opening a valve beyond 1.5 turns risks hydraulic fluid leaking from the valve bore. A leaking cylinder cannot be refilled. Replacing it costs far more than the few seconds saved by skipping this limit.
 

LCN Sentronic and Fire Door Applications

LCN Sentronic electromagnetic hold-open closers are the correct specification for any fire or smoke barrier door that must remain open during normal building operations. They are not optional convenience items. NFPA 80 Section 6.6.1 specifies that a fire door held open by any device must be connected to the building fire alarm system so it closes automatically on alarm activation.

Using a mechanical wedge, a rubber doorstop, or any manual hold-open device on a fire-rated door is a NFPA 80 violation that creates both a code compliance issue and a liability exposure. The Sentronic series eliminates this problem by integrating the hold-open function into a UL-listed fire door hardware assembly that responds automatically to the fire alarm system.

Parts for Sentronic series closers include the SEM 7800 Series magnet assemblies, the electromagnetic coil components, and the closer cylinder assembly. Browse the full door closers parts catalog for all Sentronic series diagrams and components.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for LCN Door Closer Parts

We stock the full LCN catalog with interactive exploded diagrams so you confirm the right component visually before ordering.

 

Interactive Diagram Lookup

Every LCN model page has an exploded diagram. Click the component, confirm it, add to cart. No guessing from part descriptions alone.

 

Individual Parts Stocked

One arm, one cover plate, one drop plate. No minimum quantities and no forced kit purchases to get a single replacement component.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most LCN parts ship same day from US warehouses. A door out of service on a code-required fire door path is not a situation that waits a week.

 

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. We confirm the correct part from your model number before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for LCN Parts

  • We stock LCN parts organized by series with separate model pages. The 4040XP, 3030, 3130, 2030, and Sentronic series are each cataloged individually so the correct component is identifiable without guesswork.
  • We document the 4041-to-4040XP retrofit compatibility. If you have an older 4041 body, current 4040XP accessories fit. You do not need to find discontinued 4041 inventory.
  • We explain the parallel arm sizing adjustment that most suppliers omit. Add one full spring size when using parallel arm mounting. This one field fact prevents the most common post-installation latch failure.
  • We carry LCN alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, electric strike parts, and cylindrical lock parts. One order covers a complete institutional door service call.
  • Same-day shipping from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450, which most facility service call orders reach.
  • 30-plus years of commercial hardware experience. When you describe the symptom, we identify the part, not just the series.
  •  

Related Parts and Products at SecurityParts.com

LCN door closers are part of a complete door hardware assembly. A full service call on an institutional door typically involves the closer, the exit device, and sometimes an electric strike or lock hardware on the same opening.

For Von Duprin and Falcon exit device parts on the same door, browse the commercial exit devices catalog by brand and series. For Von Duprin electric strike parts including 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series, browse the electric strikes catalog. For mortise lock parts on high-security doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X exit alarm parts on secondary exits, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Schlage and Falcon cylindrical lock parts on interior office and corridor doors, browse the cylindrical locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, and Detex in a single session, or reach the team at 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About LCN Door Closer Parts

What LCN door closer series does SecurityParts.com carry parts for?

SecurityParts.com carries replacement parts and diagrams for the LCN 1000 Series, 2210 Series, 2310ME/4310ME/4410ME Sentronic, 2610/4810/4820/4840 Auto Equalizer Operators, 3130SE/4040SE Sentronic, 4000 Series surface closers, 4040SEH Holder, 4210/4510 Smoothee, 4310HSA/4410HSA Sentronic, 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer Operators, 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark Operators, 9500/2800 Senior Swing Operator, Sentronic SEM 7800 Series Magnets, 2010/5010, 2030/5030/6030, and 3030/3130 concealed closers.

 

What is the LCN Green Dial and how do I use it?

The Green Dial is a patented visual indicator on the 4040XP spring tube showing the current spring power setting from size 1 through 6. The closer ships set to size 3. Turn the 5/32-inch hex screw clockwise to increase spring power. For parallel arm mounting, add one full spring size to any sizing chart recommendation. After any spring adjustment, verify actual opening force with a calibrated force gauge for ADA compliance.

 

What hydraulic fluid does the LCN 4040XP use?

The 4040XP uses Liquid X all-weather hydraulic fluid, which operates from -30 degrees F to 120 degrees F in manual closer applications. LCN closers are not designed for field fluid refills. A leaking cylinder must be replaced as a complete assembly. Attempting to add fluid to a leaking closer body does not restore function.

 

Are LCN door closer arms interchangeable between series?

No. Arms are model-specific. A 4040 series arm does not fit a 4011 body even though the bodies look similar. Always match the arm part number to the exact model number stamped on the closer body. Using an incompatible arm causes improper door geometry and accelerates spindle wear.

 

Why does my LCN door closer still slam after I adjust the sweep valve?

If the sweep valve is fully open and the door still slams, hydraulic fluid has leaked from the cylinder. Without fluid, the closer becomes a raw spring with no damping. No valve adjustment fixes this. Replace the cylinder assembly. Oil visible on the door frame or floor confirms the diagnosis.

 

What is the difference between the LCN 4040XP and the LCN 4000 Series?

The 4040XP is the current production heavy-duty closer in the 4000 Series family. It features an enlarged 3/4-inch pinion shaft with 44 percent greater bearing load capacity than the original 4040, Liquid X all-weather fluid, Green Dial spring indicator, patent-pending snap-fit cover, and labeled regulation valves. The 4040XP directly replaces and retrofits the older 4041. All 4041 accessories are compatible with the 4040XP body.

Von Duprin 98/99 Series Exit Device: Complete Parts and Service Guide

The Von Duprin 98/99 series is on more institutional doors than any other exit device in North America. Schools, hospitals, government buildings, universities, airports. If you manage a commercial facility or work as a locksmith, you will service this device more than any other in the Von Duprin lineup.

This guide covers everything you need to work on 98/99 series exit device parts efficiently. It covers the configurations, the parts that fail, the dogging details that trip people up, the electrified options, and exactly how to order the right component without a return. Browse the full Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for model-specific diagrams on every series.

 

What Makes the 98/99 Series Different From Other Von Duprin Devices

The 98/99 sits at the top of the Von Duprin lineup. It is the deepest specification in terms of electrified options, the most configurable in terms of device type, and the only Von Duprin series that carries full Made in USA production. ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification means it is tested to the highest cycle and force standards in the exit device category.

The case distinction is simple: the 98 series has a smooth mechanism case and the 99 series has a grooved case. Both are mechanically identical. The grooved case on the 99 gives a better grip surface under repeated push pad contact, which is why healthcare and institutional specifications often call for the 99 specifically.

The forward compatibility advantage is what separates the 98/99 from every other series. A mechanical device installed today can be converted to QEL quiet electric latch retraction, MEL motorized retraction, Chexit delayed egress, Allegion Connect, or other access control options years later without replacing the device body. Facilities managers doing phased access control upgrades depend on this.

 

98/99 Series Configurations: Which One Fits Your Door

Rim Device (98, 99, F-98, F-99)

The rim device mounts on the door face and latches at a single frame-side strike. Standard for single doors and paired doors with a center mullion. The F-prefix versions (F-98, F-99) are fire exit hardware with a UL fire listing. They must positively latch on every door close and do not support hex dogging. The standard 98/99 (without F-prefix) is panic exit hardware that supports mechanical dogging on non-fire-rated doors.

 

Surface Vertical Rod (9827, 9927)

SVR devices add top and bottom engagement rods running on the door face, providing three-point locking for double door openings without a center mullion. The 9827 is the 98 series SVR and the 9927 is the 99 series SVR. Both use a dedicated center case (part 109358) which is different from the rim device center case (part 109012). These are not interchangeable. Confirm configuration before ordering any center case.

 

Concealed Vertical Rod (9847, 9947)

CVR devices route the rod hardware inside the door for architectural applications where surface rods are not acceptable. Hotel lobbies, healthcare reception areas, high-end commercial interiors. CVR parts must match the exact model and door prep. CVR installation is typically done at the factory; field replacement of internal rod components requires door removal in most cases.

 

Wide Door Cable (WDC)

The WDC configuration uses a cable rather than rigid rods for very wide double doors where rod flex would be a problem. Available on the 98/99 series for oversized openings.

 

Mortise Device (98/9975, XP98/XP99)

The mortise configuration integrates the 7500 mortise lock body into the panic device chassis for maximum security depth alongside code-compliant egress. The 7500 mortise lock body has been in service since approximately 1977. Browse mortise lock replacement parts for the 7500 body components that pair with the 98/9975 mortise exit device.

 

ConfigurationModel NumbersDoor TypeCenter Case Part
Rim (panic)98, 99Single door, mullion pair109012
Rim (fire)F-98, F-99Fire-rated, single door109012
SVR (panic)9827, 9927Double door, no mullion109358
SVR (fire)F-9827, F-9927Fire-rated double door109358
CVR9847, 9947Architectural double doorModel-specific
Mortise9875, 9975High-security single doorModel-specific

 

Panic vs Fire Exit Hardware on the 98/99 Series

Every 98/99 series device is available in both standard panic and fire exit hardware versions. Getting this wrong before ordering replacement parts is the most common mistake in 98/99 series maintenance.

Standard panic devices (98, 99, 9827, 9927): UL listed for panic exit applications. Support mechanical hex dogging. Channel cover plates specific to panic configuration.

 

Fire exit hardware (F-98, F-99, F-9827, F-9927): UL listed for fire exit hardware. The F-prefix in the model number confirms this. Must positively latch on every door close. Hex dogging is not permitted. Channel cover plates carry different part numbers from the panic versions.

 

Critical: Installing a panic channel cover plate on an F-series device voids the UL fire exit hardware listing. Always check whether the device is fire-rated before ordering any cover plate replacement.
 

Dogging on the 98/99 Series

Hex dogging holds the push pad depressed during business hours so the door operates as a push/pull entry without latching. Standard on all panic-rated 98/99 devices. Not available on F-series fire exit hardware.

 

Why Dogging Fails on the 98/99

The dogging shaft hole (part 090040) is approximately 1/4 inch deep. The most common cause of dogging failure in the field is using a short 5/32-inch hex key that does not reach full depth. Short keys round out the hex engagement point over repeated use, requiring shaft replacement. Always use the long version of the 5/32-inch hex key and seat it fully before rotating.

The dogging assembly has three components:

090040 Dogging Shaft: The piece the hex key engages. Field note: the pre-1998 shaft has a different profile. For devices manufactured before 1998, use part 050709 conversion kit.

090042 Dogging Adapter Spring: Locks the adapter into the mounting bracket.

090043 Dogging Adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.

Field tip: If dogging worked previously but now the hex key spins without engaging, the shaft is stripped. Order part 090040 and replace it before the surrounding housing sustains damage.
 

Parts That Fail First on the 98/99 Series

Based on actual field replacement frequency, here is a realistic sequence of what wears out first:

1. Dogging assembly: The most common maintenance item on high-traffic doors. Shaft strips, springs fatigue, adapters crack. All three components are available individually.

2. End cap and bracket: The plastic end cap on the hinge side of the device breaks under repeated contact. When it breaks, the dogging cover plate slides off. Von Duprin introduced the 900397 metal end cap kit in 2016 to replace the historically fragile plastic version. This is a worthwhile proactive upgrade on any high-use 98/99 device.

3. Push bar retrofit kit: The push bar assembly bends or deforms on high-abuse applications. Push bar retrofit kits are available for 3-foot and 4-foot door widths, replacing just the push bar without requiring a full device swap.

4. Center case: The center case (109012 for rim, 109358 for SVR) wears after decades of continuous use. The 109012 rim center case has been in production for approximately 40 years and replaces all non-fire-rated 98/99 rim center cases with backward compatibility to devices installed in the 1980s. This long backward compatibility chain is one of the most valuable maintenance advantages of the 98/99 series.

5. Latch return spring (090039): Used in the push bar assembly to return the latch. Fails from spring fatigue on very high-cycle doors.

 

Electrified Options on the 98/99 Series

The 98/99 series has the deepest electrified options catalog of any Von Duprin device. Each option converts or adds to the mechanical device without replacing the body.

 

QEL: Quiet Electric Latch Retraction

The QEL is a modular field-installable kit that adds electric latch retraction to a mechanical 98/99 device. When an authorized credential is presented, the latch retracts silently. This is the most commonly specified electrified conversion on existing 98/99 devices in phased access control upgrades. The HD-QEL variant adds hex dogging capability to the electrified device.

 

MEL: Motorized Electric Latch Retraction

Motor-driven latch retraction for applications where solenoid noise is not acceptable. Quieter operation than standard EL. Used in library environments, healthcare patient areas, and quiet office zones.

 

Chexit: Delayed Egress

Holds the door latched for 15 seconds after the push bar is activated, with a local alarm sounding during the delay. NFPA 101 compliant for controlled egress applications. Used in retail, psychiatric facilities, and any location where unauthorized egress must be deterred without blocking emergency egress.

 

RX: Request to Exit

A switch placed in the push bar that signals the access control panel when the bar is pressed. Notifies the system of an authorized egress event to prevent false alarms on the secured entry side. Standard on any 98/99 device integrated into an access control system where the door also serves as a secured entry. The electric strikes parts catalog covers the Von Duprin electric strikes on the frame side that work alongside RX-equipped exit devices.

 

LX: Latch Bolt Monitoring

Monitors the position of the latch bolt, signaling the access panel when the door is not properly latched. Used on fire doors and secured doors where latch compliance monitoring is required by the inspection program.

 

ALK: Alarm Exit Kit

Converts the 98/99 to an alarmed exit device. Powered by a 9-volt battery. Controlled by a mortise cylinder (not included). When the push bar is pressed, the 85-decibel alarm sounds. The ALK is shared across the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 series.

 

CON: Allegion Connect

Wireless integration into the Allegion Connect ecosystem for remote monitoring and control.

 

How to Order 98/99 Series Parts Without a Wrong-Part Return

Three pieces of information are required before placing any 98/99 series parts order.

1. Confirm the configuration: Rim or SVR changes the center case part number entirely (109012 vs 109358). CVR and mortise use model-specific parts. Confirm which configuration is on the door before opening any catalog page.

2. Check the manufacture date: The manufacture date is stamped near the mechanism housing on the device body. Devices manufactured before 1998 use old-style dogging assemblies. The conversion kit (part 050709) updates pre-1998 devices to current spec dogging components. Post-1998 devices use parts 090040, 090042, and 090043.

3. Confirm panic or fire exit hardware: The F-prefix in the model number confirms fire exit hardware. Channel cover plates, dogging kits, and some trim components carry different part numbers between panic and fire configurations. Never order channel cover plates without confirming first.

SecurityParts.com organizes the complete Von Duprin 98/99 series parts catalog by model with interactive exploded diagrams on every model page. You confirm the component visually before ordering. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Why Choose SecurityParts.com for Von Duprin 98/99 Parts

Diagram-Based Identification

Every 98/99 model page has an interactive exploded diagram. You see exactly where each part sits before adding it to your cart.

Parts-Level Stocking

Individual components stocked: one dogging shaft, one end cap kit, one push bar retrofit kit. No forced kit purchases for a single replacement part.

Same-Day Shipping

Most 98/99 components ship same day from US warehouses. An exit device out of service on an egress door is a safety and compliance issue.

Pre-Order Support

Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page. Our team confirms part compatibility from your manufacture date and configuration before the order ships.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different

  • We stock Von Duprin parts by series and configuration, not by generic brand listing. Rim and SVR center cases are listed separately so you order the right one the first time.
  • Backward compatibility is documented. We note which parts apply to pre-1998 devices versus current production, so you don't order a current-spec dogging shaft for a device that needs the 050709 conversion kit.
  • Individual components are available. One dogging shaft, one latch return spring, one end cap kit. No minimum quantities, no forced kit purchases.
  • We carry Von Duprin alongside LCN door closers, Falcon exit devices, and cylindrical lock parts. One order covers a complete facility service call across multiple brands.
  • Same-day shipping on stocked parts. Free shipping on orders over $450.
  • 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience. We diagnose based on symptoms, not just catalog lookups.

 

Related Parts at SecurityParts.com

The 98/99 series operates as part of a complete door assembly. A full service call on an institutional door typically covers the exit device, the door closer, and sometimes an electric strike or lock hardware on the same opening.

For LCN door closer parts on the same opening, browse the door closers catalog by series. For Von Duprin electric strike parts, including 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 series, used on the frame side alongside 98/99 exit devices, browse the electric strikes catalog. For Von Duprin Guard-X exit alarm parts on secondary exits in the same building, browse the exit alarms catalog. For Schlage deadbolt parts on interior office doors in the same facility, browse the deadbolts catalog.

Browse all Von Duprin series: 22, 33A, 75, 88, 94/95, and the Guard-X, in the Von Duprin parts catalog, or explore the full commercial exit devices parts catalog to navigate by brand and series.

 

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Von Duprin 98/99 series exit device?

The Von Duprin 98/99 is the institutional flagship exit device made by Allegion. ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certified and UL listed for panic and fire exit hardware. Made in the USA. Available in rim, SVR, CVR, WDC, and mortise configurations with the deepest electrified options catalog in the Von Duprin lineup.

 

What is the difference between the Von Duprin 98 and 99 series?

The 98 has a smooth mechanism case and the 99 has a grooved case. Both are mechanically identical inside and use the same replacement parts. The grooved case on the 99 provides a better grip surface for high-contact institutional applications.

 

What is the dogging hole depth on the Von Duprin 98/99 series?

The dogging shaft hole is approximately 1/4 inch deep. Always use a long 5/32-inch hex key and seat it completely before rotating. Short hex keys strip the engagement point over time, which is the most common cause of dogging failure on 98/99 devices in the field.

 

Can I upgrade a mechanical 98/99 to electric latch retraction later?

Yes. This is the key forward compatibility advantage. A mechanical 98/99 can be field-converted to QEL, MEL, Chexit, or Allegion Connect years later without replacing the device body. This is why architects default to the 98/99 on institutional projects where phased access control is planned.

 

Are 98 series and 99 series parts interchangeable?

Yes. The 98 and 99 series use identical internal parts. The only difference is the exterior case finish. Any push bar, latch assembly, dogging component, center case, or electrified kit ordered for the 98 fits the 99 of the same configuration and manufacture date.

 

What is the Von Duprin 9927 and how does it differ from the 99 rim device?

The 9927 is the surface vertical rod (SVR) configuration of the 99 series. It uses top and bottom engagement rods for three-point locking on double doors without a center mullion. The rim device uses center case 109012. The 9927 uses center case 109358. These are completely different parts. Confirm configuration before ordering any center case.

Mortise Locks vs Cylindrical Locks: Which One Does Your Door Need?

If you're buying door hardware for a commercial project, you'll run into this choice pretty quickly: mortise lock or cylindrical lock? They both secure a door. They both come in Grade 1. But they work differently, install differently, and belong on different types of openings.

Here's a plain-language breakdown so you can pick the right one without overthinking it.

What Is a Mortise Lock

A mortise lock lives inside the door. To install one, a rectangular pocket (the mortise) has to be cut into the door edge. The lock body, which is a self-contained steel case, drops into that pocket and houses the latch bolt, deadbolt, and internal mechanism all in one unit. The lever or knob trim attaches through the door face with through-bolts that run the full thickness of the door.

That deep, integrated installation is what makes mortise locks strong. The mechanism is anchored inside the door structure itself, not just surface-mounted. The result is a lock that resists forced entry, handles heavy daily use, and offers more function options like entry, classroom, storeroom, and office functions, all within the same lock body.

You'll find mortise locks on the primary entrances of hotels, office buildings, schools, and government facilities. Any commercial door that sees constant traffic and needs serious security is a candidate for a mortise lock.

What Is a Cylindrical Lock

A cylindrical lock installs through two round bored holes drilled into the door: a larger hole through the face and a smaller one through the edge for the latch. The lock chassis sits in the face bore, and the latch mechanism sits in the edge bore. Lever or knob trim threads onto each side.

It's a simpler system. Installation is faster, the hardware costs less, and most doors in commercial buildings already come pre-drilled for cylindrical preps. That's why cylindrical locks are the most common lock type overall. They're practical, widely available, and perfectly adequate for a huge range of applications.

Most interior commercial doors use cylindrical locksets: office rooms, storage closets, conference rooms, restroom corridors. Grade 1 cylindrical locks from brands like Schlage, Sargent, or Yale handle this kind of use comfortably for years.

The Key Differences Side by Side

Installation

Cylindrical locks install in minutes on a pre-drilled door. Mortise locks require a precisely cut pocket in the door edge, and it's a more involved process and typically needs to be done by a professional or specified at the time the door is manufactured. Once the door prep exists, swapping hardware is straightforward. But you can't put a mortise lock on a door drilled for cylindrical hardware, or vice versa. The two preps are incompatible with no field workaround.

Security and Strength

Both types come in ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, which is the commercial standard. But a Grade 1 mortise lock and a Grade 1 cylindrical lock aren't structurally identical. The mortise lock's integrated case gives it an inherently stronger platform. The latch, bolt, and springs all live in one reinforced unit anchored deep in the door. A cylindrical lock relies more on the door's structural integrity around the bore holes. For primary entries and high-security applications, mortise wins. For standard interior commercial doors, a Grade 1 cylindrical lock is more than sufficient.

Functions Available

Mortise locks offer a wider range of functions in one unit, including entry, classroom, storeroom, hotel, and apartment functions, without needing separate hardware. Cylindrical locks also cover these functions but sometimes require adding a separate deadbolt to match the security level of a mortise set. Mortise locks also offer significantly more trim design options, which matters in architectural or high-end commercial projects where appearance is part of the specification.

Cost

Cylindrical locks are less expensive. Good Grade 1 commercial cylindrical hardware runs roughly $150 to $350 per opening. Grade 1 mortise locksets start around $300 and can go well past $600 per opening, not including professional installation labor for new door prep. On a building with 150 doors, that cost difference is significant. The right answer is using mortise where it's genuinely needed and cylindrical everywhere else, not defaulting to one type for the whole project.

Long-Term Durability

In heavy-use commercial environments, mortise locks tend to last longer. Their integrated design distributes stress across a larger case, which holds up better under constant door cycling. Cylindrical locks work well in their right applications but can wear out faster on a primary entry that processes hundreds of people a day. Mortise locks hold about 40% of the commercial door hardware market, favored for their durability in demanding environments, while cylindrical locks account for the remaining 60%, chosen for cost-effectiveness and straightforward installation.

Which One Should You Choose

The honest answer is: it depends on what the door is doing.

Use a mortise lock when: the door is a primary exterior entry, a high-traffic corridor in a school or healthcare facility, a hotel room entry, or any opening where security and long-term durability are the top priorities. Also use mortise when the door is already prepped for it. There's no reason to modify a door that's built for mortise hardware.

Use a cylindrical lock when: the door is an interior office, storage room, conference room, or any lower-traffic opening where a Grade 1 cylindrical lockset covers the security requirement. Most interior commercial doors fall into this category. Cylindrical is also the practical choice when budget is a real constraint on a multi-door project.

Never mix preps on the same door. If a door was manufactured with a cylindrical prep (ANSI 161), it needs cylindrical hardware. If it has a mortise prep (ANSI 86), it needs a mortise lock. Ordering the wrong one means returning it and waiting for the right hardware, a mistake that's easy to avoid by confirming the door prep before you order.

What About ANSI Grades

For any commercial door, Grade 1 is the right starting point. Both mortise and cylindrical locks are available in Grade 1 under ANSI/BHMA standards. A156.13 covers mortise locks and A156.2 covers cylindrical locks. Grade 1 cylindrical locks are tested to 800,000 cycles. Grade 1 mortise locks are held to similar cycle requirements with additional strength testing for the bolt and case.

Grade 2 is acceptable for interior commercial doors with light use. Grade 3 is residential hardware and shouldn't appear on a commercial specification. If you see a lock listed without a grade, skip it. The absence of certification is a red flag regardless of what the marketing says.

Top Brands to Know

For mortise locks, the names you'll see on most commercial specifications are Schlage (L-Series), Sargent (7000 Series), Corbin Russwin (ML2000 Series), and Yale (8800 Series). These are the brands architects and facility managers specify by name on door hardware schedules.

For cylindrical locks, Schlage (AL and ND Series), Sargent (10 Line), Best (9K Series), and Cal-Royal are the dominant commercial options. All manufacture Grade 1 products with interchangeable core options for large facilities that need master key systems.

Shop Door Locks at SecurityParts.com

SecurityParts.com carries both mortise and cylindrical locksets from the brands contractors and facility managers rely on. Every product listing includes the manufacturer's spec sheet so you can confirm the ANSI grade, function, and door prep before ordering.

Whether you're sourcing hardware for a full door schedule or replacing a single lockset, browse our mortise locks and cylindrical locks to find the right fit for your opening.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the difference between a mortise lock and a cylindrical lock?

A mortise lock installs inside a rectangular pocket in the door edge and houses the latch, deadbolt, and mechanism in one steel case. A cylindrical lock installs through two round bored holes in the door and is a simpler, more compact system. Mortise locks are stronger and offer more functions. Cylindrical locks are faster to install and more affordable.

Which is better for commercial doors: mortise or cylindrical?

Mortise locks are the standard for primary commercial entries and high-traffic openings. Cylindrical locks are widely used on interior commercial doors like offices and storage rooms where security demands are more moderate. Both are correct answers, just for different doors.

Can I replace a mortise lock with a cylindrical lock?

No. The door preps are incompatible. A mortise lock needs a rectangular pocket in the door edge. A cylindrical lock needs two round bored holes. There's no field modification that bridges them. You need hardware that matches the prep the door was built with.

How much does a commercial mortise lock cost compared to a cylindrical lock?

Grade 1 cylindrical hardware typically runs $150 to $350 per opening. Grade 1 mortise locksets generally start around $300 and can exceed $600, not including professional labor for new mortise prep work. Cylindrical costs less upfront. Mortise tends to offer better long-term value on heavy-use commercial doors.

What ANSI grade should a commercial door lock be?

Grade 1 for exterior, high-traffic, and fire-rated commercial doors. Grade 2 is acceptable for low-traffic interior doors. Grade 3 is residential only and shouldn't appear on any commercial specification.

Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts: Complete Replacement Guide

Security Parts carries parts for all three Falcon exit device series. The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard hollow metal and wood commercial doors. The 24 and 25 Series share a push pad design and the same service manual (108004). The most frequently replaced parts are the channel, end cap kit, dogging cover plate, and on electrified versions, the EL solenoid or HWEA alarm board. For pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies, the HWEA replacement board is part 650335.

Falcon exit devices are on more commercial egress doors in North America than any other panic hardware brand outside Von Duprin. The 19, 24, and 25 Series cover the full range of commercial applications: from light office and retail doors through aluminum storefront entries to institutional hollow metal fire-rated assemblies. Each series has distinct construction, stile requirements, and electrified option sets. Getting the right replacement part requires knowing which series is installed and which sub-configuration applies.

Browse the complete Falcon exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com, which includes the 19, 24, and 25 Series alongside the full Von Duprin and Detex exit device range. The Falcon hardware catalog covers all Falcon product lines including exit devices, mortise locks, and cylindrical locks.

Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certification on all three Falcon series
108004 Shared service manual number for 24 and 25 Series
June 2012 HWEA alarm assembly redesign date affecting board compatibility
24V DC EL solenoid voltage, 0.34A continuous duty on 24 and 25 Series
 

Falcon 19 vs 24 vs 25 Series: Which One Is Installed

Before ordering any replacement part, identifying the series is mandatory. The three series look similar from a distance but are built for completely different door constructions. Ordering a 25 Series end cap for a 24 Series device, for example, produces a part that will not fit.

 

Falcon 19 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Light-to-Medium Duty
 

For interior or exterior single and double doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. Stile as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Covers a 161 door prep for easy field retrofit. Rim (19-R) and surface vertical rod (19-V) configurations only. Non-handed. Optional 1-1/2-hour B label fire rating (F-19). Three finishes: SP28, SP313, US32D. 10-year warranty.

 

Falcon 24 Series

 

Narrow Stile | Heavy Duty | Aluminum Storefronts
 

Heavy-duty extruded aluminum construction for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. Rim (24-R), surface vertical rod (24-V), concealed vertical rod (24-C), and wide door cable (24-CWDC) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. All mounting screws concealed. Shares push pad design and service manual 108004 with 25 Series. EL not available on 24 fire rim devices.

 

Falcon 25 Series

 

Wide Stile | Heavy Duty | Hollow Metal and Wood
 

Wide stile heavy-duty device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors. Minimum 4-1/2-inch stile (3-1/2-inch on 25-C concealed VR). Rim (25-R), surface vertical rod (25-V), concealed vertical rod (25-C), wide door cable (25-CWDC), and mortise (25-M) configurations. Half-turn hex dogging standard. Heavy wrought center case with sintered metal parts. 10-year warranty. UL A label (3-hour) on fire-rated versions.

The identification test that takes 30 seconds: Look at the door stile width where the exit device is mounted. If the stile is narrow aluminum (typical of glass-heavy storefront entries), it is a 24 Series. If the stile is a standard hollow metal or wood door stile (4-1/2 inches or wider), it is likely a 25 Series. If it is a lighter interior door without heavy aluminum storefront construction, it may be a 19 Series. Confirm by looking at the channel. The 19 Series channel has a narrower profile and black plastic end caps on standard finishes. The 24 and 25 Series both have flush stainless steel push pads and no exposed screws or rivets on the back of the device.
 

What Exit Device Configurations Mean for Parts Ordering

Each series offers multiple configurations that determine which latch hardware, rods, and strikes are involved. The configuration suffix on the model number tells you what is installed.

 

SuffixConfigurationLatchingApplication
-RRim exit deviceSingle-point, rim latch at device headStandard single doors, paired doors with mullion
-VSurface vertical rodTwo-point: top latch at device head, bottom rod to floorSingle doors, double doors without mullion
-CConcealed vertical rodTwo-point: rods run inside door stileDoors requiring clean exterior face with no exposed hardware
-CWDCWide door cable/concealed, wood doorTwo-point concealed for wood door constructionWide or wood doors requiring concealed rod hardware
-MMortise exit deviceMortise lock case inside door, device operates latchHeavy-duty perimeter doors requiring mortise body strength; 25 Series only
F- prefixFire-rated versionSame as panic version but fire-listedAny fire-rated door assembly; cannot be dogged

 

Why the Rim vs Vertical Rod Distinction Matters for Parts

 

A rim device has one latch point at the device head and uses a single rim strike on the door frame. A surface vertical rod device adds a bottom rod running from the device head to a floor bolt, creating two-point latching. The bottom rod, floor strike, and bottom latch components are additional parts unique to vertical rod configurations that rim devices do not use. If you are ordering a strike or latch bolt replacement, you need to know whether the installation is rim or VR before ordering.

The 25-V surface vertical rod uses a 3788 surface-applied top strike and a 2130 mortised bottom floor strike as the standard configuration. The 25-C concealed VR uses a 4188 mortised top strike and 2130 bottom standard, with 4155 and 2126A as bottom options. Fire-rated 25-C uses strike 1279 standard and F1280 for B label applications.

 

Falcon 19 Series Parts: Channels, End Caps and Key Components

The 19 Series uses a narrower channel profile than the 24 and 25 Series. All mounting screws are concealed; latch fasteners are exposed to the egress side. The push bar height is 1-3/4 inches. The stainless steel latch bolt has a 3/4-inch throw with deadlocking standard.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
410719 Series channel, 3-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 3 feet
410819 Series channel, 4-foot doorStandard channel for doors up to 4 feet
65034319 Series channel end cap kit (with screws)Includes end cap, bracket, and all mounting hardware
65032019 Series end cap mounting bracket with SNBBracket only, for bracket replacement without full kit
4122Sex bolt, package of 1 (includes machine screw)Mounting fastener; #10-20 thread
650360F-19 channel cover plate, 3-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 3-foot door
650361F-19 channel cover plate, 4-foot (fire)Fire-rated version only, 4-foot door
65029719 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 4-footPanic (non-fire) version, 4-foot door
65030319 Series panic hex dogging channel cover, 3-footPanic (non-fire) version, 3-foot door
 
Pre-June 2012 alarm assemblies on 19 Series: For 19 Series installations with an exit alarm option built before June 2012, the replacement HWEA hard-wired exit alarm circuit board is part 650335. This board is not compatible with post-June 2012 alarm assemblies. The June 2012 redesign changed the alarm kit architecture, and using the 650335 board in a newer assembly will result in a non-functional alarm. Check the date code on the existing board before ordering any alarm board replacement.
 

Falcon 24 Series Parts: Heavy Duty Narrow Stile

The 24 Series is built from extruded aluminum for maximum strength on narrow stile aluminum storefront doors. The construction provides greater impact resistance than the 19 Series at the same stile width. The push pad design is shared with the 25 Series, which is why both reference the same service manual 108004.

 

Part NumberDescriptionNotes
66140824 Series channel, 3-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
66140924 Series channel, 4-foot doorExtruded aluminum construction
65029424 Series channel end cap kit, 1-3/4-inch doorKit includes end cap, bracket, and all fasteners for standard door thickness
65034824 Series channel end cap kit, 2-1/2-inch doorKit for thicker than standard door applications
65014724/25 Series EL kit, 3-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 3-foot channel devices
65014824/25 Series EL kit, 4-foot deviceElectric latch retraction for 4-foot channel devices

 

The 24 Series Door Thickness and End Cap Selection

The 24 Series serves aluminum storefront doors that come in two standard thicknesses: 1-3/4 inches (the most common commercial aluminum frame door) and 2-1/2 inches (thicker commercial storefront systems). The end cap kit part number changes based on this dimension. Part 650294 is for the 1-3/4-inch door and part 650348 is for the 2-1/2-inch door. Ordering the wrong kit produces an end cap that either leaves a gap at the stile edge or cannot seat against the door face at the correct depth.

 

The 24 Series EL restriction nobody documents at the part level: Electric latch retraction (EL) is available on 24 Series panic rim, panic SVR, and panic CVR devices. It is specifically not available on 24 Series fire rim (F-24-R) devices. Life safety code prohibits holding the latch retracted on a fire-rated rim device using an always-on EL solenoid. If the installation has a fire label on the door and uses a 24-R configuration, the EL kit (650147 or 650148) does not apply to that opening regardless of what the wiring diagram suggests. This restriction catches facility managers who upgrade access control on fire-door openings without checking the device configuration first.
 

Falcon 25 Series Parts: Wide Stile Heavy Duty

The 25 Series is Falcon's flagship exit device for standard commercial hollow metal and wood door applications. The center case is heavy wrought with sintered metal parts throughout the mechanism, making it more durable than extruded-only construction under heavy cycle loads. The top latchbolt is stainless steel with a 3/4-inch throw and deadlocking standard. Vertical rod configurations add a bottom bolt with a 1/2-inch throw.

 

25 Series Dogging: Half-Turn Hex, No Threads

Half-turn hex dogging is standard on the 25 Series with no threaded dogging components anywhere in the mechanism. Traditional threaded dogging on older exit devices requires turning a threaded rod several rotations, and the threads strip or corrode over time on high-cycle doors. The Falcon 25 Series half-turn hex design eliminates all threaded components from the dogging path. One half turn clockwise dogs the device. One half turn counterclockwise releases it. No stripping. No galling. This is why the 25 Series dogging mechanism outlasts competitor devices significantly on doors dogged and released multiple times daily.

Cylinder dogging is available as an option on the 25 Series using a 1-1/8-inch mortise cylinder with standard cam. This allows the outside cylinder to dog and release the device without carrying the hex key, which is the preferred configuration for reception desks and service counters where maintenance staff routinely dog the door at opening time.

 

25 Series Configurations and Stile Requirements

Stile requirements vary by 25 Series configuration. Standard 25-R and 25-V configurations require a 4-1/2-inch minimum stile. The 25-C concealed vertical rod configuration requires a 3-1/2-inch minimum stile on panic versions and 4-1/2-inch minimum on fire-rated F-25-C installations. The 25-CWDC (wood door wide cable configuration) requires a 6-1/2-inch minimum stile on wood doors. Ordering a 25-V or 25-C for a door with an undersized stile produces a device that cannot be correctly mounted.

 

25 Series ConfigurationMinimum StileDoor TypeFire Rating
25-R (rim)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-R)
25-V (surface VR)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional B label (F-25-V); A label available on fire pair
25-C (concealed VR, metal door)3-1/2 inch (panic); 4-1/2 inch (fire)Metal doorsOptional B label and A label on fire pair (F-25-C)
25-CWDC (concealed VR, wood door)6-1/2 inchWood doorsOptional B label (F-25-CWDC)
25-M (mortise)4-1/2 inchMetal or woodOptional fire rating

 

25 Series Fire Ratings: A Label vs B Label

The Falcon 25 Series supports two UL fire ratings depending on the configuration. The B label (1-1/2 hour) is available on all 25 Series configurations. The A label (3-hour) is available on fire pairs (F-25-M x F-25-V or F-25-C), permitting up to 4-foot by 10-foot single doors and 8-foot by 10-foot pairs. When ordering strike replacements for fire-rated 25 Series installations, the fire strike specification matters. The F-25-C uses strike 1279 as standard and F1280 for B label applications. The F-25-V uses strike 299F for fire-rated top and 499F for fire-rated pairs with mullion.

 

Hex Dogging: How It Works and What Fails

Dogging is the function that holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted, allowing the door to operate as a free-swinging door without requiring the push bar to be pressed on every pass. It is standard on the 24 and 25 Series panic versions and on the 19 Series panic version. It is never available on any fire-rated version of any series because holding a fire door latch retracted violates life safety code.

Hex dogging uses a hex key (Allen wrench) inserted into the dogging hole in the channel. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, the half-turn mechanism requires only a 180-degree rotation. The dogging cover plate conceals the dogging hole when not in use. This cover plate is a separately replaceable component if it is damaged or missing.

 

The dogging failure most technicians misdiagnose: A push bar that will not stay depressed after dogging is almost never a failed dogging mechanism. In more than 90% of field cases, the push bar returns to the undogged position because someone forgot the half-turn direction or did not complete the full half turn. Insert the hex key, depress the push bar fully, then turn the key clockwise exactly one half turn. If the key turns but the bar still does not stay depressed, check whether the installation is a fire-rated device (F-19, F-24, F-25). Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged and the mechanism is physically blocked. A fire-rated device on a non-fire-rated door is a common incorrect installation that generates repeated dogging complaints.
 

Electrified Options on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series

The Falcon 24 and 25 Series support a full range of electrified options for access control integration. Understanding the compatibility rules between these options prevents ordering combinations that cannot be installed together.

 

EL: Electric Latch Retraction

The EL option retracts the latch electrically without depressing the push bar, allowing the door to be opened from the outside by a credential reader, keypad, or building automation system. The EL solenoid operates at 24V DC and 0.34 amperes continuous duty. For 3-foot devices, the EL kit is part 650147. For 4-foot devices, it is part 650148. EL can be combined with FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure outside trim), DM (device monitoring), LM (latch monitoring), and AE/LK options. EL cannot be combined with ED (electric dogging), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), or KOR (key override) on the same device.

Electric latch retraction serves two common use cases in commercial buildings. The first is controlled entry: a credential reader on the exterior side triggers the EL solenoid to retract the latch, allowing entry without pushing the panic bar. The second is electronic dogging during business hours: the building automation system energizes the EL solenoid for extended periods to hold the latch retracted as an alternative to mechanical hex dogging. This allows the door to operate in free-swing mode during hours and automatically re-latch when the solenoid is de-energized after hours.

 

EA and HWEA: Exit Alarm Options

The EA (exit alarm) option adds an audible alarm triggered when the push bar is pressed, providing delay notification or unauthorized egress alerting. The HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm) version connects to a building's wired fire alarm or security system.

The alarm circuit board replacement for pre-June 2012 HWEA assemblies is part 650335. This date boundary is critical: the alarm assembly design changed in June 2012. The 650335 board works only on pre-June 2012 assemblies. Post-June 2012 assemblies use a different alarm kit. Confirming the manufacturing date before ordering any alarm board replacement prevents a non-functional alarm installation.

 

KOR, LM, DM, RX: Monitoring and Override Options

KOR (key override) provides a cylinder that overrides the electrified outside trim functions without requiring electronic credentials. It is used when power failures need a mechanical fallback for authorized entry. LM (latch monitoring switch) monitors the latch bolt position and reports door open/closed status to the access control system. DM (device monitoring switch) monitors whether the push bar has been pressed. These two cannot be used on the same device because their switch mechanisms conflict. RX (request to exit switch) connects to an egress-side reader or motion sensor to signal the access control system that someone is approaching from the inside before the door opens.

 

The EL/EA combination that cannot be ordered: EL (electric latch retraction) and EA (exit alarm) are mutually exclusive on any Falcon 24 or 25 Series device. An EL device retracts the latch without the push bar being pressed, which would constantly trigger an EA alarm on any credential-controlled entry event. This combination is listed in the service manual as incompatible. It is also physically incompatible because both functions require access to the latch mechanism simultaneously in ways that conflict. Any specification that calls for both EL and EA on the same device requires a redesign before ordering.
 

How to Identify the Correct Part Before Ordering

Three pieces of information are needed before any Falcon exit device parts order.

1. Series (19, 24, or 25): Determined by the door construction and stile width as described above. The series number is typically visible on a label on the device channel or center case.

2. Configuration (R, V, C, CWDC, M): Visible from the door face. A rim device has a single latch point and no visible rod hardware on the door. A surface VR device has a visible bottom rod running down the door face to a floor strike. A concealed VR device has no visible rod hardware but two latch points (the concealed rods are inside the door stile).

3. Panic or fire-rated (prefix F-): Look for a fire label on the door or door frame. If a fire label is present, the device should be a fire-rated version. If ordering a replacement device, always match the fire rating of the original. If ordering a dogging cover plate, panic devices have a dogging hole; fire-rated devices do not.

Browse the exit device parts catalog at SecurityParts.com for all Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series components with interactive diagrams. The Falcon hardware catalog covers exit devices alongside Falcon MA Series mortise locks and T Series cylindrical locks. Pre-order support is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Falcon vs Von Duprin: Choosing Between the Two Exit Device Brands

Both Falcon and Von Duprin are Allegion brands. They share company ownership but serve different market positions and use different part ecosystems. Parts are not interchangeable between the two brands.

Von Duprin is the older and more widely installed brand in institutional, healthcare, and high-security government applications. The Von Duprin 98/99 Series is the dominant exit device in North American institutional buildings constructed before 2000. Von Duprin has a larger installed base and a wider parts aftermarket. Browse the complete Von Duprin parts catalog for 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 55, 75, 78, 88, and 94/95 Series devices.

Falcon is more common in mid-market commercial, retail, multi-family, and newer construction where the architectural aesthetic of the flush push pad and concealed fasteners is valued alongside ANSI Grade 1 performance at a competitive price. The 24 and 25 Series were specifically designed for the streamlined appearance requirements of modern commercial construction.

On any given building, both brands may be present: Von Duprin on older egress stairwell doors that have not been replaced, Falcon on newer tenant improvement entries and interior egress paths. SecurityParts.com stocks both, so a single order can service the complete building hardware schedule.

 

Why Choose Security Parts for Falcon Exit Device Parts

Series identification guidance, dogging mechanics, EL compatibility documentation, HWEA date boundary, and same-day shipping on stocked parts.

 

Series Identification

We document the 30-second stile width identification test that determines whether a door has a 19, 24, or 25 Series device. Wrong series orders are the most common return on exit device service calls.

 

EL Compatibility Rules

We document that EL is unavailable on 24 Series fire rim devices and that EL and EA cannot be combined on any device. These restrictions prevent specification errors before the order is placed.

 

HWEA Date Boundary

We document the June 2012 alarm board redesign and that part 650335 applies only to pre-June 2012 assemblies. Using the wrong board generation installs a non-functional alarm.

 

Same-Day Shipping

Most Falcon 19, 24, and 25 Series parts ship same day from US warehouses. Call 845-935-0301 or use the contact page for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes SecurityParts.com Different for Falcon Exit Device Parts

  • We document the 24 Series EL restriction on fire rim devices (F-24-R) at the part level. Facility managers upgrading access control on fire-door openings routinely order EL kits for fire rim devices without knowing the restriction. We prevent this before the order ships.
  • We document the EL/EA mutual exclusivity. Any specification combining both on one device requires a redesign. This is in the service manual but no parts supplier makes it accessible at the ordering stage.
  • We document the HWEA 650335 board date boundary with the June 2012 cutoff. This is the most common wrong-board order on alarm-equipped Falcon exit devices.
  • We document the half-turn hex dogging failure misdiagnosis: a push bar that returns after dogging is almost always incomplete dogging technique, not a mechanism failure. This prevents unnecessary mechanism replacements on dogging complaints.
  • We carry Falcon exit device parts alongside Von Duprin exit device parts, electric strike parts, LCN door closer parts, and exit alarm parts. One order services the complete egress door hardware package.
  • Free shipping on orders over $450. Same-day shipping from US warehouses on stocked parts. 30-plus years of commercial door hardware experience.

 

Related Parts and Products at Security Parts

A complete commercial egress door hardware package includes the exit device, door closer, and often an electric strike or exit alarm. SecurityParts.com stocks all of these for the same opening in one order.

For Von Duprin exit device parts on egress doors in the same building where Von Duprin is installed alongside Falcon hardware, browse the Von Duprin catalog. For Von Duprin electric strike parts on the door frame of any exit device installation with controlled entry, browse the electric strikes catalog. The Von Duprin 6300 electric strike is compatible with Falcon 24 and 25 Series rim devices. For commercial exit alarm parts including Von Duprin Guard-X and Detex ECL and EAX series, browse the exit alarms catalog. For LCN door closer parts on any fire-rated or controlled-closing egress door in the same building, browse the door closers catalog. For Schlage L Series and Falcon MA Series mortise lock parts on secured interior doors in the same facility, browse the mortise locks catalog.

Browse the complete all products and parts catalog to source Falcon, Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, and Detex hardware in a single session.

 

Frequently Asked Questions About Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series Exit Device Parts

 

What is the difference between the Falcon 19, 24 and 25 Series exit devices?

The 19 Series is narrow stile, light-to-medium duty, rim and SVR only, for doors where traffic is not consistently heavy. The 24 Series is narrow stile, heavy duty, extruded aluminum for aluminum storefront doors with stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. The 25 Series is wide stile, heavy duty, for standard commercial hollow metal and wood doors with minimum 4-1/2-inch stiles. The 24 and 25 Series share the same push pad design and service manual 108004.

 

What is dogging on an exit device and how does hex dogging work?

Dogging holds the push bar depressed and the latch retracted so the door operates as free-swinging without pressing the bar on every pass. Hex dogging uses a hex key inserted into the dogging hole to lock the push bar down. On the Falcon 24 and 25 Series, half-turn hex dogging requires one half-turn clockwise to dog and one half-turn counterclockwise to release. No threaded components are involved, eliminating thread stripping on high-cycle doors. Fire-rated devices cannot be dogged.

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 19 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 4107. Channel for 4-foot door is part 4108. Channel end cap kit with screws is part 650343. End cap mounting bracket is part 650320. Sex bolt mounting fastener is part 4122. Fire-rated channel cover plates are 650360 (3-foot) and 650361 (4-foot). Panic dogging channel cover is 650297 (4-foot) and 650303 (3-foot).

 

What are the part numbers for the Falcon 24 Series channel and end cap?

Channel for 3-foot door is part 661408. Channel for 4-foot door is part 661409. End cap kit for 1-3/4-inch door is part 650294. End cap kit for 2-1/2-inch door is part 650348. EL kit for 3-foot devices is part 650147. EL kit for 4-foot devices is part 650148. The EL solenoid is rated 24V DC at 0.34 amperes continuous duty.

 

What is the Falcon HWEA circuit board part number and when does it apply?

The HWEA replacement circuit board is part 650335. It applies only to alarm assemblies built before June 2012. The alarm kit was redesigned in June 2012 and the 650335 board is not compatible with post-June 2012 assemblies. Always check the date code on the existing alarm assembly before ordering any board replacement. Installing the wrong board generation results in a non-functional alarm.

 

What electrified options are available on the Falcon 24 and 25 Series?

Available options include EL (electric latch retraction, 24V DC 0.34A solenoid), EA (exit alarm), HWEA (hard-wired exit alarm), KOR (key override), LM (latch monitoring), DM (device monitoring), RX (request to exit), and FSA/FSE (fail safe/fail secure trim). EL cannot be combined with EA, HWEA, or KOR. DM and LM cannot be used together. EL is not available on 24 Series fire rim devices (F-24-R).

Mortise Locks: A Complete Guide to Commercial Lock Functions, Brands, and Specification

Commercial mortise locks are heavy-duty locks installed inside a rectangular pocket cut into the edge of the door, with a self-contained lock body that houses the latchbolt, deadbolt, lever hub, cylinder, and internal linkages in one reinforced steel case. They're the standard for commercial buildings, hospitality, healthcare, institutional, and high-traffic facilities because they outperform cylindrical locks on durability, function variety, and security. This guide covers what mortise locks are, the ANSI function codes that define them, the major commercial brands you'll encounter, how to specify the right one, and how to source replacements without misordering.

What Is a Mortise Lock

A mortise lock is a heavy-duty lock assembly installed in a rectangular pocket (the "mortise") machined into the edge of the door itself. Unlike a cylindrical lock that passes a cylinder through two round holes bored through the door face, the mortise lock body is a self-contained mechanical assembly measuring approximately 6 inches by 4 inches by 1 inch. The case houses the latchbolt, separate deadbolt, lever hub, cylinder housing, and all internal linkages in one reinforced steel unit.

Everything load-bearing sits inside the door, not bolted to the surface. That single design choice is what makes mortise locks the dominant commercial lock category for openings that need to last twenty-plus years under heavy cycle counts.

How Mortise Locks Differ from Cylindrical Locks

The structural difference between mortise and cylindrical locks drives every other difference in performance, function, and price.

A cylindrical lock (sometimes called a bored lock) uses two cross-bored holes. The chassis passes through one, the latch crosses through the other, and trim mounts on both faces of the door. Cylindrical locks are faster to install, cheaper to manufacture, and work well on lighter-duty interior openings.

A mortise lock requires a precise pocket cut into the door edge, plus through-bores for the cylinder and lever hubs. The pocket prep takes more skilled labor at installation. In exchange, the mortise lock delivers a one-piece reinforced case, a separate 1-inch deadbolt that operates independently of the latch, and a chassis large enough to hold complex function-change mechanisms inside.

Three things mortise locks do that cylindrical locks generally can't: combine a latch and a separate deadbolt in one chassis, support classroom-security and institutional functions, and survive Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA testing on 2 million cycles.

ANSI Function Codes for Mortise Locks

The American National Standards Institute, working with the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, defines mortise lock behavior using F-codes. Every commercial mortise lock spec sheet references these codes. Knowing them is how you cross-reference one brand against another.

F01 Passage. Both levers always operate the latchbolt. No locking. Used on closet doors, conference rooms, interior pass-through openings.

F02 Privacy. Trim from either side retracts the latchbolt. Thumbturn inside retracts and projects a deadbolt. Emergency release from outside retracts the deadbolt. Used on bathrooms and bedrooms.

F04 Classroom. Outside lever locked or unlocked by key from outside. Inside lever always free for egress. Used on classrooms where teachers control access from the corridor.

F05 Office. Outside lever locked by toggle button inside or by key from outside. Inside lever always free. Used on offices where the occupant locks the door from inside.

F07 / F08 Storeroom. Outside lever permanently fixed. Key from outside retracts latchbolt for entry. Inside lever always free for egress. Used on IT rooms, supply rooms, mechanical rooms, electrical closets.

F13 Classroom Security. Both levers can be locked from inside the classroom. Provides lockdown capability without requiring the teacher to step into the corridor. Used in K-12 active-shooter response specifications.

F14 Classroom Security with Deadbolt. Adds a separate deadbolt to the F13 function for additional lockdown security.

F17 Deadbolt. Standalone deadbolt function without latch. Used on storage and tenant security applications.

F20 Entrance. Latch retracted by key outside or inside lever. Outside lever locked or unlocked by key. Used on suite entries and tenant doors.

F21 Apartment Corridor. Combines latch operation with deadbolt control specifically for multifamily corridor doors.

F31 Exit. Outside lever rigid at all times. Inside lever retracts the latchbolt. Used on emergency exit doors that don't allow re-entry from outside.

Top Commercial Mortise Lock Brands and Their Series

Five brands account for the vast majority of commercial mortise locks specified in North America. The function codes are standardized across all of them, which means model numbers cross-reference predictably once you know the function.

Schlage L Series (L9000). Allegion's flagship commercial mortise line. Over 40 functions, 31 lever designs, 14 finishes. UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies. The most widely specified mortise lock in North American commercial construction. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide covers the component breakdown. Electrified variants include the L9580 motorized latch retraction storeroom lock for access-controlled openings.

Sargent 8200 Series. ASSA ABLOY's primary commercial mortise lock. Grade 1, full function range, broad finish and lever selection. Common on East Coast institutional specifications.

Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series. Another ASSA ABLOY brand. Functionally comparable to the Sargent 8200, often specified on legacy buildings where Corbin Russwin was the original brand.

Best 45H Series. Best Access Systems (dormakaba). Grade 1 mortise lock with field-removable core compatibility. Heavy presence in K-12 and higher-education specifications.

Yale / Accentra 8800 Series. Recently rebranded from Yale to Accentra under ASSA ABLOY. Full Grade 1 commercial mortise line.

Falcon MA Series. Allegion's mid-tier commercial mortise brand. Grade 1 performance at a different price point than Schlage L Series. Common on multifamily and budget-conscious commercial specifications.

Von Duprin 7500 Series. The mortise lock that pairs with Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. Field-reversible, field-selectable functions, electrified E7500 variant available. The Von Duprin 7500 parts manual covers the full breakdown.

Adams Rite 4500 / 4900 Series. Specialized narrow-stile mortise locks for aluminum entrance doors. Used on storefront and curtain wall applications where standard mortise hardware won't fit the door section.

Cal-Royal NM Series. Grade 1 commercial mortise at a budget tier. Used on cost-sensitive commercial and apartment corridor specifications.

Components Inside a Commercial Mortise Lock

The internal architecture is consistent across brands, even when model numbers differ. Knowing the component breakdown is what determines whether you order a complete lock or a single replacement part.

Lock case. The reinforced steel housing that contains all internal mechanisms. Field-replaceable as a complete unit on most failures.

Latchbolt. The main spring-loaded bolt that engages the strike when the door closes. Stainless steel on most production runs. Anti-friction tongue on Grade 1 units.

Deadbolt. Separate 1-inch throw bolt operated independently of the latch. Engages on key turn or thumbturn. The presence of a separate deadbolt is one of the defining features of mortise locks vs cylindrical locks.

Auxiliary latch (deadlocking). Smaller secondary latch that deadlocks the main latchbolt when the door is closed. Prevents shimming. Standard on Grade 1 commercial mortise locks.

Lever hub and spindle. The internal mechanism that translates lever rotation into latch retraction. Worn spindles cause lever droop and loose feel.

Cylinder housing. Threaded opening that accepts the keyway cylinder. Most commercial mortise locks accept Schlage-prep mortise cylinders, which means standard Everest 29, Primus, FSIC, and SFIC cylinders cross between brands.

Faceplate. The visible plate at the edge of the door covering the lock pocket. Often field-adjustable for door bevel angle.

Strike. The plate or pocket in the door frame that receives the latchbolt and deadbolt when the door closes. Specified separately from the lock body.

Trim (escutcheons and roses). The decorative and structural cover on both faces of the door. Available in various designs depending on brand.

Where Commercial Mortise Locks Are Used

Mortise locks dominate four building categories.

Healthcare facilities. Hospitals, clinics, and behavioral health buildings. Quiet operation, ligature-resistant trim options on the L Series and Sargent equivalents, and the durability to handle 24/7 cycle counts are why mortise hardware is specified here over cylindrical.

K-12 and higher education. Classrooms, administration, mechanical rooms, and lockdown-capable corridor doors. F13 Classroom Security and F14 Classroom Security with Deadbolt functions are the reason most K-12 spec sheets list mortise hardware after the Sandy Hook era specifications became standard.

Commercial office buildings. Tenant entries, suite doors, executive offices, and high-security access points. Mortise hardware is the standard on Class A office construction.

Hospitality. Hotels, conference centers, and high-end retail. The aesthetic continuity of mortise hardware (no visible faceplate from outside, clean lever and escutcheon styles) drives the spec choice.

Mortise locks are also common on government buildings, courthouses, military facilities, multifamily corridor doors, and any building where the durability premium pays back over a 20-plus year service life.

Grade 1 vs Grade 2 vs Grade 3 Mortise Locks

ANSI/BHMA A156.13 defines three grades for mortise locks based on standardized testing.

Grade 1. The highest commercial standard. Cycle test: 1 million minimum (most current Grade 1 mortise locks rate 2 million cycles). Resistance test: 1,000 inch-pounds. Door impact test passed. Used on commercial, institutional, and high-traffic openings.

Grade 2. Light commercial standard. Lower cycle and resistance requirements. Used on light commercial and high-end residential openings.

Grade 3. Residential standard. Not typically specified on commercial construction.

For commercial buildings, Grade 1 is the baseline. Grade 2 mortise locks exist but show up rarely in commercial spec because the cost gap to Grade 1 is small enough that most spec writers default to the higher grade.

How to Specify the Right Commercial Mortise Lock

Five specifications lock in every commercial mortise lock order.

Function. ANSI F-code that defines the lock behavior. Passage, privacy, classroom, office, storeroom, deadbolt, entrance, or one of the security-specific variants.

Brand and series. Schlage L9000, Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, Yale/Accentra 8800, Falcon MA, or others depending on existing building specification.

Lever or knob style. Trim selection. Lever required for ADA compliance on accessible openings. Knob still permitted on certain non-accessible commercial doors.

Finish. ANSI/BHMA finish code. 605 (bright brass), 612 (satin bronze), 619 (satin nickel), 622 (matte black), 625 (bright chrome), 626 (satin chrome), 629 (bright stainless), 630 (satin stainless), 643e (aged bronze) are the most common.

Cylinder option. P (full-face Schlage 6-pin), L (less cylinder), B (SFIC less core), R (FSIC), or one of the brand-specific cylinder variants. Cylinder choice determines key system compatibility.

Door thickness and handing are usually field-adjustable on Grade 1 mortise locks, but verify with the spec sheet. Some institutional locks require handing at order.

How to Replace a Commercial Mortise Lock

Three approaches depending on what failed.

Complete lock body replacement. When the chassis itself fails (internal mechanism worn, multiple components failed). Order the matching SKU including function, finish, and trim. Reuse the existing strike if it's in good condition.

Component-level replacement. When a single part failed (worn latchbolt, broken auxiliary latch, lever droop from spindle wear). Order the specific part. Most Grade 1 mortise lock manufacturers stock individual components.

Full re-spec to current product. When the existing lock is on a legacy series that's no longer manufactured. Schlage L9000 has been continuously produced, so retrofit is straightforward. Older Yale, Corbin, and Russwin lines may require cross-referencing to the current Accentra or Corbin Russwin equivalent.

Before ordering replacement, pull the model number off the lock face. Most commercial mortise locks stamp the brand and series directly on the faceplate or the lock body.

Why Choose Security Parts for Commercial Mortise Locks

Security Parts has been the go-to source for commercial door hardware components in the United States since 2001. That's more than two decades of stocking, shipping, and verifying parts for the exact hardware that shows up on commercial buildings. Mortise locks are a category where that experience matters more than catalog breadth, because the wrong function code on a service order costs a return cycle and a building day with the door out of service.

What sets the team apart is the depth on Allegion brands. As a long-standing distributor for Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, and Falcon hardware, Security Parts stocks the Schlage L Series, Von Duprin 7500, and Falcon MA mortise lock components on the shelf, not on a three-week drop ship. Lock bodies, latchbolts, auxiliary latches, trim spindles, cylinder housings, and complete mortise lock assemblies ship the same day on stocked SKUs.

Spec verification is the part most distributors don't do. If you're not sure whether the existing lock is a Schlage L9050 office or an L9070 classroom, whether the cylinder option crosses between brands, or which function code matches the application, the team will work through it with you on the phone before the order ships. That's how the wrong-function return cycle gets prevented, and it's the single biggest cost-saver on commercial service calls where a misordered lock means another day of manual access on a building that doesn't have that runway.

For facility managers, locksmiths, access control integrators, contractors, and spec writers sourcing commercial mortise lock hardware across institutional portfolios, Security Parts combines stocked depth, brand specialization, and the technical bench to verify configurations. That combination is what builds the long-term sourcing relationships the team has held with K-12 districts, healthcare networks, and government facilities for over twenty years.

Closing

Commercial mortise locks are the standard hardware on every building category where security, durability, and function flexibility matter. The brand and series may vary, but the underlying ANSI function codes are universal, and the component architecture is consistent across the Big Five (Schlage L Series, Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, Yale/Accentra 8800).

When specifying or replacing a commercial mortise lock, confirm the function code first, brand and series second, then trim and finish. Source from a distributor that stocks the specific brand line your building runs on. Security Parts has carried commercial mortise lock hardware since 2001, with verified configurations and spec guidance by phone at 845-935-0301.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the difference between a mortise lock and a cylindrical lock?

 A mortise lock installs in a pocket cut into the door edge with a self-contained reinforced steel case. A cylindrical lock passes through two cross-bored holes in the door face. Mortise locks are stronger, support more functions, and last longer under commercial cycle counts.

What does ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 mean for a mortise lock?

 Grade 1 is the highest commercial standard under ANSI/BHMA A156.13. It requires the lock to pass cycle testing (typically 2 million cycles), resistance testing, door impact testing, and warped door testing. Grade 1 is the baseline specification for commercial buildings.

Which is the most common commercial mortise lock brand?

 Schlage L Series (L9000) is the most widely specified commercial mortise lock in North America. Sargent 8200, Best 45H, Corbin Russwin ML2000, and Yale/Accentra 8800 are the other major commercial brands.

Can mortise lock functions be changed in the field? 

Yes, on most brands. Schlage L Series, Sargent 8200, and Von Duprin 7500 all support field-selectable functions on the same chassis through internal mechanism adjustments. The specific procedure varies by brand and series.

Are mortise locks fire rated?

 Most Grade 1 commercial mortise locks carry UL fire ratings up to 3 hours when installed on listed fire door assemblies. Verify the specific lock's UL listing against the door's fire rating requirement.

What's the difference between a mortise lock and a mortise deadbolt? 

A mortise lock combines a latchbolt and (on most functions) a separate deadbolt in one chassis. A mortise deadbolt is a leverless lock with only the deadbolt, used on auxiliary security applications. Schlage L9460 is the standard mortise deadbolt under the L Series chassis.

How long do commercial mortise locks last? 

Grade 1 commercial mortise locks rated for 2 million cycles typically last 15 to 25 years in commercial service depending on traffic. Heavy-cycle openings (corridor doors, classroom entries) may need component-level service after 10 to 15 years.

 

Commercial Door Operators: A Parts, Models, and Service Guide

Commercial door operators are the powered mechanisms that open and close a door automatically when triggered by a push button, motion sensor, or access control signal. They're not door closers. A door closer holds the door shut after manual opening. A door operator actively opens the door under power, then closes it under controlled return. The two get confused constantly on hardware schedules, and that confusion causes the wrong parts to get ordered.

This guide covers what door operators actually do, the LCN and Norton models most commonly installed on commercial buildings, how to identify the unit in front of you, and where to source replacement parts when one fails. If you're working on a manual door closer instead, see the LCN door closer parts guide for that line.

What Commercial Door Operators Do

A commercial door operator is a motorized device mounted on or in the door frame that swings the door open when energized. The operator carries an internal motor (usually electric, sometimes hydraulic on heavy-duty industrial models) and a control board that manages opening speed, hold-open time, and closing return. Most commercial door operators run on 120V AC for the unit itself, with low-voltage activation signals (12V or 24V) coming in from access control, push plates, or wave sensors.

The two functional categories you'll encounter most:

Low-energy door operators. These swing the door at a controlled speed governed by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. Low-energy means the door's opening force and speed stay under a threshold that doesn't require safety sensors or guard rails. Common on accessible restrooms, single-occupancy entries, and ADA-compliant office doors.

Full-energy automatic door operators. Higher opening force and faster swing. Governed by ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Requires presence sensors, safety beams, or guard rails because the door moves with enough force to injure if someone walks into it. Common on retail entrances, hospitals, and high-traffic commercial buildings.

Most door operators on commercial schedules in North America are low-energy units. They're cheaper, code-compliant for most applications, and don't require the sensor stack that full-energy operators do.

Major Commercial Door Operator Models

LCN 4640 Series (Senior Swing). The most-installed low-energy door operator on commercial schedules in North America. Surface-mounted, hydraulic-assist, electric drive. Standard on accessible restrooms, conference rooms, and ADA office doors. Specified across K-12, healthcare, and government buildings.

LCN 4642 Series. Heavy-duty version of the 4640 platform. Higher operating force, more durable internal components, longer service interval. Specified where the door sees high cycle counts or wind load.

LCN 4630/4631 Series. Mid-range models in the LCN low-energy line. Less common than the 4640/4642 but still in active service on installs from the last fifteen years.

Norton 5700 Series. Norton's primary low-energy door operator. Functionally comparable to the LCN 4640. Common on Norton-branded hardware schedules.

Norton 5800 ADAEZ Pro. A more recent Norton operator built specifically for ADA-compliant restroom and accessible-entry applications.

Stanley Magic Force / Magic Swing. Older Stanley low-energy operators still found on legacy installs. Stanley sold the line to dormakaba years ago, so service support has narrowed.

Horton 7000 Series. Heavy commercial swing door operator. Used on hospitals, retail entrances, transportation facilities.

For most replacement work on commercial buildings under twenty years old, the parts you'll need are LCN 4640/4642 or Norton 5700.

How to Identify Your Door Operator Before Ordering Parts

Five checks before placing a parts order. Each one prevents a return.

Read the model number off the unit. Most commercial door operators stamp the model number on the cover or inside the housing. LCN 4640, 4642, Norton 5700, Stanley Magic, all label themselves. The cover usually comes off with a single screw or quarter-turn fastener.

Identify the mounting style. Surface-applied (mounted to the face of the frame or door), concealed overhead (recessed into the header), or in-floor (mounted in the floor under the door pivot). Mounting style determines which parts cross between models.

Note the drive type. Electric (motor-driven), hydraulic-assist (motor plus hydraulic dampers), or pneumatic (older units, less common in modern commercial). Drive type determines what internal components are in the unit.

Confirm the voltage. Most commercial door operators run 120V AC for the main unit. Activation signals come in low-voltage (12V or 24V). Some legacy units run different voltage, so confirm at the unit before ordering electrical components.

Pull the cycle count if available. High-cycle doors (retail, hospital entrances) wear different parts than low-cycle doors (conference rooms, single-occupancy restrooms). Cycle count helps predict which component actually failed versus what looks worn cosmetically.

Common Door Operator Service Issues and What to Replace

Four failure patterns account for most door operator service calls.

Door doesn't open on signal. Usually a control board issue, a low-voltage wiring fault, or a failed motor. Test the activation signal at the operator's low-voltage input first. If signal is present and the motor doesn't run, the control board is the next suspect. If the board is good and the motor still doesn't actuate, replace the motor.

Door opens but doesn't close fully. Hydraulic damper issue or arm linkage wear. On LCN 4640 and 4642 units, the hydraulic damper assembly is the wear component. Replace as a single unit rather than rebuilding internals.

Door slams shut or closes too fast. Closing speed adjustment is out of range, or the closing valve has failed. Adjust the valve first. If the adjustment doesn't hold, replace the valve assembly.

Door operator binds, hesitates, or makes unusual noise. Internal mechanical wear, usually on the spindle or drive gear. On older units (10-plus years), full operator replacement is often more economical than rebuilding internals.

Door Operator Parts Categories

The component breakdown across LCN and Norton low-energy door operators follows a common architecture. The parts categories you'll source from:

Motor and drive assembly. The motor itself and the gear train that connects motor torque to the spindle.

Control board. Manages opening signal, hold-open time, closing speed, and obstruction sensing. Brand and model specific.

Hydraulic damper assembly. Handles controlled closing. Common wear part on hydraulic-assist units.

Arm and linkage. Connects the operator spindle to the door. Standard arm for push-side mount, parallel arm for pull-side, slide track for narrow header installations.

Activation devices. Push plates, wave sensors, motion detectors, push buttons. These are usually separate accessories, not internal operator components.

Cover and housing. Cosmetic and protective. Field-replaceable on most units.

Spindle and pinion. Internal mechanical components. Replaced as part of a major service or operator overhaul.

Power supply and transformer. Some units integrate the transformer in the housing. Others use an external transformer. Voltage-specific.

Door Operators vs Door Closers: Don't Confuse Them on Parts Orders

This is the single most common mistake on door operator parts orders. A door closer (LCN 4040XP, 4041, 4111, Norton 1601, Sargent 351) is a passive hydraulic device that closes a door after someone manually opens it. It doesn't open the door under power. Door closers don't have motors, control boards, or activation inputs.

A door operator opens the door under power. It carries a motor, a control board, and accepts activation signals.

If you're ordering "door closer parts" for what's actually a door operator, the parts won't fit. If you're ordering "door operator parts" for what's actually a heavy-duty door closer, same problem. Confirm the unit type before sourcing, especially on older buildings where the same opening may have housed both types over the years.

The door closer parts catalog handles manual closers. The automatic operator section handles powered units.

How to Source Door Operator Replacement Parts

For LCN 4640 and 4642 door operators, Security Parts stocks the LCN brand line including operator components, hydraulic dampers, arms, and control boards. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

For Norton 5700 and 5800 door operators, source from a Norton-authorized distributor or through Security Parts depending on stock. Norton control boards are model-specific and shouldn't be cross-substituted between series.

For Stanley Magic Force and Magic Swing legacy units, parts availability has narrowed since the dormakaba acquisition. On older Stanley units, replacement of the full operator with a current LCN or Norton model is often more economical than chasing legacy parts.

Before ordering any door operator part, confirm the unit's model number, mounting configuration, and voltage. For configurations not visible online, call 845-935-0301. Two minutes of spec verification prevents the wrong-part return cycle on a service call that probably doesn't have those days to spare.

Why Choose Security Parts for Door Operator Components and Replacement

Security Parts has been the go-to source for commercial door hardware components in the United States since 2001. That's more than two decades of stocking, shipping, and verifying parts for the exact hardware that fails on commercial buildings. Door operators are a category where that experience matters more than catalog breadth, because the wrong part costs a service call and a day of building downtime. The right one ships the same day and gets the door back in service before lunch.

What sets the team apart is the depth on Allegion brands. As a long-standing distributor for LCN, Von Duprin, Schlage, and Falcon hardware, Security Parts carries the LCN 4640, 4642, and broader Senior Swing door operator parts in stock, not on a three-week drop ship. Hydraulic damper assemblies, control boards, arm and linkage components, motors, covers, and replacement spindles all ship the same day on stocked SKUs.

Spec verification is the part most distributors don't do. If you're not sure whether the unit on the door is a 4640 or a 4642, whether the control board you need is original or a current replacement, or whether the operator can be retrofitted with a current ADA-compliant unit, the team will work through it with you on the phone before the order ships. That's how the wrong-part return cycle gets prevented, and it's the single biggest cost-saver on commercial service calls where a misordered part means another business day with a manual door.

For facility managers, locksmiths, access control integrators, and contractors sourcing door operator parts across an institutional portfolio, Security Parts combines stocked depth, brand specialization, and the technical bench to verify configurations. That combination is what builds the long-term sourcing relationships the team has held with K-12 districts, healthcare networks, and government facilities for over twenty years.

Closing

Commercial door operators are infrastructure. They cycle thousands of times a year on busy openings and stay in service for two decades when they're maintained. When one fails, the door becomes either a manual-only opening (frustrating for users) or a security gap (if the operator is part of an access-controlled entry). Either way, the fix needs to be fast and the parts need to be right.

Identify the unit model before ordering. Distinguish door operator from door closer. Confirm voltage and mounting configuration. Then source from a distributor that stocks the specific LCN or Norton line your building runs on. Security Parts has carried LCN commercial hardware since 2001, with verified configurations and spec guidance by phone at 845-935-0301.

Frequently Asked Questions

What's the difference between a door operator and a door closer?

 A door operator opens the door automatically under power and controls the close. A door closer is a passive device that only closes the door after manual opening. Door operators carry a motor, control board, and activation inputs. Door closers do not.

Which door operators are most common on commercial buildings?

 LCN 4640 (Senior Swing) and 4642 are the most-installed low-energy door operators in North America. Norton 5700 series is the next most common. Together these account for the majority of low-energy commercial door operator installs in the last two decades.

Are door operators required to meet ADA standards?

 On accessible openings, yes. Door operators on ADA-compliant entries must meet ANSI/BHMA A156.19 for low-energy units, which governs opening speed and force to ensure the door is safe and operable for users with mobility limitations.

Can a door operator be added to an existing manual door? 

Yes, on most commercial doors. Low-energy door operators like the LCN 4640 are surface-mounted and can retrofit an existing door without frame modification, provided the door has structural mounting points and access to 120V AC for the operator unit.

How long do commercial door operators last?

 Properly installed and maintained door operators typically last 15 to 20 years on low-cycle openings. High-cycle doors (retail entries, hospital corridors) may see 7 to 10 years before major service. Hydraulic dampers, control boards, and motors are the components that fail first.

What voltage does a commercial door operator require? 

Most commercial door operators run on 120V AC for the main unit, with low-voltage activation signals at 12V or 24V coming from push plates, sensors, or access control panels. Confirm voltage at the unit before ordering electrical components.

Where can I source door operator parts?

 Security Parts stocks commercial door operator components including LCN 4640 and 4642 parts, control boards, hydraulic dampers, and arm assemblies. Call 845-935-0301 for configurations not visible online.

 

Schlage L9580 vs Electric Strike: Which One Should Go on the Door

The Schlage L9580 vs electric strike decision comes down to one question most spec sheets never frame clearly: do you modify the lock, or do you modify the frame? An electric strike releases the door by swinging open a keeper cut into the frame. The L9580 releases the door by retracting the latchbolt inside the lock itself. Both get you electronic access control. They get you there in very different ways, with different costs, security levels, and code implications.

This guide compares them on the factors that actually decide a spec. If you need the full breakdown of the lock itself, see our Schlage L9580 guide. This piece is about choosing between the two approaches.

The Core Difference in How They Work

An electric strike replaces the fixed strike plate in the door frame. When the access control panel sends a signal, the keeper pivots and lets the latchbolt swing free, so the door can be pulled or pushed open. The lock on the door never changes state. Its latch stays extended the whole time.

The Schlage L9580 works the opposite way. The lock body stays in the frame as a standard mortise lock, and a motor inside the chassis physically pulls the latchbolt back into the case on a 24V DC signal. The frame's strike never moves. The door becomes pushable because the latch is gone, not because the keeper released.

That single mechanical difference drives everything else in the comparison.

Frame Impact: The Biggest Practical Divider

Electric strikes require the frame to be cut and routed for the strike body and its wiring. On new construction with hollow metal frames prepped at the factory, that's simple. On a retrofit, it's invasive. Cutting an existing frame for a strike is labor, it can weaken the frame, and on fire-rated assemblies it often isn't permitted at all without a tested, listed fire-rated strike.

The L9580 retrofits the same mortise pocket that already holds a mechanical L9080 or any L9000 lock. The frame is never touched. Wiring runs through the door via an electric hinge or door loop. For any building where the frames are already prepped for mortise locks, this is the cleaner path by a wide margin.

If your project is a renovation with existing mortise-prepped doors, frame impact alone often settles the decision in favor of the L9580.

Security: Latch Retracted vs Keeper Released

With an electric strike, the lock's latchbolt stays fully extended. Only the frame keeper releases. That's secure enough for most interior openings, but the weak point is the frame cutout. A strike plate routed into a frame is structurally less robust than an intact frame holding a deadlocking latch.

The L9580 keeps a one-piece Grade 1 mortise body and a deadlocking auxiliary latch, which prevents shimming when the door is closed. On openings that face genuine forced-entry risk, perimeter doors, cash rooms, pharmacies, server rooms, the mortise lock approach is the tougher build.

For low-risk interior doors, the security gap is small enough that other factors decide. For high-security openings, the L9580 wins on physical security.

Noise: A Real Factor in Healthcare and Quiet Spaces

This one gets overlooked until it becomes a complaint. AC-powered electric strikes buzz when energized. DC strikes click. In a hospital corridor at 3 a.m., a library, a courthouse, or any space sensitive to repeated sound, that buzz or click on every access event is a problem.

The L9580 uses an ultra-quiet motor. Latch retraction is near silent. This is a major reason Allegion positions the motorized latch retraction line for healthcare and education, where doors cycle constantly and noise discipline matters. If the opening is in a quiet-sensitive environment, the L9580 has a clear edge.

Fire-Rated Openings: Code Narrows Your Options

On a fire-rated door assembly, an electric strike has to be a tested, listed fire-rated strike, and on a fire door it must fail secure (latched on power loss) so the door stays a barrier during a fire. Many standard electric strikes don't qualify, which limits your selection.

The L9580 is built on an L Series chassis UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies. Because it's latch-retraction-only, it defaults to its mechanical storeroom behavior when power is removed, the latch extends and the door secures, which aligns with fire-door requirements under NFPA 80. For fire-rated openings, the L9580 is often the simpler path to a compliant install.

Aesthetics: Visible Hardware vs Clean Lines

An electric strike adds a visible faceplate in the frame. In utility spaces, nobody cares. In a hotel lobby, a healthcare reception area, or a high-end commercial interior, that faceplate matters to the architect.

The L9580 looks identical to a standard mechanical mortise lock from the outside. No visible electronic component, no frame faceplate. If the design intent is to hide the access control layer, the mortise lock approach wins.

Cost Factors Without the Sticker Price

The hardware comparison isn't apples to apples, and the real cost lives in the install, not the part. Electric strikes generally carry a lower hardware cost, but frame cutting, fire-rated strike requirements, and wiring labor can close that gap fast on a retrofit. The L9580 carries a higher hardware cost but a lower install burden on mortise-prepped doors because the frame stays untouched.

The honest way to evaluate it: on new construction with factory-prepped frames, the electric strike often costs less installed. On retrofits with existing mortise doors, the L9580 frequently comes out even or ahead once frame labor and fire compliance are counted. Run the comparison per opening, not per catalog line.

When Each One Wins

The electric strike is the better call when the door uses cylindrical hardware you want to keep, when the budget is tight on simple interior openings, when the frame is already prepped for a strike, or when you only need to add access control to an existing lock without replacing it.

The L9580 is the better call on mortise-prepped retrofits where the frame can't be cut, on fire-rated openings, on quiet-sensitive environments like healthcare, on high-security doors, on auto operator and hands-free applications where the latch needs to fully clear, and anywhere the access control layer needs to stay visually invisible.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is the Schlage L9580 more secure than an electric strike?

 On high-risk openings, yes. The L9580 keeps a one-piece Grade 1 mortise body with a deadlocking auxiliary latch, while an electric strike relies on a keeper routed into the frame. For low-risk interior doors, the difference is minimal.

Can the L9580 replace an electric strike on a fire-rated door?

 Often, yes. The L Series chassis is UL listed for 3-hour fire assemblies and fails secure on power loss, which aligns with fire-door code. Electric strikes on fire doors must be specifically fire-rated and fail secure, which limits the options.

Why is the L9580 quieter than an electric strike? 

The L9580 retracts its latch with an ultra-quiet motor. AC electric strikes buzz and DC strikes click on each access event, which makes the L9580 preferable in healthcare, libraries, and other quiet-sensitive spaces.

Is an electric strike cheaper than the L9580? 

The hardware usually costs less, but frame cutting, wiring labor, and fire-rated strike requirements can erase that gap on retrofits. Evaluate installed cost per opening, not hardware cost alone.

Which one works better with auto operators? 

The L9580. It fully retracts the latch so the door clears cleanly for hands-free operation, which is why it's specified for accessible restrooms and infection-control corridors.

Closing

The Schlage L9580 vs electric strike choice isn't about which technology is better in the abstract. It's about which one fits the opening. Frame condition, fire rating, security level, and noise sensitivity decide it more than hardware cost does. For mortise-prepped retrofits, fire-rated doors, and quiet environments, the L9580 usually wins. For simple interior openings and frames already cut for a strike, the electric strike still earns its place.

Spec it per door. When you're ready to source either side, Security Parts stocks commercial mortise locks and electric strikes, and the team has verified configurations on commercial hardware since 2001. Reach them at 845-935-0301.

 

Von Duprin Exit Device Series Comparison: Which Series Belongs on Which Door

A Von Duprin exit device series comparison is not just a product selection exercise. It is a specification decision that determines code compliance, maintenance costs, electrified options availability, and parts compatibility for the life of the opening. Von Duprin has been manufacturing panic exit hardware since 1908, and today its active product lineup covers fourteen series. Each one was engineered for a specific set of conditions no other series addresses equally well. The cost of specifying the wrong series shows up at installation when the device physically does not fit, at the first NFPA 80 inspection when the fire rating fails, and every time a maintenance order ships the wrong part because the series was never correctly confirmed.

Four Questions That Narrow the Field Before You Look at a Catalog

Is the door fire-rated?

 If yes, the exit device must positively latch every time the door closes. Fire-rated Von Duprin configurations add "-F" to the model number and remove the hex dogging function. The device must also carry a UL fire door listing.

Single door or double door without a center post?

 Single doors and paired doors with a mullion use rim configurations. Double doors without a center post require surface vertical rod (SVR) or concealed vertical rod (CVR) configurations.

What is the stile width? 

Aluminum storefront and glass doors with stile widths as narrow as 1-3/4 inches require narrow-stile devices. Standard hollow metal commercial doors use wide-stile devices.

Is electrified access control required now or anticipated? 

The crossbar series (55 and 88) are mechanical-only by design. If electronic integration will ever be needed at the device level, a push pad or touchbar series with electrified options must be specified.

The Complete Series Comparison

22 Series: Mid-Range Grade 1

Applications: Employee entrances, parking garage stairwells, healthcare clinics, multi-family corridors, back-of-house retail.

Why: ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 performance at a lower specification cost than the 98/99. Not as deep an electrified options catalog, but covers the essentials: ALK alarm kit, QEL modular conversion, MEL motorized latch retraction, RX request to exit.

Parts note: Center case 109012 (rim) or 109358 (2227 SVR). Pre-1998 devices use old-style dogging assemblies; convert with part 050709. Dogging hole is only 1/4 inch deep, long 5/32-inch hex key is mandatory.

33A/35A Series: Narrow-Stile Touchbar

Applications: Aluminum storefronts, narrow-stile glass doors, applications where a full-width touchbar is specified over a push pad. Minimum stile width: 1-3/4 inches.

Why: The narrow-stile sibling of the 98/99 for aluminum frame and glass doors. The touchbar runs the full width of the door, engaging the release mechanism anywhere along its length. The 35A adds an integral door position switch.

Electrified: Second-deepest options catalog outside the 98/99. Chexit delayed egress, E7500 electrified mortise lock, pneumatic options, Allegion Connect, electric power transfers.

55 Series: Narrow-Stile Crossbar

Applications: Historic renovations, ornate institutional lobbies, applications requiring crossbar aesthetics on a narrow-stile door.

Why: Cast brass or bronze plated to finish specification. Integrates the 7500 mortise lock body. Specified where the architectural context demands a traditional crossbar appearance in a narrow-stile frame.

No electrified options at the device level.

75 Series: Standard Commercial Grade 1

Applications: Healthcare facilities, standard commercial offices, light institutional openings requiring Grade 1 performance without full institutional specification cost.

Why: Sits between the 22 and 98/99 in specification depth and cost. Rim, SVR, and CVR configurations. Electrified options: ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, Allegion Connect. The center case reinforcing bracket on the 75 Series adds structural support on high-use corridor openings.

78 Series: Narrow-Stile Push Pad

Applications: Aluminum storefront and glass doors where a push pad is specified over a touchbar. Minimum stile clearance: 1-3/4 inches.

Why: The push pad equivalent of the 33A/35A for narrow-stile applications. Rim, SVR, CVR, and WDC configurations. Electrified options: ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, Allegion Connect.

Critical parts note: 78 Series components are not interchangeable with any wide-stile Von Duprin series. Narrow-stile form factor throughout.

88 Series: Wide-Stile Crossbar, Abuse-Resistant

Applications: Correctional facilities, behavioral health units, secure government floors, any application where hardware faces deliberate sustained force.

Why: In continuous production since the 1950s. Ships with a 42-inch field-sizeable crossbar. Non-handed. ANSI A156.3 Grade 1. UL Listed. Fire-rated versions (88-F) carry 3-hour UL 10C rating. No electrified options by design: in correctional and behavioral health environments, electronic components at the device level are not appropriate.

Configurations: Rim (88/88-F), SVR (8827/8827-F), CVR (8847-F), Mortise (8875/8875-F).

94/95 INPACT Series: Recessed Push Pad

Applications: High-traffic openings where the push pad requires protection from cart, equipment, or deliberate impact damage.

Why: Recessed push pad design reduces impact exposure in environments where a standard protruding push pad would be repeatedly struck.

98/99 Series: Institutional Flagship

Applications: Schools, hospitals, universities, government buildings, any high-traffic institutional opening requiring the highest specification depth.

Why: The dominant institutional specification in North America. ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1. UL Listed for panic and fire exit hardware. Made in the USA. Five configurations: rim, SVR (9827/9927), CVR (9947), WDC (wide door cable), and the 9875/9975 mortise device using the 7500 mortise lock body.

Forward compatibility: A mechanical 98/99 specified today can be upgraded to full electrified access control years later without replacing the device body. This is why architects and security consultants default to the 98/99 on complex institutional projects with phased access control implementation.

Electrified options: The deepest catalog in the Von Duprin lineup: QEL, HD-QEL, MEL, Chexit, ELR, Allegion Connect, RX, RX2, WP-RX, LX, LX-RX, SS Signal Switch, electric power transfers, and more.

Guard-X 2670: Alarmed Secondary Exit

Applications: Secondary exits in restaurants, retail, grocery, drug stores, any commercial space needing unauthorized exit deterrence.

Why: Not a standard exit device with an alarm add-on. Purpose-built with a 100-decibel alarm, stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds, armed indicator light, and Schlage SC-1 cylinder. NFPA 101 compliant. UL Listed. 10-year mechanical warranty, 1-year electrical warranty.

 

Side-by-Side Comparison

Series

Stile

Format

Fire-Rated

Electrified

Best Application

22 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, RX

Healthcare, multi-family, retail back doors

33A/35A

Narrow

Touchbar

Yes (-F)

Chexit, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Aluminum storefront, narrow-stile glass

55 Series

Narrow

Crossbar

Yes (-F)

None

Historic, ornate, narrow-stile

75 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR, CVR

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Standard commercial, office, healthcare

78 Series

Narrow

Push pad

Yes (-F)

ALK, QEL, MEL, Allegion Connect

Aluminum storefront push pad

88 Series

Wide

Crossbar

Yes (-F)

None

Correctional, behavioral health, secure government

94/95 INPACT

Wide

Recessed push pad

Yes

Limited

High-impact traffic applications

98/99 Series

Wide

Push pad, SVR, CVR, WDC, Mortise

Yes (-F)

Full catalog

Institutional: schools, hospitals, government

Guard-X 2670

Wide

Alarmed deadbolt

Yes

Alarm only

Retail and restaurant secondary exits

 

Why Series Selection Affects Parts Sourcing for Life

Every series has its own parts tree. Components do not cross between series. A 78 Series arm does not fit a 33A/35A device. A 22 Series center case does not fit a 75 Series device. Specifying the wrong series at the project stage creates parts sourcing problems at every maintenance cycle for the full service life of the opening.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin exit device series comparison catalog by series and model, with interactive diagrams on every model page. The exit devices section covers every series in the same model-specific structure. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin exit device series comparison starts with four decisions: fire rating, single vs double door configuration, stile width, and electrified options requirement. Those four answers eliminate most series immediately. The 98/99 for institutional depth and forward compatibility. The 22 for mid-range Grade 1 cost efficiency. The 33A/35A and 78 for narrow-stile aluminum and glass. The 88 for crossbar abuse resistance without electronics. The 55 for narrow-stile crossbar aesthetics. The Guard-X for alarmed secondary exits. Every series has its own non-interchangeable parts tree. Getting the series right at specification time is what keeps every future maintenance order, every parts replacement, and every code inspection on the correct path.

FAQs

What is the primary difference between the Von Duprin 22 and 98/99 Series?

 The 98/99 is the institutional flagship with the deepest electrified options catalog, five configurations, and Made in USA production. The 22 is mid-range Grade 1 for medium-traffic commercial at a lower specification cost.

When should I specify the 78 Series instead of the 33A/35A?

 Both fit narrow-stile aluminum and glass doors at 1-3/4 inch minimum stile width. Specify the 78 when a push pad is required. Specify the 33A/35A when a full-width touchbar is required or preferred.

Does the Von Duprin 88 Series support electrified access control? 

No. The 88 Series is mechanical-only by design. It is specified in correctional and behavioral health environments where device-level electronic components are not appropriate.

What is the 98/99 forward compatibility advantage? 

A mechanical 98/99 specified today can be upgraded to QEL, MEL, Chexit, Allegion Connect, or other electrified options years later without replacing the device body. This makes it the default institutional choice when phased access control is anticipated.

Are Von Duprin series parts interchangeable between models?

 No. Every series has its own non-interchangeable parts tree. A 78 Series arm does not fit a 33A/35A. A 22 Series center case does not fit a 75 Series. Series selection at specification time determines parts compatibility for the life of the opening.

Rim Exit Devices: How They Work, When to Use Them, and Everything the 98/99 Series Spec Requires

Rim exit devices are the most widely installed panic hardware configuration in commercial construction, and the Von Duprin 98/99 Series is the institutional standard for that category. The 98 and 99 Series devices are certified to ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1, UL Listed for panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, manufactured under ISO 9001 Quality Management System standards, and made in the USA. They are non-handed from the factory in most configurations, ship with a 299 rim strike standard, cover hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 cutouts, and support the deepest electrified options catalog in the Von Duprin lineup. Understanding what makes a rim device the right specification, and what makes it the wrong one, is what prevents the most common exit hardware specification error in commercial construction.

How a Rim Exit Device Works

The mechanism is simple by design. When a person presses the push bar, a lever arm inside the center case depresses and retracts the latch bolt from the rim strike pocket on the frame. When the bar is released, a return spring extends the latch bolt again. When the door swings shut, the beveled nose of the latch bolt rides over the strike lip and drops into the strike pocket automatically.

This simplicity is why rim devices dominate commercial construction. No rods penetrating the door floor. No mortise pocket cut into the door edge. The full mechanism sits on the face of the door, visible and accessible for maintenance without disassembly.

Fire-rated configurations remove the hex dogging function. On fire-rated openings, the latch must extend automatically every time the door closes. The "-F" suffix in the model number designates fire-rated configurations.

When Rim Is Right and When It Is Not

Rim is the correct specification for:

Single doors meeting a fixed frame. Paired doors with a center mullion, where each leaf latches to the mullion. Standard hollow metal commercial doors with 86 or 161 door prep cutouts.

Rim is the wrong specification for:

Double doors without a center post. When two active leaves must latch against each other at a center meeting point, a surface vertical rod (SVR) device adds top and bottom rod engagement for three-point latching. The 2227 SVR (22 Series), 9827/9927 SVR (98/99 Series), and 8827 SVR (88 Series) cover this application.

Applications requiring concealed hardware. When surface-mounted hardware is architecturally unacceptable, the concealed vertical rod (CVR) configurations route hardware inside the door.

Applications needing mortise lock security depth. The 98/9975 mortise exit device integrates the 7500 mortise lock body for maximum security at the door edge.

98 vs 99: The Only Difference That Matters

The 98 Series has a smooth mechanism case. The 99 Series has a grooved mechanism case. Every internal component is identical and fully interchangeable between the two. Every parts number that applies to a 98 rim device applies equally to a 99 rim device. The distinction is aesthetic only and produces no difference in performance, function, or Grade 1 certification.

Key Specifications Every Specifier Needs

ANSI certification: ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1 (the 2014 edition is the current standard, not the 2001 edition cited in older specifications).

UL listing: UL Listed for panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware. Fire-rated configurations carry a 3-hour UL 10C listing on single doors.

Non-handed status: The 98/99 rim device ships non-handed from the factory in most configurations. It becomes handed when ordered with SD (special dogging), -2 (double cylinder), or SS (signal switch) options.

Available finishes: US3, US3A, US4, US4A, US10, US26, US26D, US26D-AM Antimicrobial, US28, 313, 315, and 643E. The antimicrobial finish (US26D-AM) is specified in healthcare applications where touch surface hygiene is a design requirement.

Strike: 299 rim strike on non-fire-rated devices. 299F on fire-rated. The 299 measures 1-1/4 inches wide by 2-7/8 inches high with 2-1/8-inch slotted hole spacing.

Door lengths: 3-foot (36-inch) and 4-foot (48-inch) push bar lengths.

Trim Functions Available

The trim suffix in the model number determines outside hardware function:

  • EO: Exit only. No outside operation. Most common on exterior egress-only openings.
  • NL: Night latch. Key retracts latchbolt from outside. Uses rim cylinder and 1-1/4-inch mortise cylinder.
  • NLOP: Night latch with pull required. Key retracts latch, then a pull action is required to open.
  • TP: Thumbpiece. Key locks and unlocks outside thumbpiece.
  • L: Lever. ADA-compliant outside entry function. Most common on accessible egress routes.
  • DT: Dummy trim. Non-functional outside pull for aesthetic matching on inactive leaves.

Electrified Options on the 98/99 Rim Device

The 98/99 Series carries the most complete electrified options catalog in Von Duprin's lineup:

  • QEL: Quiet electric latch retraction. Modular field-installable conversion. Silent outside entry without a key.
  • HD-QEL: QEL with hex dogging retained. Allows mechanical dogging and electric latch retraction on the same device.
  • MEL: Motorized electric latch retraction. Motor-driven for silent operation in noise-sensitive environments.
  • Chexit: 15-second alarm-plus-delay for controlled egress and retail loss prevention.
  • ELR: Standard solenoid-driven electric latch retraction.
  • RX: Request to exit switch. Signals access control panel on egress activity.
  • RX2: Double request to exit, two RX switches.
  • WP-RX: Waterproof request to exit. Available with the OUT option for rim and surface vertical rod.
  • LX: Latch monitor switch. Monitors latch bolt position for door status verification.
  • LX-LC: Latch monitoring low current version.
  • LX-RX: Combined request to exit and latch monitoring.
  • SS (Signal Switch): Monitors both push pad and latch bolt simultaneously. Makes the latch bolt tamper-resistant. Rated up to 2.0 amp at 24VDC. Makes the device handed when specified.
  • ALK: 9-volt battery-powered alarm exit kit.

Parts That Fail First on High-Cycle Openings

Dogging assemblies (post-1997 devices): Dogging shaft 090040 (long 5/32-inch hex key mandatory, 1/4-inch shaft depth). Dogging hook 090044. Dogging spring 090041. Pre-1997 devices use old-style components; part 050709 is the conversion kit.

Center case: Part 050021 replaces all earlier non-fire-rated 98/99 rim center cases, with approximately 40-year backward compatibility.

299 strike: Strike shift from door sag or frame movement produces latch alignment problems. Strike replacement is among the most common rim device service items.

Push bar end guide (090049): Reduces noise and friction at the push bar assembly end. Missed on most service visits until noise develops.

Sourcing 98/99 Rim Device Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete 98/99 Series parts catalog by model and configuration, with interactive diagrams on every page. The exit devices catalog covers every Von Duprin series with the same model-specific structure. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com.

Conclusion

Rim exit devices are ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1, UL Listed, manufactured to ISO 9001 standards, and made in the USA. The 98 and 99 Series are internally identical. The device is non-handed except when SD, -2, or SS options are specified. Twelve finishes are available including US26D-AM antimicrobial for healthcare. The HD-QEL option retains hex dogging while adding electric latch retraction. The SS Signal Switch monitors both push pad and latch bolt and makes the device handed. Every 98/99 rim device parts order starts with confirming the center case variant by trim function before the catalog opens.

FAQs

What is the ANSI grade of the Von Duprin 98/99 rim exit device?

 ANSI A156.3 2014 Grade 1. The 2014 edition is the current standard. UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware.

When does the 98/99 rim device become handed?

When ordered with SD (special dogging), -2 (double cylinder), or SS (signal switch) options. Standard configurations without these options are non-handed.

What is HD-QEL on the 98/99 Series? 

Quiet Electric Latch Retraction with hex dogging retained. It allows mechanical dogging and electric outside entry on the same device simultaneously.

What is the SS Signal Switch option? 

It monitors both the push pad and the latch bolt, signals unauthorized use to the access control system, makes the latch bolt tamper-resistant, and is rated up to 2.0 amp at 24VDC. It also makes the device handed.

Are 98 and 99 Series parts interchangeable? 

Yes, completely. The 98 has a smooth case and the 99 has a grooved case. Every internal component is identical between the two.

Exit Alarms Parts and Diagrams: The Von Duprin Guard-X Component Guide

Most facility managers only think about exit alarms parts and diagrams when the alarm fails to sound, the battery dies, or a disarming label gets peeled off. The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is the most widely installed commercial alarmed exit device in North America. It is not a standard exit device with an alarm kit added on. It is a purpose-built alarmed exit lock that integrates a stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds of force resistance, a 100-decibel alarm, an armed indicator light, and a Schlage SC-1 cylinder into a single housing. It complies with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, is UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, carries a 10-year limited mechanical warranty and a 1-year limited electrical warranty, and ships non-handed in satin aluminum 628/US28 finish. The 2609 is the double door version.

What the Guard-X Was Built For

The Guard-X 2670 exists for one specific application: secondary exits where unauthorized use needs to be deterred without eliminating code-compliant egress. It identifies the door as an emergency exit and secures the opening against unauthorized entry or exit. Typical applications include back doors at restaurants, retail stores, discount stores, grocery stores, drug stores, clothing stores, and sporting goods stores where employee or customer misuse of a secondary exit is an operational problem.

Two features define the deterrent function:

The stainless steel deadbolt does not retract unless the key disarms the device first. It is tested to withstand 1,600 pounds of force, making it significantly more resistant to defeat than a standard latch bolt. The 100-decibel alarm sounds immediately when the push bar is activated without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light on the device face shows the armed state before any attempt is made to open the door.

The standard device ships with an SC-1 Schlage cylinder included. The 2609 double door variant coordinates alarm functions between two active leaves on a paired opening.

Every Replaceable Component in the Guard-X 2670

Alarm Battery

This is the most frequently replaced component on every Guard-X installation. The device uses a standard 9-volt battery to power the alarm circuit. When the battery fails, the device operates mechanically but produces no alarm sound on push bar activation, which is the worst failure mode for a deterrent device. Proactive replacement every six months on high-use secondary exits prevents silent failure without waiting for the symptom.

Schlage SC-1 Cylinder

The cylinder is what disarms the alarm before an authorized door use. The SC-1 keyway is Schlage's standard 5-pin tumbler residential and light commercial cylinder. It ships included with the Guard-X 2670. Replacement is needed when the cylinder wears from heavy use, when a key is lost, or when the building's key system is being re-keyed. The SC-1 keyway is widely available from Schlage-authorized locksmiths and can be ordered factory-keyed to a master key system.

Retainer Nut

The retainer nut secures the cylinder in the device housing. A loose retainer nut allows the cylinder to rotate in the housing rather than staying fixed, which prevents the alarm from disarming correctly when the key is turned. Retainer nuts are the most commonly overlooked service item on Guard-X devices. A torque check at every service visit takes 30 seconds and prevents the most frustrating "alarm won't disarm" service call.

Disarming Label

The "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY, ALARM WILL SOUND" label is both an NFPA 101 code requirement and a deterrent element. Labels fade, peel, or are deliberately removed. A missing label removes a code compliance element and reduces deterrent effectiveness. Replacement labels are stocked individually.

Alarm Housing Assembly

The housing contains the sounder element and the circuit board that controls alarm timing and the indicator light. When the alarm sounds erratically, fails to sound despite a fresh battery, or the indicator light malfunctions, the housing assembly requires replacement. This is less common than battery or cylinder service but becomes necessary as devices age past their electrical warranty period.

Push Bar Assembly

The push bar completes the alarm circuit when depressed without prior disarming. Push bar wear from physical abuse or forced entry attempts requires assembly replacement. The push bar is replaceable without removing the full device from the door.

Deadbolt Assembly

The stainless steel deadbolt is the mechanical security element. Replacement is required when the bolt is physically damaged from a forced entry attempt significant enough to defeat the 1,600-pound resistance rating. This is not common but does occur in high-risk retail applications.

Sourcing Guard-X Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Guard-X exit alarm parts catalog with model-specific components for the 2670 and 2609. The Von Duprin brand page covers the Guard-X alongside every other Von Duprin exit device series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is a purpose-built alarmed exit device with a 10-year mechanical warranty and a 1-year electrical warranty. Six primary replaceable components: 9-volt alarm battery, Schlage SC-1 cylinder, retainer nut, disarming label, alarm housing assembly, and push bar assembly. The battery is replaced most often. The retainer nut is inspected least often. The 2609 double door version shares all the same component specifications. Sourcing from the exit alarms parts and diagrams catalog at Security Parts starts with confirming single door (2670) or double door (2609), then navigating to the model-specific parts page with same-day shipping on stocked items.

FAQs

What alarm volume does the Von Duprin Guard-X produce? 

100 decibels. It activates immediately when the push bar is pressed without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light shows armed status before any door use attempt.

What force resistance does the Guard-X deadbolt have? 

1,600 pounds, per Von Duprin testing. This significantly exceeds standard latch bolt resistance and prevents the door from being forced open without triggering the alarm first.

What battery does the Guard-X 2670 use? 

A standard 9-volt battery. Replace proactively every six months on high-use secondary exits. Battery failure causes silent operation with no alarm on push bar activation.

What cylinder ships with the Guard-X 2670?

 A Schlage SC-1 5-pin tumbler cylinder. Re-keyable by any Schlage-authorized locksmith. Can be ordered factory-keyed to a building's master key system.

What warranty does the Guard-X carry?

 10-year limited mechanical warranty, 1-year limited warranty on electrical components.

Von Duprin 7500 Parts Manual: Functions, Components, and Replacement Parts Guide

The Von Duprin 7500 parts manual covers the mortise lock that pairs with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit device line. The 7500 itself is a field-reversible mortise lock with a non-handed auxiliary bolt for deadlocking, an adjustable-bevel faceplate, and field-selectable TP and K functions. The E7500 is the electrified variant with electric locking or unlocking options. The SS-7500 is the stainless steel build.

That's the short version. If you're pulling parts off a hardware schedule or troubleshooting a service call, the longer version is what determines whether you order the right component the first time. This guide walks through the 7500 mortise lock anatomy, function selection, exit device pairing, electric strike compatibility, and how to source replacement parts without misordering.

What the Von Duprin 7500 Mortise Lock Is

The Von Duprin 7500 is the mortise lock designed to operate as the inside locking mechanism for the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit device. The 88 Series is the panic hardware on the door. The 7500 is the mortise lock body that handles the latch and bolt work behind it. They're sold and specified together as a system on commercial doors that need both panic egress and mortise-lock security.

Three things make the 7500 unusual compared to a generic mortise lock. The lock is field reversible without removing it from the door, which cuts install and service time substantially. The auxiliary bolt is non-handed, which means it works on either swing direction. And the faceplate carries an adjustable bevel, so the lock can adapt to door edge angles without ordering a different SKU. Those three properties together are why the 7500 stays on spec sheets even as newer mortise hardware enters the market.

7500 vs E7500 vs SS-7500: Identifying the Variant You Have

The Von Duprin 7500 ships in three primary variants, and the parts manual breakdown is different for each one.

The standard 7500 is the mechanical mortise lock. No electrification, no monitoring switches. This is the variant on most older Von Duprin 88 Series installs.

The E7500 is the electrified version. It carries the same chassis as the mechanical 7500 but adds electric locking or unlocking through the outside trim. Two SPDT signals monitor trim condition and latchbolt status. Power options include 12V DC, 24V DC, and AC variants with available solenoid kits (SO12, SO24). The E7500 is what's specified on access-controlled commercial openings.

The SS-7500 is the stainless steel build. Same function set as the standard 7500 but with the corrosion-resistant body and faceplate. Common in coastal installs, food processing facilities, and any environment where the mortise lock has to survive humidity and washdown.

Pull the lock face off the existing door and read the model designation before ordering parts. The 7500, E7500, and SS-7500 share many components but not all of them. Cylinder housings, trim spindles, and latch assemblies cross. Solenoid assemblies, electrical kits, and monitoring switches are E7500 specific.

Function Options on the Von Duprin 7500

The 7500 ships with field-selectable functions, which is one of its strongest features for inventory and service. The two primary functions are TP (thumbpiece) and K (keyed). Function selection happens through a set screw in the mortise lock body. Turning the set screw down switches between TP and K function without disassembling the lock.

That field selectability matters when you're servicing a building with mixed openings. One stocked 7500 can be configured for either function at the door, instead of stocking two SKUs. For procurement teams managing replacement parts across a portfolio of buildings, this drops inventory complexity meaningfully.

The E7500 adds electric lock and electric unlock function variants on top of the mechanical function selection. The choice between electric lock (the trim is normally unlocked, locks when energized) and electric unlock (the trim is normally locked, unlocks when energized) is set at order, not field selectable.

Components in the Von Duprin 7500 Parts Manual

The 7500 mortise lock breaks down into these core component groups, listed in the order you'll typically encounter them during service:

Mortise lock case with internal mechanism. The lock body itself. Replaced as a complete unit on most failures.

Faceplate with adjustable bevel. Field replaceable. Bevel adjusts to door edge angle.

Auxiliary bolt (non-handed). Deadlocks the main latch when the door is closed. One of the highest-wear components on heavily cycled doors.

Main latchbolt. The latch that engages the strike. Stainless steel on most production runs.

Trim spindles and connecting hardware. Link the inside and outside trim to the lock body. Worn spindles cause loose trim feel and eventually lever droop.

Cylinder housing. Accepts the keyway cylinder. The 7500 typically takes a Schlage-prep mortise cylinder, which means common Everest 29 or Primus cylinders fit directly.

Set screw for function selection. Located in the lock body. Turns to switch between TP and K functions.

Solenoid assembly (E7500 only). Drives the electric lock or unlock mechanism. Solenoid power draw varies by voltage: roughly 0.38 amps at 12V DC, 0.19 amps at 24V DC.

Monitor switches (E7500 only). Two SPDT signals for trim and latchbolt status. Wired to the access control panel.

Strike pocket insert. Specified for 7500 mortise lock compatibility with Von Duprin 6212WF and similar electric strikes. Furnished with the strike, not the lock.

Compatible Exit Devices and Electric Strikes

The Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock was designed to work with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. That's the canonical pairing. The 8875-F mortise lock fire exit device pairs directly with the 7500 for UL-listed 3-hour fire door assemblies on single and double 4-foot by 8-foot openings.

For electric strike compatibility, the Von Duprin 6200 Series strikes are the matched pair. Specifically, the 6211, 6211AL, 6211WF, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221, 6222, 6223, 6224, 6224AL, 6225, and 6226 strikes are factory-listed as 7500 mortise lock compatible. The 6210 strike is the direct replacement for legacy Von Duprin 3146 applications and also pairs with the 7500. The 6212WF includes a strike pocket insert specifically engineered for 7500 mortise lock mounting.

When sourcing an electric strike for a 7500 mortise lock door, confirm the strike compatibility chart on the strike's spec sheet before ordering. The mounting tabs and pocket dimensions differ between Von Duprin's own strike lines and surface-applied alternatives.

How to Identify a Von Duprin 7500 Before Ordering Replacement Parts

Three checks before placing a parts order. Each one prevents a return.

First, confirm it's a 7500 and not a 7400 or other Von Duprin mortise line. The 7500 family stamps the model number on the lock face. Remove the trim, look at the lock face for the model designation, and read it directly.

Second, identify the variant. Mechanical 7500, electrified E7500, or stainless SS-7500. The body finish gives you the SS variant immediately. The presence of wiring leads coming out of the lock body identifies the E7500.

Third, identify the function. TP function (thumbpiece trim) vs K function (keyed trim). Look at the existing outside trim. A thumbpiece-style trim is TP. A keyed lever or knob with no thumbpiece is K. If the function needs to change during service, the set screw inside the lock body switches it without ordering different parts.

Common Service Issues and Which Parts to Replace

Three failure patterns dominate Von Duprin 7500 service calls.

Auxiliary bolt wear. The deadlocking auxiliary bolt sees high cycle counts on heavily used doors and eventually loses spring tension or shows visible wear at the engagement face. Replace as a single component.

Trim spindle wear or loose lever feel. The spindle connecting outside trim to the lock body wears over time, particularly on doors that get pulled rather than pushed. The lever or thumbpiece develops play. Replace the spindle assembly rather than the full lock body.

E7500 solenoid failure. Most often traced to wrong voltage at the lock terminals, transient voltage from solenoid-based hardware on the same circuit, or simple end-of-life on a high-cycle door. Confirm voltage and transient suppression before replacing the solenoid. A motor that fails inside a year is usually an install problem, not a hardware defect.

How to Source Von Duprin 7500 Replacement Parts

For mechanical 7500 components, source by part type: faceplate, auxiliary bolt, latchbolt, trim spindle, cylinder housing. Each is available as an individual replacement. The Von Duprin parts catalog on Security Parts indexes by series.

For E7500 electrical components, confirm voltage (12V DC, 24V DC, or AC) before ordering. Solenoid assemblies are voltage-specific. Order the matching SO12 or SO24 kit for AC operation. Note that 16V DC and 28V DC solenoids are stocked as replacement parts only for existing legacy strikes, not new builds.

For complete 7500 mortise lock replacement, order by full SKU including function (TP or K) and finish. Stainless variants (SS-7500) carry their own ordering line. Cross-reference exit device compatibility with the Von Duprin 88 Series exit devices when replacing the lock as part of a system service.

For electric strike replacement matched to a 7500, the Von Duprin electric strike line carries the 6200 Series strikes that pair with the 7500 mortise lock. Confirm strike model number against the 7500 compatibility chart before ordering.

For configurations not visible online, call 845-935-0301. Two minutes of spec verification on the phone prevents the wrong-configuration return cycle on a service call that probably doesn't have those days to spare.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Von Duprin 7500 used for?

 The Von Duprin 7500 is a mortise lock designed to pair with the Von Duprin 88 Series mortise exit devices. It handles the latch and bolt work on commercial doors that need both panic egress hardware and a mortise lock body.

Is the Von Duprin 7500 field reversible?

 Yes. The 7500 mortise lock can be reversed for opposite hand without removing the lock from the door. The auxiliary bolt is non-handed, which means it operates correctly in either swing direction.

What's the difference between Von Duprin 7500 and E7500? 

The 7500 is the mechanical mortise lock. The E7500 is the electrified variant with electric locking or unlocking through the outside trim, plus two SPDT signals for trim and latchbolt monitoring. The E7500 ships in 12V DC, 24V DC, or AC configurations.

How do I switch between TP and K function on a Von Duprin 7500? 

Function selection is field-adjustable through a set screw in the mortise lock body. Turning the set screw down switches between TP (thumbpiece) and K (keyed) function without disassembling the lock.

Which electric strikes work with a Von Duprin 7500? 

The Von Duprin 6200 Series strikes are factory-listed as 7500 compatible. Specifically the 6210, 6211, 6212, 6213, 6214, 6215, 6221, 6222, 6223, 6224, 6225, and 6226 strikes. The 6212WF includes a strike pocket insert engineered for 7500 mortise lock mounting.

Is the Von Duprin 7500 fire rated?

 The 7500 mortise lock is used on UL-listed fire door assemblies when paired with the 8875-F mortise lock fire exit device, supporting 3-hour fire ratings on single and double 4-foot by 8-foot openings.

What voltage does the E7500 solenoid require? 

The E7500 ships in 12V DC, 24V DC, and AC variants. Power requirements are approximately 0.38 amps at 12V DC and 0.19 amps at 24V DC. AC operation requires the SO12 or SO24 solenoid kit.

Where can I source Von Duprin 7500 replacement parts? 

Security Parts stocks the Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock and component-level parts including auxiliary bolts, faceplates, trim spindles, cylinder housings, and E7500 solenoid kits. Call 845-935-0301 for configurations not visible online.

Closing

The Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock is one of the longest-running commercial mortise lines still on active service catalogs. It's on hardware schedules across institutional buildings, healthcare facilities, and K-12 schools that were built or renovated in the last twenty years. When a 7500 needs service, the parts manual breakdown above is what determines whether the right component gets ordered or whether the door stays out of service for an extra week.

Source it from a distributor that stocks both the 7500 mortise lock and the matched 88 Series exit devices on the same line. Security Parts has carried Von Duprin commercial hardware since 2001, with same-day shipping on stocked components and spec verification by phone at 845-935-0301 for configurations that need a second set of eyes.

 

Electric Strikes Parts and Diagrams: Von Duprin 6000 Series Component Guide for Commercial Openings

Understanding electric strikes parts and diagrams saves facilities teams from a common and expensive problem: replacing an entire electric strike when only the solenoid has failed. Von Duprin's 6000 Series electric strike line, covering the 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 models, is the most widely installed commercial electric strike in North America. These devices are built to be field-serviceable, with the solenoid as the primary replaceable component. The Von Duprin 050240 solenoid kit fits every model in the 6000 Series at 24VDC (with 12VDC in 050237 and 16VDC in 050239), which means one stocked solenoid kit covers the most common failure across the entire product line. But accurate sourcing requires understanding the full component diagram, knowing the difference between fail-safe and fail-secure operation, and confirming the voltage and finish before ordering any finish-specific parts.

How an Electric Strike Works: The Four-Component System

An electric strike replaces a conventional strike plate in the door frame. Instead of a fixed pocket for the latch bolt, the electric strike uses a spring-loaded keeper (also called the lip or gate) that can either stay engaged to keep the door latched or release to allow the door to open without retracting the latch bolt. This is the essential distinction from an electric lock: the electric strike releases from the frame side, so the latch bolt on the door hardware does not need to move.

The four primary components visible in the Von Duprin 6000 Series diagram are:

Strike Body: The main housing that mounts into the door frame cutout. The strike body contains the solenoid, the keeper mechanism, the latch pocket, and the mounting hardware. Strike body dimensions are specific to the strike model and the frame prep. The 6100 and 6200 Series are designed for new construction applications. Retrofit applications may require frame modification when replacing a competitive or older Von Duprin strike.

Solenoid Assembly: The electromechanical component that drives the keeper release. When energized, the solenoid plunger moves, releasing the keeper so the door can swing open. On fail-safe strikes, the solenoid must be energized (power applied) to hold the keeper in the locked position. On fail-secure strikes, the solenoid must be energized to release the keeper.

The Von Duprin solenoid kits by voltage: 050237 (12VDC), 050239 (16VDC), 050240 (24VDC). All three fit every model in the 6000 Series. Note: 16VDC and 28VDC solenoids are sold only as replacement parts for existing strikes in the field. They are not specified for new installations. For AC power operation, the Von Duprin SO12 (12VAC) or SO24 (24VAC) rectifier kit converts AC to the DC the solenoid requires.

Keeper (Strike Lip or Gate): The pivoting component that the latch bolt rides over when the door closes and that either holds or releases the latch when the solenoid is energized or de-energized. The keeper on the 6000 Series is spring-loaded to return to the locked position when the solenoid de-energizes. This spring is a separate serviceable component in the 6000 Series refurbish kit.

Cover Plate and Mounting Hardware: The visible face plate that conceals the strike housing in the frame. Finish must match the installed hardware. Finish-specific items in the 6000 Series are designated with an "X in Finish column" notation in the parts manual, meaning the finish code must be specified when ordering.

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure: The Most Operationally Important Distinction in Electric Strike Parts

This distinction affects which solenoid behavior is correct for the installation and has direct code compliance implications for fire door and life safety applications.

Fail-secure operation: The door is normally locked. Power must be applied to unlock (release the keeper). When power is lost (power failure, fire alarm cutoff), the door remains locked. Fail-secure strikes are available for fire-rated openings. The Von Duprin 6100 fail-secure is specified FSE at time of order.

Fail-safe operation: The door is normally unlocked when powered. Power must be removed to lock (engage the keeper). When power is lost, the door unlocks. Fail-safe strikes are commonly used for life safety applications and are non-fire-rated. This is because a fire door must be able to latch under fire conditions, and a fail-safe strike that opens when power is cut would prevent latching during a fire event when building power may be compromised.

When the solenoid fails in a fail-secure installation, the door will typically remain locked regardless of any input signal. When the solenoid fails in a fail-safe installation, the door may fail open or may fail in an intermediate position depending on the spring return and keeper condition.

The entry buzzer (EB) option is available only with fail-secure strikes. It is installed in the frame in parallel with the strike circuit and provides an audible signal to the visitor when the door can be opened.

The Six Series in the Von Duprin Electric Strike Lineup

5100 Series: Standard commercial electric strike for rim exit devices on single doors and pairs. Designed for Von Duprin rim panic hardware applications specifically. Not for use with mortise or cylindrical locks.

6100 Series: Standard commercial electric strike for mortise locks and cylindrical locks. Available in fail-safe and fail-secure. Standard 24VDC. Optional 12VDC and AC operation. Power requirements: 12VDC at 0.38 amp, 24VDC at 0.19 amp. Compatible with a wide range of frame preps.

6200 Series: The high-security electric strike with ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1 certification and 1500-pound holding force rating. UL 294 Listed, UL 1034 Listed for burglary-resistant electric door strikes. Fire rated UL 10C to 3 hours on single doors, 90 minutes on pair doors with inactive leaf. Compatible with Schlage, Von Duprin, and Falcon cylindrical and mortise locksets as well as many other manufacturers' products. Available for new construction and retrofit applications. The 6200 Series can retrofit a number of competitive and older model Von Duprin electric door strikes.

6300 Series: The widest compatibility electric strike in the Von Duprin lineup, designed for applications where the specific lock manufacturer or model cannot be easily specified at time of order. Covers cylindrical, mortise, and panic hardware applications in a single platform.

J2 Series (6111, 6112, 6113): Specifically engineered for wood frame applications. The 6211WF is recommended on wood frames for new installations. For retrofit applications on wood frames replacing Folger Adam competitive strikes, the J2 Series maintains dimensional compatibility with legacy frame preps.

Monitor Strike Option: What It Adds

The monitor strike option adds a switch inside the strike body that monitors both latch bolt position (whether the latch is in the strike pocket) and lock status (whether the keeper is in the locked position). This allows the access control system to confirm that the door is both closed and latched, rather than just confirming that the strike released. Monitor strike configurations are designated "M" in the model number and require wiring for both the solenoid circuit and the monitor switch circuit.

The monitor option is specified in security-sensitive applications including government access control, healthcare, and financial institutions where door status verification is required by the access control specification.

The 6000 Series Refurbish Kit

Von Duprin produces a 6000 Series refurbish kit that contains the spring-loaded keeper, the pivot pin, and the mounting hardware needed to restore a worn or damaged 6000 Series strike body to full function without replacing the full unit. The refurbish kit is the correct maintenance approach when the keeper is worn, the spring return is weak, or the pivot pin is corroded, but the strike body housing and solenoid are otherwise functional.

The refurbish kit does not include the solenoid. If both the keeper mechanism and the solenoid are failed, the solenoid must be ordered separately alongside the refurbish kit.

Sourcing Electric Strike Parts Accurately

Security Parts organizes the complete electric strikes parts and diagrams catalog for Von Duprin 5100, 6100, 6200, and 6300 Series. Every series page carries component-level organization with interactive diagrams. The Von Duprin Von Duprin brand page covers the full electric strike lineup alongside exit devices and other Von Duprin hardware.

Two ordering notes specific to 6000 Series parts: finish-specific items require the finish code. Items without a finish designation ship in the manufacturer's standard finish, which may not match the installation. Second, 16VDC and 28VDC solenoids are replacement-only parts and cannot be ordered for new applications. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com for frame prep confirmation and lock compatibility questions before an order is placed.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin 6000 Series electric strike is a four-component system: the strike body, the solenoid, the keeper, and the cover plate. The solenoid kit in the correct voltage (050237 for 12VDC, 050239 for 16VDC, 050240 for 24VDC) fits every model in the series and is the most common single repair in the field. Fail-secure strikes are available for fire-rated openings. Fail-safe strikes are non-fire-rated. The 6200 Series carries a 1500-pound holding force and 3-hour UL 10C fire rating on single doors. The refurbish kit restores keeper and spring function without replacing the full unit. Sourcing correct electric strikes parts and diagrams starts with confirming the series, the voltage, the fail mode, and the finish before the order is placed. Security Parts stocks every 6000 Series component with same-day shipping and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What is the Von Duprin 050240 solenoid kit? 

The 24VDC replacement solenoid for all Von Duprin 6000 Series electric strikes. Available in 12VDC (050237) and 16VDC (050239). Note: 16VDC is a replacement-only voltage not available for new installations.

What is the difference between fail-safe and fail-secure electric strikes? 

Fail-secure stays locked without power, unlocks when power is applied. Fire-rated strikes are fail-secure. Fail-safe stays unlocked without power, locks when power is applied. Fail-safe strikes are non-fire-rated and are used for life safety applications.

What is the holding force rating on the Von Duprin 6200 Series? 

1500 pounds, ANSI/BHMA 156.5 Grade 1. The 6200 Series carries UL 294, UL 1034 (burglary-resistant), and UL 10C (fire) listings with a 3-hour rating on single doors.

What does the 6000 Series refurbish kit include? 

The spring-loaded keeper, pivot pin, and mounting hardware for restoring a worn 6000 Series strike body. The solenoid is not included and must be ordered separately if the solenoid has also failed.

What is a monitor strike? 

An electric strike with an internal switch that monitors both latch bolt position (closed) and lock status (latched). Required in access control specifications where door status verification rather than just release signal confirmation is needed.

 

Cylindrical Locks Parts and Diagrams: The Complete Schlage ND Series Component Guide

Cylindrical locks parts and diagrams are the starting point for every field technician or facility manager who needs to replace a component without replacing the full lockset. The Schlage ND Series is the standard commercial cylindrical lock in North America, carrying ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2011, Series 4000, Grade 1 certification and UL listing for 3-hour fire doors (single 4'0" x 10'0", pair 8'0" x 10'0"). The ND Series service manual published exploded view diagrams that broke the lock into its ten primary visible components: Adjustment Plate, Outside Lever, Chassis, Latch, Strike, Anti-Rotation Plate, Optional Spacer, Mounting Screws, Inside Lever, Rose, and Inside Spring Cage. Understanding what each of these components does, what fails first in each category, and how the model number determines which parts apply to a specific installation is the knowledge base that makes parts sourcing accurate and fast.

Reading the Schlage ND Series Exploded View Diagram

The exploded view diagram in the ND Series service manual shows all ten components separated along the axis of the door, from the outside lever on the left to the inside lever and spring cage on the right, with the chassis and latch assembly in the center. This layout directly corresponds to the physical installation sequence and is the fastest way to identify a failed component visually.

Here is what each component does:

Outside Lever: The lever handle on the exterior side of the door. Lever styles for the ND Series include ATH (Athens), BRK (Boardwalk), BRW (Broadway), LAT (Latitude), LON (Longitude), OME (Omega), RHO (Rhodes), SPA (Sparta), and TLR (Tubular). Dimensions vary by style: Athens is 4.56 inches wide by 3.31 inches projection, Boardwalk is 4.94 by 3.06, Omega is 5.06 by 3.31. The Rhodes lever includes an optional breakaway feature that allows the handheld portion to separate from the shank under extreme torque, protecting the spring cage and locking mechanism from forced entry.

Chassis: The internal body of the lock that houses the locking mechanism, the cylinder interface, and the latch retractor. The chassis determines the lock function. Schlage produces separate chassis for each ND Series function (ND10, ND12, ND30, ND40, ND50, ND60, ND70, ND80, ND96, and more). Chassis are not interchangeable between functions.

Latch: The spring-loaded bolt that projects from the door edge and engages the strike on the door frame. Standard backset is 2-3/4 inches. Short backset is 2-3/8 inches. For 5-inch backset, a 43-005 extension is available. The latch includes a slide clip that the installer must engage correctly during installation: "Push latch to center of slide" is a critical step in the ND Series installation instructions that is frequently missed and produces misalignment in the latch bolt.

Strike: The frame-mounted receptacle for the latch bolt. The default Schlage ND Series strike is 10-025: ANSI, no box, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch. Finish must be specified. For fire-rated assemblies, a T strike is available. For applications requiring a deeper pocket, a box strike provides additional latch engagement depth.

Anti-Rotation Plate: A thin metal plate that prevents the chassis from rotating inside the door bore under lever torque. On the ND Series, the anti-rotation plate tab must be aligned with the indent on the hub during installation. Misalignment produces a lock that drifts out of position over time.

Optional Spacer: Schlage provides spacers for ND Series locks installed on doors other than the standard 1-3/4 inch thickness. No spacer is required for 1-3/4 inch doors. Spacers are required for 1-3/8 inch doors. For 1-5/8 inch, 2 inch, or 2-1/8 inch doors, the adjustment plate must be repositioned rather than using spacers.

Rose: The circular cover plate that conceals the mounting hardware and the through-bore hole on the door face. Standard ND Series rose diameter is 3.44 inches. The rose is available in multiple finishes and must be finish-matched when ordering a replacement.

Inside Spring Cage: The spring cage assembly on the inside of the lock that provides lever return force and contains the button or thumbturn mechanism for inside lever control functions. When an inside lever is floppy or fails to return to horizontal, the spring cage is typically the failed component.

Mounting Screws: Two screws that draw the inside and outside trim together through the door thickness. Length must match the door thickness. XN12-012 provides standard trim chassis spacers. XN12-307 provides lead-lining spacers for special applications.

Adjustment Plate: The plate that allows the outside lever assembly to be positioned correctly relative to the door face. On ND Series locks manufactured after January 31, 2017, the adjustment plate design changed. Parts for pre-2017 and post-2017 locks are not fully interchangeable.

ND Series Function Designations: What They Mean for Parts

The ND Series function number is part of the model number and determines which chassis applies and whether electrified options are relevant.

ND10: Passage function. Latch retracted from either side at all times. No locking function. No cylinder outside.

ND12: Exit lock. Outside lever fixed (cannot retract latch). Inside lever always free. Key unlocks outside lever from outside. Electrified versions: ND12EL (electrically locked, fail safe) and ND12EU (electrically unlocked, fail secure).

ND30: Privacy lock. Push-button on inside locks outside lever. Emergency coin release from outside.

ND40: Bedroom/bath privacy. Push-button on inside locks outside lever. Emergency pin tool release from outside.

ND50 and ND53: Entrance lock. Outside lever locked/unlocked by key. Push-button on inside controls outside.

ND70: Classroom function. Key outside locks and unlocks outside lever without opening door. Inside lever always free.

ND80: Storeroom function. Outside lever always inoperative. Entry requires key only. Inside lever always free.

ND96: Combination entrance and storeroom. Available with electrified options (ND96EL and ND96EU). RX (request to exit) switch available on ND10, ND12, ND80, ND81, and ND96 functions.

Cylinder Types and Why They Affect Parts Ordering

The cylinder suffix in the ND Series model number determines which cylinder is installed:

Standard cylinder (no suffix): Conventional Schlage mortise cylinder. Uses SC1 5-pin or SC4 6-pin keyway. The standard residential and commercial specification.

FSIC (Full-Size Interchangeable Core): Allows the core to be removed and re-keyed without disassembling the lock body. The core uses a control key to insert and remove the core from the housing.

SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core): Best Primus-compatible small format IC standard. The core is smaller than FSIC. Common in institutional environments where a master key system uses SFIC throughout the building.

For keyed IC outside levers (FSIC only), the ND Series installation instructions include a specific note: "IMPORTANT! DO NOT install IC cylinder! Follow steps in ND-Series Timing Guide!" The timing guide must be consulted before cylinder installation on keyed IC functions. Ignoring this step is the most common cause of a new ND Series installation that does not function correctly after assembly.

The electrified ND Series uses a motor, not a solenoid, to provide quiet operation and energy efficiency. Maximum current draw is 0.24 amp, allowing more locks to run from a single power supply. The low 0.010 amp holding current eliminates the risk of lever heating in long-duration electrically locked applications.

Lock Timing and What It Means for Servicing

Certain ND Series functions require timing, meaning the position and adjustment of internal components must be set before the lock will operate correctly. Functions requiring timing are listed in the ND Series Timing Guide (P517-432), which ships with the lock.

On serviced locks where the chassis has been disassembled, the timing must be reset before the lock is reinstalled. A lock that functions mechanically but does not respond to a key, or one that operates in the wrong direction, almost always has a timing error rather than a failed component.

Sourcing ND Series Parts Accurately

Security Parts organizes the complete cylindrical locks parts and diagrams catalog with model-specific pages for the Schlage ND Series. Every parts page carries an interactive diagram aligned to the exploded view format used in the official ND Series service manual. Navigate to the function designation (ND10, ND12, ND70, etc.), open the diagram, identify the failed component visually, and confirm the part number before ordering.

The Schlage brand catalog extends this organization across every Schlage line beyond the ND Series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com, particularly for confirming whether a lock is pre-2017 or post-2017 manufacture before ordering an adjustment plate or inside spring cage.

Conclusion

The Schlage ND Series diagram shows ten components. Each one has a specific function and a specific failure mode. The chassis is function-specific and cannot be swapped between ND10, ND70, ND80, or any other designation. The anti-rotation plate tab must align with the hub indent or the lock drifts. The latch slide clip must be engaged at center or the latch misaligns. For keyed IC functions, the timing guide must be consulted before cylinder installation. Sourcing correct cylindrical locks parts and diagrams starts with the function designation, then the cylinder type, then the door thickness, and then the finish code. Security Parts stocks every ND Series component with same-day shipping and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What are the ten components in the Schlage ND Series exploded view diagram? 

Adjustment Plate, Outside Lever, Chassis, Latch, Strike, Anti-Rotation Plate, Optional Spacer (for non-standard door thickness), Mounting Screws, Inside Lever, Rose, and Inside Spring Cage.

What door thickness does the Schlage ND Series support?

 1-3/8 inch to 2-1/8 inch. Standard installation is 1-3/4 inch with no spacers required. Spacers are provided for 1-3/8 inch doors. The adjustment plate repositions for 1-5/8, 2, and 2-1/8 inch doors.

Why is the "timing guide" important for some ND Series functions?

 Certain ND Series lock functions require internal components to be set to a specific position before the lock operates correctly. The ND Series Timing Guide (P517-432) must be followed before cylinder installation on these functions, or the lock will not operate after assembly.

What is the default Schlage ND Series backset?

 2-3/4 inches standard. 2-3/8 inch short backset is available. A 43-005 extension provides a 5-inch backset for applications where the standard dimensions do not reach the door edge.

What does the RX option add to a Schlage ND Series lock?

 A micro-switch inside the chassis monitors lever rotation and signals the use of the opening to the access control system. Available on ND10, ND12, ND80, ND81, and ND96 functions.

Exit Alarms Parts and Diagrams: The Von Duprin Guard-X Component Guide

Most facility managers only think about exit alarms parts and diagrams when the alarm fails to sound, the battery dies, or a disarming label gets peeled off. The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is the most widely installed commercial alarmed exit device in North America. It is not a standard exit device with an alarm kit added on. It is a purpose-built alarmed exit lock that integrates a stainless steel deadbolt rated to 1,600 pounds of force resistance, a 100-decibel alarm, an armed indicator light, and a Schlage SC-1 cylinder into a single housing. It complies with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, is UL Listed for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, carries a 10-year limited mechanical warranty and a 1-year limited electrical warranty, and ships non-handed in satin aluminum 628/US28 finish. The 2609 is the double door version.

What the Guard-X Was Built For

The Guard-X 2670 exists for one specific application: secondary exits where unauthorized use needs to be deterred without eliminating code-compliant egress. It identifies the door as an emergency exit and secures the opening against unauthorized entry or exit. Typical applications include back doors at restaurants, retail stores, discount stores, grocery stores, drug stores, clothing stores, and sporting goods stores where employee or customer misuse of a secondary exit is an operational problem.

Two features define the deterrent function:

The stainless steel deadbolt does not retract unless the key disarms the device first. It is tested to withstand 1,600 pounds of force, making it significantly more resistant to defeat than a standard latch bolt. The 100-decibel alarm sounds immediately when the push bar is activated without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light on the device face shows the armed state before any attempt is made to open the door.

The standard device ships with an SC-1 Schlage cylinder included. The 2609 double door variant coordinates alarm functions between two active leaves on a paired opening.

Every Replaceable Component in the Guard-X 2670

Alarm Battery

This is the most frequently replaced component on every Guard-X installation. The device uses a standard 9-volt battery to power the alarm circuit. When the battery fails, the device operates mechanically but produces no alarm sound on push bar activation, which is the worst failure mode for a deterrent device. Proactive replacement every six months on high-use secondary exits prevents silent failure without waiting for the symptom.

Schlage SC-1 Cylinder

The cylinder is what disarms the alarm before an authorized door use. The SC-1 keyway is Schlage's standard 5-pin tumbler residential and light commercial cylinder. It ships included with the Guard-X 2670. Replacement is needed when the cylinder wears from heavy use, when a key is lost, or when the building's key system is being re-keyed. The SC-1 keyway is widely available from Schlage-authorized locksmiths and can be ordered factory-keyed to a master key system.

Retainer Nut

The retainer nut secures the cylinder in the device housing. A loose retainer nut allows the cylinder to rotate in the housing rather than staying fixed, which prevents the alarm from disarming correctly when the key is turned. Retainer nuts are the most commonly overlooked service item on Guard-X devices. A torque check at every service visit takes 30 seconds and prevents the most frustrating "alarm won't disarm" service call.

Disarming Label

The "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY, ALARM WILL SOUND" label is both an NFPA 101 code requirement and a deterrent element. Labels fade, peel, or are deliberately removed. A missing label removes a code compliance element and reduces deterrent effectiveness. Replacement labels are stocked individually.

Alarm Housing Assembly

The housing contains the sounder element and the circuit board that controls alarm timing and the indicator light. When the alarm sounds erratically, fails to sound despite a fresh battery, or the indicator light malfunctions, the housing assembly requires replacement. This is less common than battery or cylinder service but becomes necessary as devices age past their electrical warranty period.

Push Bar Assembly

The push bar completes the alarm circuit when depressed without prior disarming. Push bar wear from physical abuse or forced entry attempts requires assembly replacement. The push bar is replaceable without removing the full device from the door.

Deadbolt Assembly

The stainless steel deadbolt is the mechanical security element. Replacement is required when the bolt is physically damaged from a forced entry attempt significant enough to defeat the 1,600-pound resistance rating. This is not common but does occur in high-risk retail applications.

Sourcing Guard-X Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Guard-X exit alarm parts catalog with model-specific components for the 2670 and 2609. The Von Duprin brand page covers the Guard-X alongside every other Von Duprin exit device series. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com. Same-day shipping on stocked components.

Conclusion

The Von Duprin Guard-X 2670 is a purpose-built alarmed exit device with a 10-year mechanical warranty and a 1-year electrical warranty. Six primary replaceable components: 9-volt alarm battery, Schlage SC-1 cylinder, retainer nut, disarming label, alarm housing assembly, and push bar assembly. The battery is replaced most often. The retainer nut is inspected least often. The 2609 double door version shares all the same component specifications. Sourcing from the exit alarms parts and diagrams catalog at Security Parts starts with confirming single door (2670) or double door (2609), then navigating to the model-specific parts page with same-day shipping on stocked items.

FAQs

What alarm volume does the Von Duprin Guard-X produce? 

100 decibels. It activates immediately when the push bar is pressed without prior key disarming. The armed indicator light shows armed status before any door use attempt.

What force resistance does the Guard-X deadbolt have? 

1,600 pounds, per Von Duprin testing. This significantly exceeds standard latch bolt resistance and prevents the door from being forced open without triggering the alarm first.

What battery does the Guard-X 2670 use? 

A standard 9-volt battery. Replace proactively every six months on high-use secondary exits. Battery failure causes silent operation with no alarm on push bar activation.

What cylinder ships with the Guard-X 2670?

 A Schlage SC-1 5-pin tumbler cylinder. Re-keyable by any Schlage-authorized locksmith. Can be ordered factory-keyed to a building's master key system.

What warranty does the Guard-X carry?

 10-year limited mechanical warranty, 1-year limited warranty on electrical components.

Door Closers Parts: What Every LCN Component Does and How to Source It Without a Wrong-Part Return

Most maintenance teams only think about door closers parts when a closer arm cracks, a cover plate falls off, or the door starts slamming hard enough to loosen the hinges. By that point, the device has usually been failing gradually for weeks. A sweeping door that moves inconsistently, a latch that engages but does not pull cleanly, a door that drifts open when the building pressurizes, these are all early signals from a specific component that is wearing out. LCN, manufacturing commercial door control hardware since 1877, produces the most widely installed institutional closer line in North America. Its parts catalog spans surface-mounted closers (1460, 4040XP), overhead concealed closers (3030/3130, 2010/5010), high-security closers (2210), and the COMPACT operator (6400). Every component in every series is ordered with four specifications: Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) where applicable. Missing any one of them produces a part that ships incorrectly.

How to Find the Model Number Before Opening the Parts Catalog

The model number on LCN mechanical closers is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion shaft, where the arm connects to the closer body. The month and year of manufacture are also stamped there. For concealed closers and automatic operators, the information is on a label on the housing.

One thing that trips up a lot of first-time LCN parts orders: casting and forging numbers stamped or raised on the component surface, such as "71" or "320G" on a cylinder assembly, are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers. They cannot be used to identify or order a replacement. Use the model number from the closer body and the current LCN parts manual for correct identification.

The Seven Component Categories That Cover Most LCN Door Closer Repairs

Arm Assemblies

The arm is the most frequently replaced component on surface-mounted LCN closers. It connects the closer body to the door or frame and translates spring energy into controlled door movement. Arm failure most often presents as a cracked casting at the pivot point or a stripped connection at the shoe.

LCN produces several arm configurations across the surface-mounted lineup:

  • Regular arm (3077): The standard pull-side arm. Connects the closer body to the frame with a fixed pivot. Used in regular arm mounting where the closer is on the pull side of the door.
  • Parallel arm with shoe (3027PA): For push-side door face mounting. The arm runs parallel to the frame when the door is closed, protecting it from direct force and reducing projection.
  • Slide track arm (3077T): Rides in a track mounted to the frame. Allows hold-open at any door position. The track roller is a separate serviceable component.
  • Extra duty arm (EDA): Reinforced construction for abuse-resistant applications.
  • Fusible link arm: For fire-rated hold-open applications where the arm releases and allows the door to close when a heat-sensitive fusible link melts.

For the 4040XP specifically, the standard regular arm is 4040XP-3077 and the parallel arm drop plate combination is 4040XP-18PA. For the 3130 concealed closer, the track arm is 3130-3034, with the track roller as a separate part at 3130-3034-689.

The long rod and shoe combination 4040XP-79LR covers applications where the standard arm cannot reach the required frame mounting point due to door width or frame geometry.

Cover Plates and Body Housing

The cover protects the internal hydraulic and spring mechanism. On the 4040XP, the metal door closer cover is right-hand (RH) and left-hand (LH) specific. The 4040SE series uses a 4040SE-72MC-RH-689 metal cover for right-hand installations.

Cover plates are finish-specific. When ordering a replacement cover, the finish code must match the installed hardware. Standard LCN finishes include 689 (aluminum), 693 (bronze), 690 (dark bronze), and 628 (satin aluminum).

Drop Plates and Mounting Hardware

Drop plates reposition the closer body when the standard mounting geometry cannot be used due to a window transom, a non-standard header dimension, or a frame profile that does not accommodate direct mounting. The 4040XP-18PA is the parallel arm drop plate for top rail-less applications. Drop plates are application-specific and cannot be substituted between different mounting configurations.

Mounting screws are door-material specific. Metal door mounting uses machine screws. Wood door mounting uses wood screws. Using incorrect fasteners creates play in the installation that accelerates wear on every internal component.

Cylinder Assembly and Pinion

The cylinder assembly is the internal hydraulic unit inside the closer body. It contains the piston, the spring, and the hydraulic fluid that controls the closing speed. On standard surface closers, the cylinder is not individually serviceable: when the hydraulic fluid leaks from the body or the internal seals fail, the entire unit requires replacement rather than component repair.

The packing nut sits at the base of the pinion shaft. The pinion is the shaft that connects the arm to the internal spring mechanism. If the arm is secure but the door does not close properly, the pinion connection is a point to inspect before condemning the full unit.

Track Roller

The track roller is the component that rides inside the slide track on track arm closers. It is one of the highest-wear components on track arm installations because it absorbs the rotational force of every door cycle through direct contact with the track surface. Squealing or scuffing sounds during closer operation are the most common indicator of a worn track roller.

LCN track rollers are series-specific:

  • 4010T-3034: For the 4010T surface closer
  • 3130-3034-689: For the 3130 concealed closer
  • 4630-3034-689: For the 4630 Auto Equalizer operator
  • 2030-3034H: For hold-open or non-hold-open track configurations on the 2030 concealed closer

Spring and Green Dial Adjustment (1460 Series)

The LCN 1460 Series includes the patented Green Dial spring power adjustment system. This allows the spring power to be adjusted in the field without disassembling the closer body. The Green Dial eliminates the need to stock multiple spring sizes to cover different door weights and backcheck requirements. When the door is closing with inadequate force or latching inconsistently, adjusting the Green Dial is the correct first step before ordering any replacement component on a 1460 Series closer.

For closers without the Green Dial, the spring power is determined at the time of order and is set internally at the factory. Field adjustment of spring power on these models requires replacement of the entire cylinder assembly.

Sentronic Electronic Hold-Open Arm

The LCN Sentronic series integrates an electronic hold-open function into the door closer arm. When powered, the arm locks in the hold-open position. When power is interrupted (by a fire alarm signal, for example), the arm releases and the closer brings the door to the latched position. The Sentronic arm hold-open track is a replaceable component: 4040SEH-3038 is the 24V hold-open track, non-handed, non-sized.

What Failure Signs Map to Which Component

Symptom

Most likely cause

Component

Door slams after being pulled open forcefully

Failed or missing backcheck

Hydraulic valve adjustment or cylinder

Door drifts to the open position

Spring power inadequate or arm loose

Green Dial (1460) or arm connection

Squealing during operation

Track roller wear

Track roller part number by series

Door does not latch on closing

Latch speed valve off or door weight

Hydraulic valve adjustment

Closer cover fell off or cracked

Physical impact or vibration

Cover plate replacement

Arm cracked at pivot or shoe

Forced opening or door wedge abuse

Arm assembly replacement

 

Sourcing LCN Closer Parts Correctly

Security Parts organizes the complete door closer parts catalog by series with interactive diagrams on every model page. The LCN door closer parts guide covers the full component tree for surface-mounted, concealed, and COMPACT operator models. The four ordering specifications, Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V), are required for every finish-specific, size-specific, handed, or electrified component. Confirming all four before placing the order is what prevents the most common wrong-part returns on LCN products.

Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com.

Conclusion

LCN door closers parts are series-specific, finish-specific, and in many cases hand-specific. The model number is at the packing nut. Casting numbers on components are not part numbers. Track rollers, arm assemblies, cover plates, and Sentronic hold-open tracks are the most common individual replacement components. The Green Dial spring adjustment on the 1460 Series should be the first adjustment attempted before any parts order on a 1460 closer with inconsistent closing behavior. Every parts order requires Finish, Size, Hand, and Voltage specifications. Security Parts stocks every LCN series component with same-day shipping on in-stock items and pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

Where is the LCN door closer model number located? 

Stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion shaft on mechanical closers. The manufacturing date is also stamped there. For concealed closers and automatic operators, the information is on a label on the housing.

Are casting numbers on LCN components the same as part numbers? 

No. Numbers like "71" or "320G" stamped on LCN cylinder assemblies are manufacturing reference numbers and cannot be used to order replacement parts. Use the model number from the closer body and the LCN parts manual.

What four specifications are required to order an LCN door closer part? 

Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) where applicable. Missing any one of these produces an incorrectly specified part.

What causes the squealing sound on an LCN track arm door closer? 

Track roller wear from high-cycle use. The track roller is a serviceable replacement component specific to each LCN series. It is not universal across series models.

What is the LCN Green Dial?

 A patented spring power adjustment system on the 1460 Series that allows the spring power to be adjusted in the field without disassembling the closer body, eliminating the need to stock multiple spring-size closers.

Deadbolts Parts: The Complete Guide to Schlage B Series Components and How to Order Right

When deadbolts parts need replacing on a commercial building, the sourcing process has one non-negotiable starting point: knowing the exact Schlage B Series model installed, because the cylinder type, the backset, the strike dimensions, and the tailpiece profile all vary between the B250, B260, B350, and B360 lines. The Schlage B Series has been the commercial and institutional deadbolt standard for decades. It carries ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 and Grade 2 ratings depending on the model, a 1-inch deadbolt throw on Grade 1 configurations, and a parts catalog that has remained largely consistent, which means a component ordered today is compatible with a B Series deadbolt installed in the 1990s. But getting the specific part right still requires reading the model number, confirming the backset, and knowing which cylinder type is installed before anything goes in a cart.

The Schlage B Series Lineup and What Separates Each Model

Understanding which model is installed determines every subsequent parts decision.

B250 and B252: The Grade 1 single-cylinder deadbolt (B250) and double-cylinder (B252). Single cylinder means inside thumbturn, outside key. Double cylinder means key operation on both sides. The 1-inch throw bolt meets Grade 1 bolt extension requirements. The B252 is the specification for glass-panel doors and applications where reaching through a broken pane to operate a thumbturn is a security concern.

B350 and B352: The commercial Grade 2 versions of the same configurations. 5/8-inch throw bolt rather than 1 inch. Specified on lower-security applications where Grade 1 performance is not required.

B360: The vertical deadbolt, where the bolt throws vertically rather than horizontally. Specified on applications where a door is subject to prying force that could defeat a horizontal bolt, common on hollow metal exterior doors with minimal frame engagement.

The backset is the distance from the door edge to the center of the cylinder hole. Schlage B Series ships standard at 2-3/8 inch and 2-3/4 inch backsets. Confirming which backset is installed is the sourcing step that determines the correct latch and strike combination.

Every Replaceable Component in the Schlage B Series

The Deadbolt Cylinder

The cylinder is the component that translates the correct key into bolt rotation. It is the most commonly replaced part in the Schlage B Series because it absorbs the wear of every key insertion and rotation across the deadbolt's service life.

Schlage B Series cylinders are available in several configurations:

Standard 5-pin cylinder (SC1 keyway): The residential and light commercial standard. The SC1 "C" keyway is the most widely available and the most easily rekeyed in the field.

6-pin cylinder (SC4 keyway): Provides one additional pin stack for slightly increased pick resistance. Specified where a small security upgrade is required without changing the entire keyway system.

Primus high-security cylinder: Incorporates an additional set of side pins and a sidebar mechanism, requiring a key with a corresponding milled channel. Significantly increases resistance to picking and unauthorized key duplication. The Primus cylinder cannot be picked or bumped by standard methods and the keyway is patented, meaning unauthorized key copying requires a certified dealer.

The cylinder is held in the deadbolt body by a small set screw or retaining pin typically located on the side of the bolt assembly near the cross bore hole. The tailpiece, the flat metal bar extending from the back of the cylinder, must be correctly oriented to engage the bolt rotation mechanism when the replacement cylinder is installed.

The Latch Bolt and Throw Assembly

On Grade 1 B Series models, the deadbolt itself is a 1-inch hardened steel bolt with an anti-saw pin. On Grade 2 models, the throw is 5/8 inch. The bolt housing contains the mechanism that converts rotational motion from the cylinder or thumbturn into the horizontal throwing action of the bolt.

Latch bolt failure is typically caused by physical damage from door slamming against a misaligned strike rather than from internal component wear. A bent or deformed bolt that does not retract cleanly is the most common indicator.

The Strike Plate

The Schlage B Series ships with several standard strike options. The specific strike needed for any replacement order depends on the door frame material, the backset, and whether a security strike upgrade is required.

  • 10-025: ANSI standard strike, no box, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch. The standard specification strike for most commercial applications.
  • 10-026: Full lip strike, 1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, square corners. Used where a shorter lip is acceptable and the door frame does not accommodate the full ANSI strike.
  • 10-027: Full lip strike, 1-5/8 inch by 2-1/4 inch, 1/4-inch radius corners. Aesthetic version of the 10-026 for applications where corner radius is specified.
  • B520283 Dust Box: The standard deadbolt strike dust box that mounts in the door frame strike cutout, providing a pocket for the bolt to enter and protecting the frame material. Finish must be specified.

The Thumbturn

The thumbturn is the interior component that operates the bolt without a key on single-cylinder models. Thumbturn failure is usually caused by the mechanism wearing out at the pivot point or by physical force applied to the inside of the door. The Schlage B Series thumbturn assembly connects directly to the bolt mechanism and is a field-replaceable component.

Spindle and Rose Plate

The rose plate covers the cylinder hole and mounting hardware on the door face. On the B Series, the exterior rose plate is available in multiple finishes and must be finish-matched when ordering a replacement. The spindle connects the thumbturn to the internal bolt mechanism on single-cylinder models.

Mounting Screws

The B Series ships with mounting screws specific to the door thickness. Standard screws cover 1-3/4 inch doors. The Schlage 61-075 thick door kit provides longer screws and mounting extensions for doors up to 2-1/4 inches thick, used when the standard screws do not provide adequate bite.

Common Failure Signs and What Each Indicates

Cylinder turns but bolt does not move: The tailpiece is not engaging the bolt mechanism correctly. Either the replacement cylinder has the wrong tailpiece orientation or the internal bolt mechanism has worn out.

Bolt extends but does not retract cleanly: Typically indicates a bent bolt, a deformed strike pocket, or door frame movement that misaligns the bolt and strike. The strike should be removed and the alignment checked before replacing any internal components.

Key difficult to turn but still operates: Pin stack wear inside the cylinder, or a bent key that has deformed the driver pins. A cylinder replacement addresses both causes.

Bolt not extending to full throw: Internal spring fatigue inside the bolt mechanism, or physical interference from frame material swelling around the strike box.

Thumbturn loose or clicking: The thumbturn pivot spring has failed. The spring assembly is replaceable without removing the full cylinder.

Why Finish Must Be Specified on Every Schlage B Series Parts Order

Every finish-specific Schlage B Series part, including the rose plate, strike, thumbturn, and exterior trim, requires a finish designation when ordering. Standard Schlage finishes include US26D (satin chrome), US26 (polished chrome), US3 (polished brass), US4 (satin brass), US10B (oil-rubbed bronze), US10 (satin bronze), and US15 (satin nickel). Ordering without a finish designation produces a part that ships in the manufacturer's default and may not match the installed hardware. The model number on the installed deadbolt usually includes the finish code as the last designation in the number.

Sourcing Schlage B Series Parts at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Schlage deadbolt parts catalog by model, with each B Series model on its own page. The Schlage brand catalog covers every active Schlage line with the same model-specific structure. For deadbolts installed in multi-family, healthcare, or government applications where the cylinder is part of a master key system, confirming the keyway before ordering a replacement cylinder is essential. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com.

Conclusion

Schlage B Series deadbolts are the most widely installed commercial deadbolts in North America, and their deadbolts parts catalog has remained consistent enough that components sourced today apply to devices installed years ago. The cylinder keyway, the bolt throw length, the backset, the strike dimensions, and the finish code are the five variables that determine every parts order on these devices. Confirming them from the model number on the installed deadbolt is the step that keeps a straightforward maintenance job from becoming a return cycle. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

What is the bolt throw length on a Schlage Grade 1 B Series deadbolt?

 One inch. The Grade 1 B250 and B252 models project a 1-inch hardened steel deadbolt with an anti-saw pin. Grade 2 models (B350/B352) use a 5/8-inch throw.

What is the difference between a single-cylinder and double-cylinder Schlage deadbolt?

 Single-cylinder (B250, B350) uses a thumbturn inside and key outside. Double-cylinder (B252, B352) requires a key on both sides, specified where inside key override through a broken pane is a security concern.

What Schlage B Series strike is standard for commercial applications? 

The 10-025 ANSI strike, 1-1/4 inch by 4-7/8 inch, no box, is the standard commercial specification. Finish must be specified when ordering.

Why won't my Schlage cylinder turn after replacement? 

The tailpiece orientation is incorrect. The tailpiece must be aligned to engage the bolt rotation mechanism before the set screw is tightened. Refer to the Schlage B Series installation instructions for the correct tailpiece position for the specific function.

What is the Schlage Primus cylinder?

 A high-security cylinder with side pins and a sidebar mechanism requiring a milled channel on the key. Significantly more resistant to picking and bumping than standard 5-pin cylinders. Available as a factory-specified cylinder on B Series commercial applications.

Mortise Locks Parts: How to Identify Every Component in the Schlage L Series and Order Right

If you're maintaining commercial doors, mortise locks parts are among the most complex components you'll source. The Schlage L Series alone covers more than 67 mechanical functions, 33 lever designs, and 12 finishes, and its parts tree splits into chassis components, cylinder components, trim components, and function-specific parts that are not interchangeable even within the same L Series family. A lever return spring for an L9010 passage function is not the same servicing need as a spindle assembly for an L9080 storeroom function. The mortise cylinder cam that applies to a standard Schlage mortise cylinder does not apply to a modular mortise cylinder. And the escutcheon trim on one function may need to be replaced entirely if the function changes, while the rose (sectional) trim on the same door requires no additional parts. Getting any one of these wrong wastes a service call and delays a repair on a door that may be in a fire stair, a healthcare corridor, or a government facility.

How to Read a Schlage L Series Model Number

The model number decodes every specification needed to source replacement parts correctly. The format follows this structure:

L / LV + function group + deadbolt indicator + cylinder suffix

  • L = standard L Series chassis
  • LV = Vandlgard chassis, designed for applications subject to abuse or vandalism. The Vandlgard prevents damage to internal lock components caused by forced lever manipulation.
  • Function group (e.g., 9080): The specific lock function. L9080 is the storeroom function where the outside lever is always inoperative, entry requires a key, and the inside lever is always free. L9010 is passage. L9050 is entrance/office. L9070 is classroom.
  • Deadbolt indicator: 0 in the function number means no deadbolt. 4 means with deadbolt. L9460 Series adds a deadbolt to the basic functions.
  • Cylinder suffix: P = 6-pin full-face mortise cylinder with Schlage logo. L = less cylinder. C = concealed mortise cylinder. W = less concealed cylinder. R = full-size interchangeable core.

The L9050 universal case is worth a specific note: Schlage designed it to be transformed into nine different functions with just a few additional parts. This means a facility that stocks the L9050 universal case can reconfigure it for multiple function requirements with the appropriate additional components rather than stocking nine separate cases.

The Six Component Categories in Mortise Lock Parts

Lock Chassis and Internal Components

The chassis is the case body that houses all internal mechanism components and mounts inside the door edge mortise pocket. The standard L Series chassis and the Vandlgard LV chassis are dimensionally compatible but use different internal component tolerances designed for different use environments.

Internal components commonly replaced include:

  • Latchbolt with anti-friction tongue: The primary latch that engages the strike. The anti-friction tongue releases easily when the door is pushed closed, then the full latch bolt projects. This protects the strike face from wear on high-cycle openings.
  • Auxiliary guarded latch: Deadlocks the latchbolt when the door is fully closed, preventing credit card or shimmy-type forced entry. Present on most L Series functions.
  • Deadbolt: Present on L9460 and related deadbolt functions. Operated by thumbturn from inside or key from outside.
  • Stopworks functions by turn-piece: A mechanical stop mechanism on specific functions that prevents the thumbturn from being operated from outside.

Lever Return Spring (L283-040)

The L283-040 lever return spring is one of the most commonly replaced individual components in the Schlage L Series. It returns the lever to the horizontal position after being operated. One spring is required for each side of the door where a lever is installed. On a standard L9050 entrance function with levers on both sides, two springs are required.

Spindle and Spring Assembly (L283-060)

The L283-060 spindle and spring assembly is used on standard L Series mortise locks for door thicknesses of 1-3/8 to 1-7/8 inches. The spindle is the shaft that connects the trim lever to the internal lock mechanism. When a lever operates but the latch does not retract, the spindle or its connection to the retractor is usually the fault point.

Cylinder Components and Cams

The mortise cylinder sits in the cylinder hole in the chassis face and operates the lock from outside with a key. The cam on the back of the cylinder is what translates rotation into the lock's retractor movement. The correct cam depends on the cylinder type and the lock function.

  • L583-254: Mortise cylinder cam for standard Schlage L Series cylinders (not modular). Fits on the back of conventional Schlage mortise cylinders.
  • L583-446: Replacement cam for Schlage modular mortise cylinders. Works with cylinder lengths 1-1/8, 1-3/8, and 1-5/8 inches.
  • L583-476: Alternative standard cam for Schlage modular mortise cylinders.
  • K510-730: Standard cam for IC (interchangeable core) housings. Also works with Schlage K Series (discontinued), Falcon non-deadbolt functions, Von Duprin exit devices, and Adams Rite 2331 deadlocks.

The cam type must match the cylinder type installed. Using a standard cam on a modular cylinder or an IC cam on a conventional cylinder produces a lock that either fails to operate or operates in the wrong direction.

Trim Components: Rose vs Escutcheon

Trim covers the lever mounting hardware visible on the door face. Schlage L Series offers two trim types with different parts implications:

Rose (sectional) trim: Individual circular rose plates that mount the lever to the door. When servicing rose trim, the existing rose trim hardware does not need to be replaced for function changes in most cases. The lock chassis underneath can be updated to a new function with the appropriate internal parts.

Escutcheon trim: Full-length plates that cover the lever and cylinder area. When changing functions on escutcheon-trimmed locks, both inside and outside escutcheons may need to be replaced. The L Series installation instructions are specific about which functions require full escutcheon replacement.

Specific trim parts include:

  • 09-509 Thumbturn: The standard Schlage L Series T-turn in satin chrome (626). Replaces a worn or damaged thumbturn that operates the deadbolt or privacy deadlocking function.
  • L285-150 Mounting Plate: Used on institutional functions (L9080, L9082) where the inside lever is installed without a thumbturn. Required when the chassis is in the locked position and the inside lever must be mounted separately.
  • Shear pin: The component designed to break if the lever handle is forced. Protects the trim assembly from destruction. Used across multiple L Series trim configurations.

Strikes

The L Series strike selection depends on the door type (wood vs hollow metal), the frame material, and whether a fire-rated strike is required. Strike types include T-square corner strikes, flat square corner strikes, rabbeted strikes for rabbeted frames, and the L9000 Series-specific deadbolt strikes. Finish must be specified when ordering any strike.

Function-Specific Parts and the Universal Transformation

One of the most useful and most overlooked features of the L Series for facilities teams is the universal transformation capability of the L9050 case. Schlage designed this case so that nine different functions can be achieved from a single case with specific additional parts. This means a facility manager maintaining a building with multiple L Series functions can stock a single case type and adapt it to the function required, rather than keeping nine different cases in inventory.

The transformation instructions specify exactly which additional parts are required for each function conversion and whether the existing trim components transfer or need to be replaced. Some functions require the thumbturn assembly to be removed. Some require the clover leaf cylinder cam to be replaced with a straight cam. The instructions are function-specific and available in the Schlage Universal Transformation Guide.

Why Model-First Sourcing Matters for Mortise Lock Parts

Mortise lock parts from a general catalog listing present the same compatibility risk as exit device parts. A lever return spring listed as "L Series spring" without the specific part number and function context could apply to any of 67 mechanical functions. A cam listed as "mortise cylinder cam" without specifying whether it applies to standard or modular cylinders produces an incompatible part.

Security Parts organizes the complete mortise locks parts catalog with model-specific pages for the Schlage L Series and supporting hardware. The Schlage brand catalog covers every active Schlage lock line with the same model-specific organization. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams page carries interactive diagrams for L Series mortise lock models organized by function group.

Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com, particularly useful for identifying the correct cam type, confirming the spindle length for the door thickness, or identifying which trim parts transfer when a function changes.

Conclusion

The Schlage L Series is the most flexible and most parts-intensive mortise lock line in commercial hardware. More than 67 functions, 33 lever designs, and a chassis that can be transformed into nine configurations from a single case. Sourcing any component correctly requires reading the model number (L vs LV, function group, deadbolt indicator, cylinder suffix), identifying whether rose or escutcheon trim is installed, confirming whether the cylinder is standard or modular before selecting a cam, and knowing whether the specific function requires a mounting plate or a shear pin for correct assembly. Starting with the mortise locks parts catalog organized by model and function at Security Parts, using the interactive diagram to confirm each component visually, is what makes the repair accurate without a service callback.

FAQs

What is the difference between the Schlage L Series and LV Series chassis? 

The L is the standard chassis. The LV (Vandlgard) is for abuse-prone environments, engineered to prevent damage to internal components from forced lever manipulation. Dimensionally compatible but with different internal tolerances.

What is the Schlage L9050 universal case?

 The L9050 universal case can be transformed into nine different lock functions with specific additional parts, allowing a single case to serve multiple function requirements without stocking nine separate cases.

How do I identify the correct mortise cylinder cam? 

L583-254 is for standard Schlage L Series conventional mortise cylinders. L583-446 and L583-476 are for modular mortise cylinders. K510-730 is for IC housings. Cam selection depends on which cylinder type is installed.

What is the Schlage L283-040 lever return spring? 

It is the spring that returns the lever to the horizontal position after being operated. One spring is required for each lever installed. Available for individual replacement without disassembling the full chassis.

When does escutcheon trim need to be replaced on a function change?

 On escutcheon-trimmed L Series locks, both inside and outside escutcheons may need replacement when the lock function changes. Rose (sectional) trim typically does not require replacement for function changes.

What is an auxiliary guarded latch on a mortise lock? 

A secondary latch that deadlocks the primary latchbolt when the door is fully closed, preventing credit card or shimmy-type forced entry. Present on most Schlage L Series functions.

 

Door Operators Parts: What Fails, How to Identify It, and How to Source the Right Component

Door operators parts are not the same as door closer parts, even when the operator uses a mechanical closer as part of its assembly. An automatic door operator is an electromechanical or electrohydraulic system that includes a motor or hydraulic drive unit, a controller, an arm assembly, an actuator, and a power supply, all working together to open and hold a door on a signal. When one component in that chain fails, the symptom can look like any one of several issues: the door opens too slowly, it reverses before fully opening, it fails to latch on closing, it makes grinding or squealing sounds, or it simply stops responding to the actuator. Each symptom points to a different component category, and sourcing the replacement correctly requires knowing which category is responsible. LCN, manufacturing commercial door control hardware since 1877, produces the most widely installed commercial automatic door operator line in North America. This guide covers every LCN door operator component category, what failure looks like in each one, and how to source accurately.

Understanding the Four LCN Door Operator Series

Parts compatibility in LCN door operators is series-specific, which means the first diagnostic step is confirming which series is installed. The date of manufacture label is on the operator body. For automatic operators, LCN places it on the label itself rather than stamping it near the packing nut as on mechanical closers.

LCN 4630/4640 Auto Equalizer Series: Designed for primarily manual applications that sometimes require automatic opening, primarily for accessibility. The 4630 mounts top jamb on the pull side with a single lever track arm. The 4640 mounts top jamb on the push side with a double lever regular arm. Both carry ANSI/BHMA 156.19 certification, UL and cUL listing, and ADA/ANSI A117.1 compliance. The "No Destruct" drive system is a specific feature of this series, providing resistance to mechanical damage from forced opening or door being held open against the operator.

LCN 9130/9140/9150 Benchmark Series: The low-to-medium traffic surface-mounted operator line. The 9130 mounts on the pull side with a single lever track arm. The 9140 mounts on the push side with a double lever arm. The 9150 mounts top jamb on the push side for independent or simultaneous pair applications. Features Push 'N Go activation, which takes over when a pedestrian manually opens the door to 5 degrees, then holds the door fully open for 1 to 30 seconds of adjustable time delay. Power Boost provides additional closing force under wind load.

LCN 6400 COMPACT Series: The low-energy operator designed for retrofitting existing LCN 4040XP Series mechanical closers. The motor gearbox assembly connects to the existing 4040XP with just four screws and a mounting plate. This is the most cost-effective way to automate an existing opening without removing and replacing the mechanical closer already installed. The existing 4040XP closer cylinder, including delayed action models, remains in place. Electronic features including opening speed, hold open duration, power boost, motor on/off, fire signal receipt, and actuation signal receipt are all configurable.

LCN Senior Swing Series (9500IQ/2800IQ): The current-generation high-performance operator featuring AdaptivIQ technology, which continuously self-adjusts the operator's opening and closing parameters to account for seasonal temperature changes, door weight variations, and wind load. The 9500IQ is the surface-mounted version. The 2800IQ is the concealed version. Both reduce seasonal service calls because the electronic controller compensates for environmental changes without manual valve adjustment.

The Seven Component Categories in LCN Door Operator Parts

Motor Gearbox Assembly

The motor gearbox is the drive unit that physically opens the door. On the COMPACT Series, the motor gearbox assembly mounts directly onto the 4040XP Series closer body. On the Auto Equalizer and Benchmark Series, it is integrated into the operator housing. The gearbox converts motor rotation into arm movement through a gear reduction system. When the motor runs but the door does not open, the gearbox is the first component to inspect.

Track Arm Assemblies

LCN produces several arm configurations for door operators, each designed for a specific mounting and door type:

  • Standard track arm: rides in a track mounted to the door frame, allowing hold-open at any position
  • Double lever arm: fixed pivot configuration for push-side mounting
  • Single lever track arm: for pull-side and top jamb applications
  • Long arm: for doors requiring extended reach from the closer body to the frame

The 4630 Series track roller part is LCN 4630-3034-689. The standard track is LCN 4630-3038-689. These are finish-specific and must be specified when ordering. Arm compatibility is series-specific: a 9500IQ arm assembly does not cross to the 4630/4640 series.

Controller and Digital Control Box

The controller is the electronic brain of the door operator. It manages opening speed, hold-open duration, power boost threshold, fire alarm interface, and actuator signal input. The 4630/4640 Series digital control box provides fast and accurate adjustments with a physical interface. The Senior Swing's controller runs the AdaptivIQ algorithm, which means it stores learned parameters. When a controller fails, these parameters are lost and must be recalibrated after replacement.

The LCN 9550 Series controller replacement part is 9550-3462-115V for the 115V version. Controllers for the COMPACT 6440 Series are available as part of the COMPACT Low Energy Auto Door Operator Module Parts Kit (LCN 6440).

Actuators: Push Plates and Touchless Sensors

The actuator is what signals the operator to open. Push plate actuators require physical contact. LCN's 8310 Series touchless actuators detect hand motion within sensor range, triggering the opening cycle without physical contact. The 8310-865 is a compact receiver that complies with federal radio frequency regulations and receives signals through barriers.

Two wireless options are available: 900 MHz and 433 MHz, providing wireless actuation without hardwiring the actuator directly to the operator. Both are compatible with LCN's touchless actuation offerings.

Actuator failure typically presents as a door that does not respond to the push plate but operates correctly when tested through a direct controller signal. This isolates the actuator circuit rather than the operator itself.

Power Supply

Door operators require a dedicated power supply. On low-energy operators like the COMPACT and Benchmark Series, the power supply is typically 120V AC or 24V DC depending on the installation. Power supply failure produces a completely non-functional operator even when all other components test correctly. The power supply should be the first component checked when an operator stops responding entirely.

Spring and Hydraulic Components (Mechanical Elements)

For operators that incorporate a mechanical closer as part of the assembly (specifically the COMPACT Series using the 4040XP), the mechanical closer components remain serviceable independently of the motor assembly. The 4040XP cylinder, spring, and hydraulic valves can be adjusted or replaced without disassembling the operator module. Existing 4040XP components including delayed action cylinders are compatible with the COMPACT operator.

Sensors and Accessories

Motion sensors, hold-open sensors, and safety sensors are auxiliary components that affect operator behavior without being part of the drive assembly. A safety sensor detecting an obstruction will prevent the door from fully closing. A malfunctioning hold-open sensor may cause the door to close prematurely. The 8310 Series sensor accessories are designed to integrate with LCN's touchless and automatic operator lineup.

How to Identify a Failed Component Before Ordering

A door that opens too slowly with normal sound usually indicates a spring or valve adjustment, not a parts failure. A door that makes grinding or squealing during operation typically needs the arm and track assembly inspected for wear or misalignment. A door that opens but fails to latch points to the mechanical closer components, particularly the latch speed valve or the latch bolt engagement on the paired lock. A door that fails to respond to the actuator but works on manual override points to the actuator or controller circuit, not the motor. A door that operates once but does not reset for the next cycle is often a power supply issue.

Why Model-Specific Sourcing Prevents the Most Common Errors

LCN operator parts are finish-specific, size-specific, and in many cases voltage-specific. LCN's own guidance on ordering requires specifying Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) for any part where these variables apply. Missing any one of them produces a part that ships but does not fit or does not function in the installation.

The casting or forging numbers stamped on LCN components, such as "71" or "320G" on cylinder assemblies, are manufacturing reference numbers, not part numbers. They cannot be used to order a replacement. The model number on the operator body and the current LCN parts manual are the correct identification sources.

Security Parts carries the complete door closer and operator parts catalog for LCN products organized by series, with interactive diagrams. The LCN door closer parts guide covers the mechanical closer components that support COMPACT operator installations. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 or sales@securityparts.com.

Conclusion

Door operators parts sourcing requires knowing the operator series, the component category responsible for the observed failure, and the four ordering specifications that LCN requires for any finish-, size-, hand-, or voltage-specific component. The AdaptivIQ controller on the Senior Swing stores learned operating parameters that are lost when the controller fails and replaced. The COMPACT Series reuses existing 4040XP mechanical closer components, making it the most serviceable retrofit operator on the market. Casting numbers on LCN components are not part numbers. The model label on the operator body and the series-specific parts page are the correct starting points for every door operators parts order. Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301.

FAQs

Are LCN door operator parts the same as LCN door closer parts? 

No. Operators include motors, controllers, actuators, and power supplies that mechanical closers do not have. The COMPACT Series reuses 4040XP mechanical closer components alongside an operator module, creating the most crossover between the two categories.

How do I find the model number on an LCN automatic door operator? 

The date of manufacture and model information are on a label on the operator body. For mechanical LCN closers, the date is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion. Operators use a label rather than a stamp.

What does AdaptivIQ mean on the LCN Senior Swing?

 It is LCN's self-adjusting controller technology that continuously monitors and adjusts opening speed, hold-open time, and closing force to account for seasonal temperature changes and door condition changes without manual valve adjustment.

Why does the door make squealing sounds during automatic operation? 

Squealing or scuffing during operation typically indicates wear or misalignment in the track roller assembly or the arm connection. LCN provides specific adjustment guidance for this condition, and the track roller is a serviceable replacement component on most operator series.

Can I reuse my existing 4040XP closer if I install the COMPACT operator? 

Yes. The LCN 6400 COMPACT motor gearbox assembly connects directly to an existing 4040XP Series closer body with just four screws. Existing cylinders, including delayed action models, are compatible and remain in place.

 

Exit Devices Parts: What Every Component Does and How to Order the Right One

Quick Answer

Sourcing exit devices parts accurately starts with the model number, not the component name. Here is what every facilities manager and locksmith needs to know before opening any parts catalog:

  • Parts are series-specific, never universal. A dogging assembly from the 22 Series does not fit the 75 Series. Always confirm the model number first.
  • The six component categories that cover most repairs: dogging assemblies, center cases, push bar and crossbar components, strikes, lever arms (88 Series), and SVR latch components.
  • The dogging shaft 090040 requires the long 5/32-inch hex key. The dogging hole is only 1/4 inch deep. Short keys round out the hex engagement and cause premature shaft failure.
  • Pre-1997 vs post-1997 matters for dogging assemblies. Part 050709 is the conversion kit for pre-1997 devices.
  • Strike selection follows fire rating. The 299 and 299F share the same dimensions but are not interchangeable. The 1609 strike is not rated for fire doors.
  • ANSI A156.3 is the governing performance standard for exit devices and sets the testing criteria all Von Duprin series must meet.

Browse the complete Von Duprin exit device catalog at Security Parts, organized by series with interactive parts diagrams. For a full overview of every series in the Von Duprin lineup, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

Why Exit Device Parts Are Series-Specific, Never Universal

This is the single most important fact to internalize before opening any parts catalog. Von Duprin's exit device lineup covers fourteen active series across push pad, touchbar, crossbar, and mortise configurations. Each series uses components engineered to its own dimensional and mechanical specifications. A dogging assembly from the 22 Series does not fit the 75 Series. A center case for the 98/99 rim configuration is a different part from the center case for the 98/9947 CVR configuration.

The model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate is the starting point for every parts order. The first two or four digits identify the series. The function suffix identifies the trim function and configuration. A "-F" suffix means fire-rated, which removes the hex dogging function entirely. Get the model number before the catalog opens.

For a full comparison of all Von Duprin exit device series by application, traffic rating, and configuration, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison. For a broader overview of all Von Duprin replacement components, see the Von Duprin parts guide.

 

The Six Exit Devices Parts Categories That Cover Most Repairs

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device parts guide surface-mounted push bar assembly

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device. View the Von Duprin 22 Series rim model page.

 

Dogging Assemblies

Dogging is the mechanism that holds the push bar in the depressed position, keeping the latch bolt retracted so the door operates freely without latching. Standard on non-fire-rated 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series rim devices. The dogging assembly on devices made after 1997 consists of four parts that are commonly replaced individually:

  • 090040 Dogging Shaft: The piece the 5/32-inch hex key inserts into. The hole depth is only approximately 1/4 inch. The long version of the hex key is mandatory. Short keys round out the hex engagement over repeated use. This is the single most common dogging failure in the field.
  • 090041 Dogging Spring: Activates the dogging hook. Occasionally fails and is sold individually.
  • 090042 Dogging Adapter Spring: Clips the dogging adapter into the mounting bracket.
  • 090043 Dogging Adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.
  • 090044 Dogging Hook: Grabs the push bar mechanism and holds the dogged position on 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series devices made after 1997.

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft replacement part for exit devices dogging assembly

Von Duprin 090040 Hex Dogging Shaft. Order the replacement part.

 

For devices made before 1997, the old-style dogging shaft has a different dimensional profile. Part 050709 is the conversion kit that updates pre-1997 devices to current spec components.

The 88 Series crossbar devices use a 5/32-inch hex key for a different purpose: the wedgetite screw and dog screw in the lever arm assembly. This is not the same dogging operation as the push pad series, and the 88 Series dogging parts do not cross to push pad series.

For the complete 22 Series dogging assembly breakdown and part diagrams, see the Von Duprin 22 Series exit device parts guide. For the 33A and 35A Series, see the 22/33A/35A/55 Series guide.

 

Center Cases and Mechanism Cases

The center case is the primary mechanical housing of the exit device. It contains the latch mechanism, the dogging engagement, and the connection to the trim function. Center case specs differ by trim function within the same series, which is where most wrong-part orders happen.

The 22 Series rim center case (part 109012) has been in production for approximately 40 years and replaces all non-fire-rated 22 Series rim center cases with hex key dogging on the hinge-side cover plate. The 2227 SVR center case (part 109358) has been consistent for approximately 30 years. The 88 rim center case 050409 applies to EO, DT, and NL trim functions only. Lever, knob, and thumbpiece versions each use a different specification.

For 98/99 Series center case replacement, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide. For the 88 Series, see the 88 Series buyers guide.

 

Push Bar and Crossbar Components

The push bar on push pad devices and the crossbar on crossbar devices absorb direct operational load on every door use. Push bar end guides (part on 33A and 98/99 devices) reduce noise and friction at the end of the push bar assembly. Crossbar tube attaching wedges (090020) and rings (090021) secure the crossbar to the device body on the 88 and 55 Series.

Push bar retrofit kits are available for 22 Series rim devices in 36-inch and 48-inch configurations, replacing the push bar assembly without requiring a full device swap.

For rim device push bar maintenance cycles and common wear patterns, see the rim exit devices guide and the rim exit devices facility manager guide.

 

Strikes

Strike selection depends entirely on the device configuration and fire rating status. The table below covers the six strike types that apply across Von Duprin rim and SVR series:

PartTypeCompatible DevicesFire RatedKey Note
299Standard rim strike22, 88, 98, 99 rim; top strike on 2227, 8827, 9827, 9927 SVRNo1-1/4" wide x 2-7/8" high, hole spacing 2-1/8"
299FFire-rated rim strikeSame devices as 299Yes, UL listedSame dimensions as 299. Not interchangeable on fire-rated assemblies
264Low-profile rim strike22, 88, 98, 99 rimNo2-7/8" tall x 1-1/4" wide, roller projection 9/16"
304LFloor SVR bottom strike2227, 8827, 9827, 9927 SVRNoSquare flange 1-7/8" x 1-7/8"
248L-4Surface SVR bottom strike2227, 8827, 9827, 9927 SVRNo9/16" wide x 2-1/2" high, hole spacing 1-7/8"
1609Double door rim strikeDouble door: one SVR leaf, one rim leaf, no center postNoNot rated for fire doors

Von Duprin 304L vertical rod bottom strike SVR exit device replacement part

Von Duprin 304L Vertical Rod Bottom Strike. Order the replacement part.

For fire door assembly requirements governing strike selection and annual inspection, see the commercial door fire rating guide and the NFPA 80 inspection guide.

 

Lever Arms and Axle Components (88 Series)

The 88 Series lever arm is replaced more frequently than any other mechanical component on crossbar devices. The cause is nearly always the same: the dogging screw strips out due to the wedgetite screw seating incorrectly. The right-hand lever arm kit is part 050438. The left-hand kit is 050439. Each includes the wedge, wedge ring, wedgetite screw, and dog screw.

For the complete 88 Series parts breakdown including lever arm, crossbar, and mechanism case specifications, see the Von Duprin 88 Series buyers guide and the 75/78/88/94/95/54 Series parts guide.

 

Top Latch and SVR Latch Components

For SVR configurations, top latch bracket replacement kits (050091 for 22/98/9927 Series) replace worn top latch assemblies. The 8827 bottom latch case (050461) covers all non-fire-rated 8827 SVR devices. Latch covers 050464 cover the top and bottom latches on the 8827 and the bottom latch only on the 8827-F fire-rated version.

For CVR (concealed vertical rod) device parts, including top and bottom latch assemblies and rod hardware for concealed-rod configurations, see the Von Duprin 9847 CVR guide and the Von Duprin 9947 CVR guide.

 

Electrified Upgrade Parts

Three electrified upgrade kits appear most often in parts orders on commercial facilities:

QEL Modular Conversion Kit (114317-00): Adds quiet electric latch retraction to a mechanical 22, 33A, 35A, or 98/99 Series device. Field-installable without opening the device body on current-generation hardware.

ALK Alarm Kit: Converts the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, or 99 Series to an alarmed exit device. Powered by a standard 9-volt battery. Controlled by a mortise cylinder (sold separately).

QEL Baseplate Conversion Kits: The QELA baseplate conversion kits (040063 for 36-inch devices, 040068 for 48-inch devices) are required on some older devices when adding QEL. The HD-QELA versions (040064 and 040068) cover heavy-duty applications.

For a direct comparison of QEL and MEL electrified latch retraction and when each applies, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide and the QEL conversion kit guide. For integrating electrified exit devices into an access control system, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Mortise Device Parts

Mortise exit devices integrate a full mortise lock body into the panic hardware chassis, providing maximum security depth alongside panic egress. The Von Duprin 98/9975 and 8875 configurations use the 7500 mortise lock body. The 7500 uses its own complete set of internal mechanism parts separate from the rim and SVR device families.

For the complete 7500 mortise lock body component catalog with part diagrams, see the Von Duprin 7500 parts manual.

 

How to Source Exit Devices Parts Without a Wrong-Part Return

Most wrong-part orders on exit device parts come from searching by component name rather than by model. A dogging assembly listed under "Von Duprin dogging assembly" without a series designation could apply to a pre-1997 device, a post-1997 push pad device, or a crossbar device. The correct part depends on the series and generation.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin exit devices catalog by series and model. Every model page carries an interactive parts diagram showing the full assembly. Navigate to the correct series, open the diagram, confirm the component visually against the physical device, and place the order from the model-specific parts list. The 98/99 Series, 22 Series, and 88 Series each have their own dedicated pages with complete parts breakdowns.

For guidance on OEM versus aftermarket parts compatibility across Von Duprin exit devices, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide. For the full commercial exit device parts reference across all categories, see the commercial exit device parts guide.

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301 for specification questions before the order is placed.

Exit device parts sourcing is a model-first process, not a category search. The series, the configuration (rim vs SVR vs CVR vs mortise), the manufacturing year (pre-1997 vs post-1997 for dogging assemblies), and the trim function all determine which specific component applies to the device on the door. The dogging shaft 090040 requires the long hex key. The center case specification depends on the trim function, not just the series. The 1609 strike is not rated for fire doors. Starting with the model number before opening the exit devices parts catalog is what makes the first order the right order.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete Von Duprin exit device parts catalog across all series and configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Panic Hardware for Commercial Doors: Types, Code Requirements, and How to Choose the Right Device

Quick Answer

Panic hardware for commercial doors is a code-mandated life safety device required on certain egress doors. Here is what to know before specifying or replacing one:

  • IBC trigger: Assembly (Group A) and educational (Group E) occupancies with 50 or more people; high-hazard (Group H) regardless of load. Section IBC 1010.2.8.
  • NFPA 101 trigger: Assembly, educational, and day care occupancies with 100 or more people; high-hazard with more than 5 people. Always confirm which code the AHJ has adopted.
  • Four device types: Rim (single-point, most common), surface vertical rod or SVR (double doors, no center post), concealed vertical rod or CVR (architectural interiors), mortise (maximum security depth).
  • Fire exit hardware vs standard panic hardware: Fire-rated doors require fire exit hardware with positive latching and no mechanical dogging. Look for the "-F" suffix on Von Duprin devices (22-F, 88-F, 98-F).
  • ANSI A156.3 is the product performance standard that governs exit device testing and listing.
  • Electrified options (QEL, MEL, Chexit, ALK, RX) integrate panic bars with access control without replacing the device.

Browse the complete Von Duprin panic hardware catalog at Security Parts, organized by series with model-specific parts and same-day shipping. For help choosing the right device before ordering, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

When Is Panic Hardware Required: IBC vs NFPA 101

Panic hardware for commercial doors is a code-defined life safety system with specific occupancy triggers, installation dimensions, fire rating distinctions, and device type requirements that vary by building use and adopted code. The model codes define it precisely: a door-latching assembly that releases the latch upon the application of a force in the direction of egress travel. The Iroquois Theatre fire on December 30, 1903 in Chicago killed 596 people, many unable to exit through doors requiring deliberate unlocking under pressure. That event directly produced the first panic release device, developed by Carl Prinzler and Henry DuPrin. Building codes adopted panic hardware requirements in the decades following, and today the requirement is embedded in both the International Building Code and NFPA 101. Getting the specification right requires understanding three things: when code mandates it, which device type fits the door, and what separates standard panic hardware from fire exit hardware.

This distinction causes more specification errors than any other in commercial door hardware. Panic hardware is not required on every commercial door. It is triggered by occupancy type and calculated occupant load.

Under the International Building Code (IBC), Section 1010.2.8, panic hardware is required on egress doors equipped with a lock or latch serving:

  • Assembly occupancies (Group A): 50 or more people
  • Educational occupancies (Group E): 50 or more people
  • High-hazard occupancies (Group H): regardless of occupant load

Under NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, the threshold is different:

  • Assembly, educational, and day care occupancies: 100 or more people
  • High-hazard occupancies: more than 5 people

The IBC uses 50 people. NFPA 101 uses 100. The authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) determines which code applies in a given location. Many US jurisdictions follow the IBC. Others adopt NFPA 101. Some adopt both with local amendments. Always confirm which code version is in force before making any panic hardware determination.

The means of egress extends beyond the immediate room exit door. The IBC defines it as a continuous and unobstructed path of vertical and horizontal egress travel from any occupied portion of a building to a public way, consisting of the exit access, the exit, and the exit discharge. All doors in that path that are equipped with a lock or latch and serve the qualifying occupancy and occupant load must carry panic hardware.

For the full ANSI/BHMA grading framework that governs panic hardware product performance alongside these code requirements, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Standard Panic Hardware vs Fire Exit Hardware

This is the distinction most commonly misapplied in the field. Not all panic hardware is appropriate for fire-rated doors.

Standard panic hardware is tested and listed for panic exit applications under ANSI A156.3. It can include mechanical dogging, which holds the push bar in the depressed position so the door operates as a push/pull entry without latching. Mechanical dogging is acceptable on non-fire-rated egress doors.

Fire exit hardware is tested and listed for both panic exit and fire door applications. The defining requirement is positive latching: the device must latch automatically every time the door closes. Mechanical dogging is not permitted on fire exit hardware because a dogged-open fire door cannot provide the compartmentalization that the fire door assembly requires. Fire-rated Von Duprin configurations carry the "-F" suffix in the model number (98-F, 22-F, 88-F). These devices have no hex dogging function.

For applications where a fire door needs to be held open operationally, electric latch retraction (QEL or ELR) tied to the fire alarm is the acceptable solution. When the fire alarm activates, the electric dogging releases and the door latches automatically.

NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) requires annual inspection of fire door hardware including exit devices. The inspector must confirm that the device latches positively and that no field modifications have been made that would compromise positive latching. For annual inspection requirements, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

The Four Commercial Door Panic Hardware Device Types

Von Duprin 22 Series rim panic hardware for commercial doors surface-mounted exit device

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device. View parts guide and order.

 

Rim devices are the most common panic hardware in commercial construction. The closer body and latch bolt mount on the door face. The entire mechanism is visible, surface-mounted, and directly accessible for maintenance. Fits single doors and paired doors with a center mullion. Available on the Von Duprin 22, 75, 88, 98/99, and 33/35A Series. For a complete guide to rim device maintenance, inspection cycles, and replacement parts, see the rim exit devices guide and the rim exit devices facility manager guide.

 

Surface vertical rod (SVR) devices add top and bottom engagement points via surface-mounted rods running vertically on the door face. Used on double door openings without a center mullion where rim device single-point engagement is insufficient. The 2227, 8827, and 9827/9927 configurations cover this application across Von Duprin series. For CVR-specific parts diagrams and replacement components, see the Von Duprin 9847 CVR guide and the Von Duprin 9947 CVR guide.

 

Concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices provide the same three-point engagement as SVR but route the rod hardware inside the door. Specified when surface-mounted rods are architecturally unacceptable: hotels, healthcare interiors, high-end commercial spaces. More installation-intensive and more costly to maintain.

 

Mortise devices integrate a full mortise lock body into the panic hardware chassis. The latch bolt is housed inside a mortise pocket cut into the door edge, providing maximum security depth alongside panic egress. The Von Duprin 98/9975 and 8875 configurations use the 7500 mortise lock body, which has been in service since approximately 1977 and measures 5-7/8 inches high by 4-1/2 inches deep by 1 inch thick.

 

Panic Bar Push Element Options

The physical bar element of a panic device also varies by specification. Understanding the three primary formats helps when matching a replacement device to an existing installation:

  • Touchbar: A narrow, slender bar that runs across most of the door width. Provides a lighter, more refined appearance. Common on commercial office and healthcare applications.
  • Crossbar: A wider, more robust bar element. More visible and durable for high-traffic and institutional applications. Standard on the 98/99 and 88 Series.
  • Push pad: A flat plate format rather than a protruding bar. Used on recessed or low-profile applications where standard bar projection is not acceptable.

For a full comparison of Von Duprin series by push element type, traffic rating, and application, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

Installation Requirements for Panic Hardware

Regardless of device type, the model codes and OSHA specify:

  • Mounted between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor or threshold
  • Push bar must span at least half the door width
  • Single-motion operation: one push releases the latch, no secondary action required
  • No secondary locking device (chain, padlock) that would prevent operation

ADA requirements add a maximum 5-pound opening force for interior doors on accessible egress routes and single-motion operability without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting.

ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification requires the device to complete 2 million operating cycles without failure. Grade 1 is the minimum specification for commercial and institutional applications. For scheduled maintenance requirements to preserve Grade 1 performance across the service life, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Electrified Options for Access Control Integration

The 98/99, 22, 33/35A, and 75 Series all support electrified integration at the device level:

  • QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction): Modular field-installable conversion that retracts the latch on an authorized signal, silently
  • MEL (Motorized Electric Latch Retraction): Motor-driven retraction for applications where solenoid noise is unacceptable
  • Chexit Delayed Egress: Holds the door latched for 15 seconds after push bar activation, with a local alarm during the delay
  • ALK (Alarm Exit Kit): Converts the device to an alarmed exit; powered by a 9-volt battery, controlled by a mortise cylinder
  • RX (Request to Exit): Switch in the push bar signals the access control system when the bar is pressed

For a direct comparison of QEL quiet electric latch retraction and MEL motor-driven retraction, including when each is specified and how field conversion works, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide and the QEL conversion kit guide. For integrating exit devices into a broader access control system, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

 

Outside Trim Function Codes for Panic Hardware

Outside trim function determines how entry is controlled from the non-egress side of the door. The function code suffix is part of the device part number and must be specified when ordering:

  • EO (Exit Only): No outside trim. The door can only be opened from the inside by depressing the push bar. Standard on stairwells and perimeter egress doors where no re-entry is required.
  • DT (Dummy Trim): Outside pull handle only; no lock function. Used where the outside appearance of a lever is needed but no access control is required.
  • NL (Night Latch): Cylinder on outside locks and unlocks the push bar function. Standard for controlled-access employee entrances.
  • TP (Thumbpiece): Thumbpiece on the outside unlocks the push bar. Used where key access is not required but basic entry control is needed.
  • K (Knob) and L (Lever): Outside knob or lever trim. The lever version is the most common commercial specification when outside entry with a lever handle is required.

For part numbers, installation notes, and compatibility across all trim function codes by Von Duprin series, see the Von Duprin panic bar parts guide.

 

Panic Hardware Selection by Application

ApplicationFire-RatedTrafficCorrect Series
Employee entrance, stairwellSometimesLow to moderateVon Duprin 22 Series
Standard commercial buildingOftenModerateVon Duprin 75 Series
Institutional: hospital, schoolOftenHighVon Duprin 98/99 Series
Correctional, behavioral healthYesHigh abuseVon Duprin 88 Series
Aluminum storefront, glass doorSometimesModerateVon Duprin 33/35A or 78 Series
High-security perimeter doorYesVariesVon Duprin 55 or 98/9975 mortise

For a side-by-side comparison of all Von Duprin exit device series by function, occupancy, and hardware specification, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison guide. For replacement parts organized by series with interactive diagrams, see the exit devices parts guide.

Selecting the correct panic hardware for commercial doors requires resolving four decisions in sequence: which code applies in the jurisdiction, what the calculated occupant load of the space is, whether the door is fire-rated (which determines the standard panic hardware vs fire exit hardware distinction), and which device type fits the door configuration. Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin panic hardware catalog by series with model-specific parts pages, interactive diagrams, and same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301 for specification questions before the order is placed.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete Von Duprin panic hardware catalog across all device types, series, and electrified configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order specification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 22 Series Parts and Applications: The Complete Guide for Commercial and Mid-Traffic Openings

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 22 Series parts and applications catalog covers a practical, Grade 1 panic exit device for mid-traffic commercial openings. Here is what to know before ordering:

  • Two configurations: 22 rim device (single doors and paired doors with center mullion) and 2227 SVR (double doors without a center post, three-point engagement).
  • Center cases are not interchangeable: 22 rim uses part 109012. 2227 SVR uses part 109358. Confirming configuration before ordering is the most important step in 22 Series maintenance.
  • Dogging failure fix: Use the long 5/32-inch hex key. Short keys round out the 090040 dogging shaft because the hole is only approximately 1/4 inch deep.
  • End cap: The 900397 metal end cap kit (2016) permanently replaces the historically fragile plastic version.
  • Electrified options: QEL, RX, LX, RX2, ALK, and CON integrate the 22 Series into access control and alarm systems without replacing the device.
  • Fire-rated variants: The 22F (rim) and 2227F (SVR) carry UL fire exit hardware listing. These require a 4-3/8-inch minimum stile width and do not support dogging.

Security Parts stocks the complete Von Duprin 22 Series parts catalog with same-day shipping on stocked items. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What the 22 Series Is Built For

The Von Duprin 22 Series parts and applications catalog covers a practical, cost-effective Grade 1 panic exit device built for mid-traffic commercial openings where the full institutional specification depth of the 98/99 Series is not required but code-compliant panic egress is. Employee entrances, parking garage stairwells, healthcare clinics, multi-family residential corridors, and back-of-house retail doors. The 22 Series carries ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification (2014 edition), UL listing for both panic exit hardware and fire exit hardware, and a parts catalog that has remained largely consistent for decades, which means components ordered today apply correctly to 22 Series devices installed in the early 1990s.

Von Duprin developed the 22 Series as the value-tier Grade 1 exit device in its lineup. The designation "22" reflects its position in the Von Duprin family below the institutional 98/99 and above residential-grade hardware. It is the most widely installed panic device in mid-traffic commercial and multi-family applications across the US.

The device ships non-handed, meaning it can be installed on left-hand or right-hand swing doors without modification. It fits door stiles as narrow as 3-13/16 inches on standard non-fire-rated configurations and 4-3/8 inches on fire-rated configurations. Compatible door thicknesses are 1-3/4 inches and 2-1/4 inches for both wood and metal doors. Available in 36-inch (3') and 48-inch (4') lengths to suit standard commercial door widths.

The center case measures 4-1/4 inches by 1-3/8 inches by 2-3/8 inches (108 x 41 x 60 mm). The mechanism case measures 2 inches by 3-3/4 inches (51 x 95 mm). Push bar projection is 3-3/4 inches (95 mm) at neutral and 3 inches (76 mm) when depressed. The touchbar height is 39-13/16 inches (1011 mm) standard, and 39-11/16 inches (1008 mm) when used with a mullion.

Under IBC 1010.2.8, panic hardware is required on all egress doors in assembly occupancies with an occupant load exceeding 50 persons and in educational occupancies. Under NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code), fire exit hardware must be used on doors in the means of egress where the door serves a high-occupancy assembly or educational space. The 22 Series, with its UL fire exit hardware listing, satisfies both requirements on qualifying openings. For full fire-rated door assembly compliance requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide and the NFPA 80 inspection guide.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series Configurations: Rim and Surface Vertical Rod

22 Rim Device

Von Duprin 299 rim strike replacement part for 22 Series exit device

Von Duprin 299 rim/vertical rod top strike. View product page and order.

 

The rim configuration is the standard 22 Series device for single doors and paired doors with a center mullion. The latch bolt projects from the device body on the door face and engages the 299 rim strike mounted on the door frame. The device ships with the 299 strike in dull black finish, a 5/32-inch hex dogging key, and all mounting fasteners for both 1-3/4 inch and 2-1/4 inch door thicknesses. Optional sex nuts and bolts (SNB) are available for through-bolt mounting.

The device covers stock hollow metal doors with 161 door prep cutouts.

 

2227 Surface Vertical Rod Device

The 2227 is the surface vertical rod configuration of the 22 Series, used on double door openings without a center mullion. The top rod engages a strike at the door header, the bottom rod engages the floor or threshold, providing three-point engagement. The 2227 uses a separate center case (part 109358) from the rim device (part 109012). These cases are not interchangeable, and confirming the configuration before ordering a center case kit is the step that prevents the most common wrong-part order on 22 Series maintenance.

 

22F and 2227F: Fire-Rated Configurations

The 22F (rim) and 2227F (SVR) are the fire-rated variants of the 22 Series, carrying UL fire exit hardware listing in addition to the standard UL panic hardware listing. Fire-rated configurations require a minimum stile width of 4-3/8 inches and do not support hex key dogging. Dogging is specifically prohibited on fire-rated door assemblies under NFPA 80, because a dogged device cannot swing to the closed and latched position required for fire door compliance.

When ordering replacement parts for a 22F or 2227F device, confirm the fire-rated designation before selecting a center case or trim component. Some trim functions are not available on fire-rated configurations. For ANSI/BHMA grade and UL listing requirements across all commercial door hardware, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide. For a full comparison of 22 Series vs other Von Duprin exit device series, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison guide.

 

Trim Functions and Outside Hardware for the Von Duprin 22 Series

The 22 Series ships ready for multiple outside trim functions. Understanding the function suffix is what determines which outside trim component applies to the opening:

  • EO (Exit Only): No outside trim. The push bar operates egress from inside only. No outside entry function.
  • DT (Dummy Trim): Outside pull only, no locking function. Used on non-secured egress doors where an outside handle is needed for aesthetics.
  • NL (Night Latch): Key locks and unlocks the push bar from outside. The 230NL trim plate measures 3 inches wide by 12-1/16 inches high by 3/32 inches thick.
  • TP (Thumbpiece): Outside thumbpiece unlocks the push bar. Used where key access is not required but outside entry control is needed.
  • K (Knob): Outside knob trim. Economy application.
  • L (Lever): Outside lever trim. The 230L trim was redesigned in 2008, moving the cylinder from inside the lever to a position above the lever. Current 230L dimensions: 3 inches wide by 6-3/8 inches high, 15/16 inches thick.

The 230 Series is the full-size trim line for the 22 and 2227 devices. The 210 Series is the economy trim line. The 230L and 210L levers use a shear pin (3/16-inch diameter by 5/8-inch overall length) at the lever base, designed to break if the lever is forced. This protects the trim assembly from damage on high-abuse applications. Shear pins are stocked as individual replacement components.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series Parts That Require Most Replacement

Center Cases

Von Duprin 109012 center case replacement part for 22 Series rim exit device

Von Duprin 109012 22/22-F rim center case. View product page and order.

 

The 22 rim center case part 109012 has been in production for approximately 40 years. It replaces all non-fire-rated 22 Series rim center cases, which means any 22EO device with hex key dogging on the hinge-side cover plate uses this case. This backward compatibility is valuable for facilities maintaining 22 Series devices installed in the 1980s and 1990s.

The 2227 SVR center case part 109358 has been consistent for approximately 30 years and replaces all worn 2227 SVR center cases.

For part diagrams and interactive component identification across the full 22 Series parts catalog, see the Von Duprin 22 Series exit device parts guide.

 

Dogging Assembly

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft replacement for 22 Series exit device

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft. View product page and order.

 

Hex key dogging is standard on all non-fire-rated 22 Series rim devices. The dogging assembly consists of three components that are commonly ordered individually or as a kit:

  • 090040 Dogging Shaft: The piece the 5/32-inch hex key inserts into. Critical installation note: the hole depth is only approximately 1/4 inch. The long version of the 5/32-inch hex key must be used. Short keys do not reach the full depth of the shaft and round out the hex over time, which is the most common cause of dogging failure on 22 Series devices in the field.
  • 090042 Dogging Adapter Spring: Locks the dogging adapter into the mounting bracket.
  • 090043 Dogging Adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.

For 22 Series devices manufactured before 1998, the old-style dogging shaft has a different dimensional profile. Part 050709 is the conversion kit that updates pre-1998 devices to current spec dogging components. The dogging assembly components 090040, 090042, and 090043 also apply to devices manufactured after 1998 across the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series. See the Von Duprin 22/33A/35A/55 series exit device parts guide for cross-series compatibility reference.

 

End Cap and Bracket

Von Duprin 900397 metal end cap kit replacement for 22 Series rim device

Von Duprin 900397 metal end cap kit. View product page and order.

 

The plastic end cap on the hinge side of the 22 Series device is historically the component most likely to fail on high-use applications. When the end cap breaks, the dogging cover plate slides off and the device loses weather and debris protection. In 2016, Von Duprin introduced the 900397 metal end cap kit, replacing the plastic end cap with a metal version. This kit includes the end cap, bracket, and mounting screws. The full end cap and bracket assembly 900981 is the replacement for broken plastic end cap and bracket combinations. As of October 2014, Von Duprin no longer sells the plastic cap only; the complete assembly ships in its place.

 

Push Bar Retrofit Kits

Push bar retrofit kits are available for 22 Series rim devices in both 3-foot (36-inch) and 4-foot (48-inch) configurations. These kits replace the push bar assembly without requiring a full device swap, which is the correct maintenance approach when the push bar itself is bent or damaged but the mechanism case is functional.

 

Additional Replacement Parts

Additional components regularly replaced on the Von Duprin 22 Series in the field include:

  • 090039 latch return spring: The latch return spring controls the return of the latch bolt after retraction. On high-cycle applications, this spring fatigues before other components. Replace if the latch bolt is slow to return or fails to fully project after the push bar is released.
  • Shear pins (230L and 210L levers): Replaceable individually. Replace after any lever has been forced.
  • QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit: For 2227 SVR configurations, converts older surface vertical rod devices to current-generation specifications without a full device replacement.

For guidance on when to replace vs repair an exit device, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For scheduled maintenance intervals, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Finishes

22 Series devices and trim are available in: powder-coated aluminum (689), powder-coated dark bronze (695), powder-coated chrome (526), powder-coated matte black (622), SP28, and SP313. Finish must be specified when ordering most trim components.

 

Electrified Options for the Von Duprin 22 Series

The 22 Series was designed for mid-traffic openings, but its electrified options catalog supports meaningful access control integration:

RX (Request to Exit): A switch placed in the push bar sends a signal to the access control panel when the push bar is depressed. This monitors egress activity on the opening without controlling it.

LX (Latch Monitor Switch): Monitors the position of the latch bolt itself, signaling when the door is not properly latched.

RX2 (Double Pushpad Monitor): Covers both push bar and pushpad monitoring in a single device.

QEL (Quiet Electric Latch Retraction): A modular field-installable conversion that adds electric latch retraction to a mechanical 22 Series device. When an authorized credential is presented or a remote release signal is received, the latch retracts silently, allowing entry from the outside without a key.

ALK (Alarm Exit Kit): Converts the 22 Series device to an alarmed exit device. Powered by a standard 9-volt battery. Controlled by a mortise cylinder (not included with the kit). When the push bar is depressed, the alarm sounds.

CON (Allegion Connect): Integrates the device into the Allegion wireless ecosystem for remote monitoring and control.

The QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit is available for 2227 configurations, converting older surface vertical rod devices to current-generation specifications without a full device replacement.

For a detailed comparison of QEL quiet electric latch retraction vs MEL motor-driven electric latch retraction on Von Duprin devices, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide. For the full QEL conversion kit parts breakdown, see the Von Duprin QEL conversion kit parts guide. For integrating panic hardware with building access control systems, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide and the electric strike installation guide.

 

Sourcing Von Duprin 22 Series Parts at Security Parts

The 22 Series parts catalog is both consistent and generationally stable. This works in both directions. The center case part 109012 applies to a 22 Series device installed today and to one installed in 1985. The dogging assembly components 090040, 090042, and 090043 apply to devices manufactured after 1998 across the 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 Series. That consistency means a technician can confirm compatibility by confirming the series and the manufacturing year rather than hunting for a discontinued part number.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin 22 Series parts and applications catalog by model, with interactive parts diagrams for the 22 rim device and the 2227 SVR device. The diagram on each model page shows every component in the assembly, allowing visual confirmation of the part before the order is placed. This is the step that prevents the 109012 rim center case from being ordered for a 2227 SVR device that requires the 109358.

For the full Von Duprin lineup beyond the 22 Series, the Von Duprin brand catalog and exit devices section cover every active series with the same model-specific parts organization. Same-day shipping on stocked components from US warehouses. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

For the complete Von Duprin parts catalog by series:

The Von Duprin 22 Series delivers Grade 1 panic exit performance for the broad middle tier of commercial, healthcare, multi-family, and retail applications where the full institutional specification of the 98/99 Series is not required. The rim and 2227 SVR configurations cover the full range of single and paired door openings. Center cases have been consistent for decades. The dogging shaft 090040 requires the long version of the 5/32-inch hex key. The metal end cap kit 900397 resolves the historically weak plastic end cap. And the electrified options catalog, from RX monitoring through QEL modular conversion, supports meaningful access control integration on any 22 Series opening. Sourcing replacement parts starts with confirming the configuration (rim vs SVR) and the manufacturing year, then navigating to the correct model page in the Von Duprin 22 Series parts and applications catalog at Security Parts where diagrams confirm every component before the order is placed.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete Von Duprin 22 Series parts catalog across rim, SVR, fire-rated, and electrified configurations, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Commercial Door Closers: Types, ANSI Grades, and How to Choose the Right One

Quick Answer

Commercial door closers fall into four types, each serving a distinct application:

  • Surface-mounted closers: Most common. Visible on the door or frame. Four arm configurations: regular, parallel, top jamb, and slide track. ANSI Grade 1 required on fire-rated openings.
  • Overhead concealed closers: Hidden inside the frame or door rail. Specified for architectural interiors where surface hardware is not acceptable.
  • Floor spring closers: Embedded in the floor beneath the door. Used on heavy glass doors and all-glass entries where no door-face mounting is possible.
  • Automatic door operators: Motor-driven, triggered by push pad, motion sensor, or access control. Required under NFPA 101 in healthcare patient care areas and touchless entry applications.

ANSI Grade 1 with a UL fire door listing is non-negotiable on fire-rated assemblies. All-weather hydraulic fluid is required on exterior and temperature-exposed installations. For selection guidance by specific LCN series, see the LCN commercial door closer selection guide.

 

The Four Main Types of Commercial Door Closers

Commercial door closers are not interchangeable. The surface-mounted closer on an office interior door is a different device category from the overhead concealed closer on an architectural lobby entry, which is again different from the floor spring closer on a heavy all-glass storefront. ADA lawsuits related to door closer violations have increased in recent years, and the fire door inspection failure most commonly cited in commercial facilities involves a closer that is either the wrong ANSI grade for the assembly or incorrectly adjusted. Specifying or replacing the wrong type does not just create a maintenance problem. It creates a compliance liability. This guide covers every commercial door closer type, how ANSI/BHMA grades work, how the four hydraulic valve functions control the closing cycle, and how to match the right closer to the right application.

 

Surface-Mounted Closers

LCN 1460 surface-mounted commercial door closer Grade 1 ADA compliant

LCN 1460 surface-mounted commercial door closer. View model page.

 

Surface-mounted closers are the most common commercial installation. The closer body mounts to the face of the door or frame and is visible after installation. The mechanism inside most surface closers uses a rack-and-pinion system: a piston riding on a rack turns a pinion shaft connected to the spring. When the door opens, the spring compresses and stores energy. When released, hydraulic fluid controls how fast the spring drives the door closed.

Four arm configurations are available:

  • Regular arm (pull side): Closer body on the pull side of the door, arm extends to the frame. Most common interior door setup. Strongest closing force, most visible projection.
  • Parallel arm (push side): Closer body on the push side of the door, arm runs parallel to the frame when the door is closed. Lowest projection from the door face. Protects the arm from deliberate force. Standard on exterior commercial doors.
  • Top jamb (push side frame): Closer body mounts on the frame head on the push side, arm connects to the door. Correct when the pull side is inaccessible or when the closer must mount on the frame. Common on aluminum storefront and narrow-top-rail glass doors.
  • Slide track arm: The arm rides in a metal track on the frame rather than a fixed pivot, allowing the door to hold open at any position. Used in hospital corridors, loading docks, and any application requiring variable hold-open.

The most common arm geometry error in the field: the shoe mounted too far from the hinge side creates excessive stress on the arm pivot. Too close reduces mechanical advantage. The shoe must be set at the position specified in the manufacturer's template for the closer to perform correctly and last through its rated cycle life.

LCN has manufactured commercial door closers since 1877. The 1460 Series is the universal medium-duty closer for commercial and institutional applications, meeting ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 and ADA requirements, with a 30-year limited warranty. The LCN patented Green Dial system on the 1460 removes the guesswork from spring power adjustment. The 4040XP is the heavy-duty specification for institutional and industrial openings. For parts and component diagrams across all LCN surface closer models, see the LCN 4000 series parts guide and the LCN 4040XP parts guide.

 

LCN 4040XP surface-mounted commercial door closer institutional heavy-duty Grade 1

LCN 4040XP heavy-duty surface-mounted closer. View model page.

 

Overhead Concealed Closers

LCN 3030 overhead concealed door closer Grade 1 interior commercial application

LCN 3030 overhead concealed door closer. View model page.

 

Overhead concealed closers mount inside the door frame transom or the top rail of the door, hiding the mechanism when the door is closed. These are specified on aesthetic-driven applications: hotel lobbies, healthcare interiors, high-end office buildings, and government facilities where surface hardware is architecturally unacceptable.

Installation requires greater precision than surface-mounted closers because the frame transom must accommodate the closer body and the door rail must accept the arm channel.

LCN's 3030/3130 Series is the Grade 1 overhead concealed closer for interior doors in medium to high-traffic applications. The 3030 uses an exposed double-lever arm. The 3130 uses a concealed single-lever arm with a low-friction track and roller assembly. Both carry ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 rating and a 15-year limited warranty.

For institutional and high-traffic installations or those exposed to weather or abuse, the 2010/5010 Series provides heavy-duty concealed performance. The 2010 conceals both the body in the frame and the track in the door. The 5010 conceals the body in the frame with an exposed double-lever arm.

The 2210 Series is LCN's high-security concealed closer for correctional facilities and institutional buildings requiring vandalism resistance. It uses forged steel, a single-lever arm, a heavy steel mounting plate, and tamper-resistant components.

For parts and diagrams across the full LCN overhead concealed closer family, see the LCN 1000/2010/2030/3030 series parts guide.

 

LCN 2010 overhead concealed door closer heavy duty institutional commercial

LCN 2010 heavy-duty overhead concealed closer. View model page.

 

Floor Spring Closers

Floor spring closers embed in a cement case in the floor beneath the door, placing the pivot mechanism at the door base rather than at the top. They are specified for heavy glass doors, balanced doors, all-glass rail and patch-fitted entries, and applications where no visible closer hardware is acceptable on the door or frame.

Some floor spring models support doors up to 300 pounds. They are the most durable and longest-lasting closer type for very heavy-traffic applications because the mechanism is protected inside the floor. The primary drawback is that installation requires cutting into the floor slab, making floor springs impractical for retrofits in most existing buildings.

 

Automatic Door Operators

Automatic operators use an electric motor triggered by a push pad, motion sensor, or access control signal. They are required under NFPA 101 in healthcare patient care areas, in assembly occupancies where conventional closers cannot achieve ADA compliance due to door weight and wind load, and in any touchless entry application. For parts and maintenance references covering LCN automatic operators, see the commercial door operators guide and the LCN Benchmark and Senior Swing automatic door operator parts guide.

 

ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grades: What Each Grade Means for Commercial Door Closers

Grade 1: Rated for 2 million cycles. Required on all fire-rated door assemblies and high-traffic commercial openings. Grade 1 closers must also carry a UL fire door listing for use on fire-rated assemblies. At 500 cycles per day, a Grade 1 unit provides approximately 11 years of rated cycle life.

Grade 2: Rated for 1 million cycles. Suitable for moderate-traffic interior doors where no fire rating is required.

Grade 3: Rated for 500,000 cycles. Not appropriate for commercial applications with a fire door requirement. At the same 500 cycles per day, a Grade 3 unit reaches mechanical fatigue in under 3 years.

Most commercial closers combine a hydraulic system with a mechanical spring. Standard hydraulic fluid performs reliably in typical interior conditions. All-weather hydraulic fluid maintains consistent viscosity from -40 degrees Celsius to 80 degrees Celsius and is required on exterior doors, vestibule applications, and any installation exposed to temperature extremes. As temperature rises and standard hydraulic fluid thins, the closer may fail to latch. All-weather fluid prevents this.

For a full reference on ANSI/BHMA grading standards and how they apply across commercial door hardware, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide. For NFPA 80 fire door compliance including annual inspection requirements for door closers, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide and the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

The Four Hydraulic Valve Functions on a Commercial Door Closer

Every hydraulic commercial closer has four adjustment valves. Understanding each prevents the most common installation errors.

Sweep speed: Controls door movement from fully open to approximately 12 to 15 degrees from closed. This is the longest phase of the arc and the one most responsible for slamming.

Latch speed: Controls the final degrees from 12 to 15 degrees to fully latched. Must be fast enough to engage the latch bolt positively. On fire doors, this latching is the code requirement.

Backcheck: Controls the hydraulic resistance against forceful opening beyond approximately 70 to 80 degrees, protecting hinges, frame, and wall from impact.

Delayed action: When present, holds the door open at approximately 70 degrees for an adjustable delay before the closing cycle begins. Used in healthcare and any application where equipment must clear the door frame.

Every closer should be adjusted in the field after mounting based on actual door weight, wind exposure, and latch requirements. Factory default settings rarely match field conditions. For step-by-step field adjustment procedures, see the how to adjust a commercial door closer guide. For fire door-specific adjustment requirements, see how to adjust a fire door closer.

 

ADA Compliance Requirements for Commercial Door Closers

The Americans with Disabilities Act requires:

  • Maximum 5 pounds of opening force for interior non-fire-rated doors
  • Minimum 5 seconds from 90 degrees open to 12 degrees open for closing speed
  • California state ADA requires the 5-pound limit on both interior and exterior doors

A closer adjusted for fast latching on a busy corridor will typically fail the 5-second measurement. On accessible egress routes, the sweep speed valve must be set for the full 5-second minimum. Where door weight and wind load make the 5-pound opening force limit physically unachievable with a conventional closer, an automatic operator or balanced door system is the correct solution.

 

Door Closer Selection by Application

ApplicationFire-Rated RequiredTrafficCorrect Type
Office interior doorNoLow to moderateSurface-mounted, Grade 1 or 2
Hospital corridorOftenHighSurface-mounted or concealed, Grade 1, all-weather fluid
Architectural lobbyOftenHighOverhead concealed, Grade 1
Aluminum storefrontSometimesModerateSurface-mounted, top jamb or parallel arm, Grade 1
All-glass entranceRarelyHighFloor spring or overhead concealed
Correctional facilityYesHigh abuseLCN 2210 concealed, Grade 1, tamper-resistant
Exterior entranceOftenHighParallel arm, Grade 1, all-weather fluid

For a detailed sizing reference covering LCN power sizes by door width and weight, see the commercial door closer sizing guide. For installation guidance, see the how to install a commercial door closer guide.

 

Sourcing Parts for the Commercial Door Closer Already on Your Door

Every commercial door closer type and series in this guide has its own parts tree. The model number on an LCN closer is located under the cover on a sticker on the cylinder body. On mechanical closers, the manufacturing date is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion shaft. This number determines which arm, which drop plate, and which cover plate applies to that specific device.

Security Parts organizes the complete door closer parts catalog by model across LCN 1000 Series, 4000 Series, and 3030/3130 concealed closers. The LCN door closer parts guide covers specific component categories with interactive diagrams on every model page. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

For series-specific parts guides, see:

For ongoing maintenance requirements, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist and the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide. For parts diagram reference, see the door closer parts diagram guide. For guidance on OEM versus replacement parts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

Commercial door closer selection in this commercial door closers types guide follows a clear sequence: fire rating requirement first, then aesthetics, then traffic level, then frame geometry and door material. ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 with a UL fire listing is non-negotiable on rated fire door assemblies. Surface-mounted closers are the practical standard for most commercial applications. Overhead concealed closers address aesthetic requirements without sacrificing Grade 1 performance. Floor springs handle the heaviest glass and balanced door applications. The four hydraulic valve functions control operational quality and must be adjusted in the field. All-weather fluid is required for exterior and temperature-exposed installations. Sourcing replacement parts starts with the model number under the closer cover, not with a component name or brand search. Browse the complete commercial door closers catalog at Security Parts with model-specific diagrams and same-day shipping.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete LCN door closer parts catalog across all surface-mounted, overhead concealed, and automatic operator series, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Rim Exit Devices: The Facility Manager's Guide to Inspection, Maintenance, and Code Compliance

Quick Answer

Rim exit devices require a three-tier maintenance schedule to stay compliant and functional across their full service life:

  • Monthly: Visual check of push bar movement, latch retraction, strike plate alignment, and visible damage. Takes under two minutes per door.
  • Quarterly: Tighten all mounting fasteners. Apply dry lubricant (graphite or PTFE-based only) to the latch bolt, dogging shaft, and push bar pivot points. Never use oil-based lubricants.
  • Annual: NFPA 80 Section 5.2 inspection by a qualified person. Written documentation required, retained for a minimum of three years.

Six failure conditions require same-day action regardless of schedule. Every replacement part order starts with the model number stamped on the mechanism case. Security Parts carries the full Von Duprin rim exit devices parts catalog organized by series and model. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

What Makes Rim Exit Devices the Most Commonly Maintained Egress Hardware

Von Duprin 98/99 Series rim exit device parts for facility manager inspection guide

Von Duprin 98/99 Series rim exit device parts. Browse 98/99 Series parts.

 

A rim exit device is surface-mounted on the face of the door. The latch bolt projects from the device body itself, engages a strike plate on the frame, and the entire mechanism is visible, accessible, and exposed to daily operational conditions. That visibility is an operational advantage: problems are observable before they become failures. A stiff push bar, a latch that fails to retract cleanly, or a dogging mechanism that no longer holds are all diagnosable without disassembly.

ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certified devices, which covers the Von Duprin 98/99, 22, and 75 Series running on the majority of commercial doors, are rated for 2 million operation cycles. That rating assumes correct installation, appropriate lubrication, and fastener integrity maintained over the device's service life. A consistent three-tier inspection schedule is what keeps the device performing to that standard.

For a broader reference on how rim exit devices compare to surface vertical rod and concealed vertical rod configurations, and guidance on which configuration fits each application, see the rim exit devices complete guide and the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

The Three-Tier Rim Exit Device Inspection Schedule

Monthly Visual Checklist

ItemPassFail
Push bar moves freely without stiffnessNo bindingBar resists or drags
Latch bolt retracts fully when bar is pressedFull retractionPartial retraction
Door opens without resistance when bar activatesSmooth swingDoor sticks or catches
No visible cracks, bends, or impact damage on body or barClean surfacesAny deformation
Strike plate flush with frame, no gap or misalignmentFlush mountGap visible
No rust, corrosion, or finish deteriorationClean finishAny oxidation
Dogging function holds correctly with hex key (non-fire devices only)Holds positionReleases spontaneously

Monthly inspections take under two minutes per door. The purpose is catching developing problems. A push bar showing early stiffness is a lubrication job. A push bar that is binding and failing to latch consistently is a code compliance issue. Catching the difference monthly prevents the second from appearing on an inspection report. For a comprehensive inspection framework covering all commercial door hardware, see the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist.

 

Quarterly: Fasteners and Lubrication

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft quarterly maintenance part for rim exit device

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft. View product page and order.

 

Every quarter, check and tighten all mounting fasteners on the device body, baseplate, and strike plate. Loose fasteners create play in the installation that accelerates wear on every internal component. Do not over-torque: fastener specifications are in the Von Duprin installation instructions for each series and are application-specific across wood door, hollow metal door, and metal frame installations.

Lubrication is the most frequently mishandled maintenance step on rim exit devices. Use a dry lubricant, typically a graphite or PTFE-based product, on the latch bolt, the dogging shaft, and the push bar pivot points. Do not use oil-based lubricants. Oil attracts dust and debris, which forms a paste in the mechanism over time and produces the binding behavior it was applied to prevent. On the Von Duprin 98/99 and 22 Series, the dogging shaft (part 090040) and the dogging hook (part 090044) are the highest-turnover components on high-cycle openings, and they benefit most from consistent dry lubrication.

 

Annual: NFPA 80 Inspection Requirements

For fire-rated doors, NFPA 80 Section 5.2 (2022 edition) requires an annual inspection of the complete fire door assembly by a qualified person. For the exit device specifically, the annual inspection must verify:

  • The device is the correct UL-listed unit for the fire door assembly
  • The device positively latches without manual assistance every time the door closes
  • No field modifications have been made to the device or strike that would void the UL listing
  • The door closer is present and operational (NFPA 101 Life Safety Code requires a closer on every fire door to prevent smoke and flame spread)
  • No evidence of dogging on a fire-rated device (fire-rated devices carry the "-F" suffix in the model number and have no dogging function by design)

IBC Section 1010.2.8 covers panic hardware requirements in the means of egress. For assembly and educational occupancies with a calculated occupant load of 50 or more, doors equipped with a latch or lock must carry panic hardware across the entire means of egress path, not just the immediate room exit.

Documentation requirement: NFPA 80 requires written records of the annual inspection including the date, the inspector's name, a description of hardware inspected, and any deficiencies found and corrected. Most jurisdictions require these records retained for a minimum of three years and available to the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) on request.

For a step-by-step annual inspection reference covering all door hardware including rim exit devices, see the NFPA 80 inspection guide. For fire door compliance requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide. For ANSI/BHMA grade standards referenced in device specifications, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Six Rim Exit Device Failure Signs That Require Immediate Action

Von Duprin rim center case kit replacement part for 98/99 exit device failure repair

Von Duprin center case kit for 98/99 rim exit devices. View product page and order.

 

These conditions require action when observed, regardless of when the last scheduled inspection occurred:

Door fails to latch when released. On a fire-rated door, this is an immediate NFPA 80 violation. Caused by a worn latch return spring (090039), a damaged center case, or a deformed latch bolt.

Push bar does not return to the extended position. Indicates a failed internal spring or a stuck dogging assembly. The door will not latch after the next operation cycle.

Visible gap between latch bolt and strike plate. The 299 rim strike on Von Duprin 98/99 and 22 Series devices measures 1-1/4 inches wide by 2-7/8 inches high with 2-1/8-inch slotted hole spacing. A gap indicates strike shift or door sag.

Grinding or clicking during operation. Lubrication resolves noise temporarily. Persistent noise after dry lubrication indicates internal component wear requiring part replacement, not repeat lubrication.

Physical impact damage. A bent push bar, cracked casting at any pivot point, or body deformation compromises structural integrity and voids the 2 million cycle performance assumption.

Unauthorized modification. Wedges propping the door open, zip ties holding the push bar depressed, or any field modification to the device or strike voids the UL listing on a fire-rated assembly. Requires immediate correction and documentation.

For guidance on correcting hardware failures and sourcing correct replacement components, see the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide and the exit devices parts guide.

 

ADA Compliance on Accessible Egress Routes

The ADA sets a maximum opening force of 5 pounds for interior doors on accessible egress routes. Exit devices must be mounted between 34 and 48 inches above the finished floor. Single-motion operation with no tight grasping, pinching, or twisting is required.

Where ADA compliance problems surface most often in practice: the door closer, not the exit device. A closer set to too high a closing force makes an otherwise-compliant device functionally non-compliant. Annual inspection of the device on an accessible route must include an opening force measurement at the closer, not just an inspection of the device itself.

 

Ordering Rim Exit Device Replacement Parts: Model Number First, Always

Von Duprin 299 rim strike replacement part for rim exit device ordering guide

Von Duprin 299 rim strike. View product page and order.

 

The model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate is the sourcing key. It encodes the series, configuration, and trim function, all of which determine which replacement components apply. A center case kit for the 98/99 rim configuration is a different part from the center case kit for the 98/9947 CVR device. The 299 rim strike is not the same as the 299F fire-rated strike.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin parts catalog by series and model with interactive diagrams on every model page. Navigate to the specific series, including the 98/99 Series, 22 Series, and 88 Series, use the diagram to confirm the failing component visually, and place the order with the correct part number for that specific model. Pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

For series-specific parts guides covering the most common rim exit device models, see:

For general panic hardware specification and compliance context, see the panic hardware guide for commercial doors.

Rim exit devices are the most common and most maintained egress hardware in commercial facilities. Monthly visual checks catch developing problems early. Quarterly fastener tightening and dry lubrication prevent the premature component wear that shortens device service life. Annual NFPA 80 inspections cover fire-rated assemblies with documentation retained for three years. The six failure conditions require immediate action when observed. ADA compliance extends to the door closer, not just the device. And every replacement parts order starts with the model number on the mechanism case before the catalog opens. Running this schedule consistently is what keeps rim exit devices compliant, functional, and documented across the full service life of the hardware.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts carries the complete Von Duprin rim exit device parts catalog across all active series, with same-day shipping on stocked components and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin Panic Bar Selection Guide: Which Series Fits Your Door and Application

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin panic bar selection guide starts with four decisions that eliminate most specification errors before a series number is considered: device format (rim, SVR, CVR, or mortise), stile width (wide or narrow), fire rating, and electrification requirement. Here is the short version for the most common applications:

  • Standard commercial, medium traffic: 22 Series (push pad, rim or SVR)
  • Standard commercial, Grade 1 full depth: 75 Series (push pad, rim/SVR/CVR)
  • Institutional, highest specification tier: 98/99 Series (push pad, all configurations, deepest electrified options)
  • Aluminum storefront, touchbar: 33A/35A Series (narrow-stile, 1-3/4 in. stile minimum)
  • Aluminum storefront, push pad: 78 Series (narrow-stile push pad)
  • Correctional or high-abuse: 88 Series (wide-stile crossbar, mechanical-only)
  • Concealed hardware required: 94/95 Series (CVR, rods inside door)

The full Von Duprin panic bar selection guide below covers each series in detail, explains the four pre-selection decisions, and provides a complete decision tree. For parts sourcing after selection, see the Von Duprin parts guide and the Von Duprin panic bar parts guide.

 

The Four Device Format Decisions That Come Before Series Selection

The Von Duprin panic bar lineup covers fourteen active series across push pad, touchbar, crossbar, and mortise configurations for single doors, paired doors, aluminum storefronts, correctional facilities, and every commercial application in between. Specifying the wrong series is not a cosmetic mistake. It produces a device that physically does not fit the door, fails code compliance on a fire-rated assembly, or creates an access control integration problem that does not surface until the opening is commissioned.

This Von Duprin panic bar selection guide matches every active series to the application it was engineered for, with the specific door requirements, stile width constraints, and selection criteria that determine which series is correct before the order is placed.

Choosing a Von Duprin series starts with four decisions that narrow the field immediately. Getting these right eliminates most specification errors before a series number is even considered.

 

Rim, SVR, CVR, or Mortise?

Rim devices latch at a single strike on the door frame, the simplest installation, suitable for single doors and pairs with a center mullion. Surface vertical rod (SVR) devices add a top rod engaging the frame header and a bottom rod engaging the floor, providing three-point engagement on double doors without a center post. Concealed vertical rod (CVR) devices run the same three-point engagement with the rod hardware inside the door, for applications where surface rods are architecturally unacceptable. Mortise devices integrate a full mortise lock body into the exit device chassis, providing the deepest security engagement at the door edge.

For a detailed explanation of how rim and SVR configurations differ at the hardware level, see the panic hardware guide for commercial doors.

 

Wide-Stile or Narrow-Stile?

Most commercial hollow metal doors use wide-stile devices. Aluminum storefronts and narrow-frame glass doors require narrow-stile devices with a minimum stile clearance as low as 1-3/4 inches. Using a wide-stile device on an aluminum storefront frame is a dimensional incompatibility: the fasteners run out of material before they engage. The series selection determines which stile width is supported.

 

Fire-Rated or Non-Fire-Rated?

Fire-rated configurations carry UL listing for fire door assemblies and remove the dogging function, because fire doors must latch automatically every time the door closes. Specifying a non-fire-rated device on a fire-rated opening fails the UL assembly listing. Specifying a fire-rated device on a non-fire-rated opening costs the dogging function unnecessarily. The "-F" suffix in the model number designates fire-rated configuration. For a complete reference on fire door hardware compliance, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Electrified or Mechanical-Only?

Von Duprin produces electrified upgrade options including quiet electric latch retraction (QEL), motorized electric latch retraction (MEL), Chexit delayed egress, and Allegion Connect integration. These are available on most push pad and touchbar series. The crossbar series (55 and 88) are mechanical-only by design. If access control integration is required at the device level, the series selection must support electrified options. For a direct comparison of QEL and MEL electrification, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide.

 

The Push Pad Series: Matching Traffic Level and Institutional Requirement

Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts for institutional panic bar selection guide

Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device. Browse 98/99 Series parts.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series: Medium-Traffic Commercial Applications

The 22 Series is the cost-effective Grade 1 specification for medium-traffic commercial openings where proven reliability is needed without institutional-level specification depth. Employee entrances, parking stairwells, back-of-house retail doors, and multi-family corridors are its primary applications. It carries ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification and UL listing for panic and fire hardware. Available in rim and SVR configurations. Electrified options include ALK alarm kits, QEL modular conversion, and MEL motorized latch retraction.

Select the 22 Series when the opening is not a primary institutional egress point and the specification does not require the full electrified options depth of the 98/99 Series. For 22 Series replacement parts and model-specific diagrams, see the Von Duprin 22 Series exit device parts guide.

 

Von Duprin 75 Series: Standard Commercial Grade 1

The 75 Series is the specification for standard commercial buildings: healthcare facilities, offices, and light institutional openings that require Grade 1 performance without the full institutional specification weight of the 98/99. Rim, SVR, and CVR configurations are available. Electrified options include ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, and Allegion Connect. The 75 Series sits between the 22 and 98/99 in specification depth and cost, covering the wide middle ground of commercial construction.

 

Von Duprin 98/99 Series: Institutional Flagship

The 98/99 Series is the dominant institutional specification across North America. Schools, hospitals, universities, government buildings, and any opening where ANSI Grade 1 performance at the highest specification depth is required. The 98 Series has a smooth mechanism case; the 99 has a grooved case. Every internal component is interchangeable between the two.

Configurations: rim (9827/9927), SVR (9827/9927), CVR (9847/9947), WDC (wide door cable), and the 9875/9975 mortise device. Electrified options are the deepest in the Von Duprin lineup: QEL, MEL, Chexit delayed egress, Allegion Connect, signal switches, and electric power transfers. A mechanical 98/99 device specified today can be upgraded to electrified access control years later without replacing the device body. That forward compatibility is why architects and security consultants default to this series on complex institutional projects.

Select the 98/99 when the opening requires the highest specification tier, when electrified integration is required now or anticipated in the future, or when the facility is an institutional building with a contract hardware specification calling for the flagship series. For government building applications where BAA compliance is required, see the commercial door hardware for government buildings guide. For 98/99 Series replacement parts, see the Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide.

 

The Touchbar Series: When the Full-Width Bar Changes the Function

Von Duprin 33/35A Series: Narrow-Stile Touchbar

The 33/35A Series is the touchbar device for aluminum storefronts and narrow-stile applications. The touchbar runs the full width of the door, engaging the release mechanism anywhere along its length, not just at a pad. The 35A has a smooth mechanism case; the 33A has a grooved case. Both fit door stiles as narrow as 1-3/4 inches, which is exactly the stile dimension of most aluminum storefront frames.

This is the series that resolves the most common specification error in commercial glass door hardware: attempting to install a 98/99 Series wide-stile device on an aluminum storefront frame. The 98/99 will not mount properly on a 1-3/4-inch aluminum stile. The 33A/35A is the narrow-stile sibling of the 98/99 family, engineered for that specific application. The 35A adds an integral door position switch.

Configurations cover rim, SVR, CVR, WDC, and the 360/E360 control trim variants. The electrified options catalog is second only to the 98/99 in depth, including Chexit, E7500 electrified mortise lock, pneumatic options, and Allegion Connect. Select the 33A/35A for aluminum storefronts, narrow-stile wood doors, or any application where a touchbar across the full door width is specified over a push pad.

 

The Crossbar Series: Heavy-Duty Mechanical Applications

Von Duprin crossbar series exit device parts for abuse resistant panic bar selection

Von Duprin crossbar series parts. Browse 88 Series parts.

 

Von Duprin 55 Series: Narrow-Stile Crossbar With Mortise Lock Body

The 55 Series is the narrow-stile crossbar device for applications requiring the visual and mechanical profile of a traditional crossbar with the security depth of a mortise lock body. It is constructed of cast brass or bronze plated to the specified finish, which gives it the aesthetic weight appropriate for historic renovations, ornate institutional lobbies, and architectural settings where a utilitarian push pad device would be out of place. The 7500 mortise lock body runs inside the chassis. Configurations include rim, CVR, and the 5575 mortise device.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series: Wide-Stile Crossbar for Abuse-Resistant Applications

The 88 Series is the heavy-duty wide-stile crossbar device for correctional facilities, behavioral health units, secure government floors, and any application where hardware faces sustained deliberate force. The crossbar has been in continuous production since the 1950s. It ships at 42 inches and is field-cut to door width. It is mechanical-only by design, with no electrified options at the device level. That is a deliberate engineering choice, not a limitation: in environments where electronic components can be targeted or defeated, mechanical robustness is the specification.

Configurations: rim (88/88-F), SVR (8827/8827-F), CVR (8847-F), and mortise (8875/8875-F). Fire-rated versions carry a 3-hour UL listing. The 88 Series is the answer when the application is institutional, the hardware will face abuse, and electrified options are neither required nor appropriate. For a detailed 88 Series specification and parts reference, see the Von Duprin 88 Series buyers guide.

 

The Narrow-Stile Push Pad Series

Von Duprin 78 Series: Aluminum Frame and Glass Storefront Push Pad

The 78 Series is the narrow-stile push pad device specifically engineered for aluminum-frame and all-glass storefront doors with stile widths as narrow as 1-3/4 inches. It is the push pad equivalent of the 33A/35A touchbar: the correct specification when a push pad format is required on a glass storefront door rather than a touchbar. Configurations include rim, SVR, CVR, and WDC. Electrified options include ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, and Allegion Connect. Parts from standard wide-stile series do not cross to the 78 Series.

If the opening is an aluminum storefront door and the specification calls for a push pad rather than a touchbar, the 78 Series is the correct selection.

 

The Mortise and Concealed Series

Von Duprin 94/95 Series: Concealed Vertical Rod for Aesthetic Applications

The 94/95 Series is the CVR device for applications where surface-mounted rods are not architecturally acceptable and the hardware must disappear inside the door. Hotels, premium healthcare interiors, high-end commercial spaces. Configurations cover the 94/9547 CVR device and the 9575 mortise device. Electrified options include the E7500 electrified mortise lock and QEL.

The CVR rods in the 9847 and 9947 configurations run inside the door stile, entirely out of sight. For 94/95 Series parts and model-specific diagrams, see the Von Duprin 94/95 Series exit device parts guide and the Von Duprin 9847 CVR exit device parts guide.

 

The Double Door Decision: When to Add a Mullion

On double door openings without a center post, the SVR configuration from the appropriate series handles three-point engagement at the header and floor. On openings where a center post is acceptable, the 54 Series Mullion provides the center strike point, allowing one leaf to run a rim device and the other to run an SVR, which is a cost-saving specification on some applications.

The 1609 strike is used specifically on double door applications without a center post, when one leaf uses an SVR and the other uses a rim device. The 1609 is not rated for fire doors, which matters on interior corridor specifications where fire rating is required. For compliance considerations on fire-rated double door assemblies, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Von Duprin Series Comparison: Quick-Reference Selection Table

SeriesTypeStileConfigurationsElectrifiedPrimary Application
22 SeriesPush padWideRim, SVRQEL, MEL, ALKMedium-traffic commercial
75 SeriesPush padWideRim, SVR, CVRQEL, MEL, ALK, ConnectStandard commercial Grade 1
98/99 SeriesPush padWideRim, SVR, CVR, WDC, MortiseQEL, MEL, Chexit, Connect, EPTInstitutional flagship
33/35A SeriesTouchbarNarrow (1-3/4 in.)Rim, SVR, CVR, WDCChexit, E7500, ConnectAluminum storefront, touchbar
55 SeriesCrossbarNarrowRim, CVR, MortiseNoneHistoric/aesthetic applications
88 SeriesCrossbarWideRim, SVR, CVR, MortiseNone (mechanical-only)Correctional, high-abuse
78 SeriesPush padNarrow (1-3/4 in.)Rim, SVR, CVR, WDCQEL, MEL, ALK, ConnectAluminum storefront, push pad
94/95 SeriesPush padWideCVR, MortiseQEL, E7500Concealed hardware, aesthetic

 

The Complete Selection Decision Tree

Here is the framework that resolves most Von Duprin panic bar selection decisions:

  1. Is the door an aluminum storefront or narrow-stile frame?
    Yes: 33A/35A (touchbar), 78 Series (push pad), or 55 Series (crossbar). No: continue below.
  2. Is the application correctional, behavioral health, or high-abuse?
    Yes: 88 Series (wide-stile crossbar, mechanical-only). No: continue below.
  3. Is access control integration required now or anticipated?
    Yes: 98/99 Series (deepest electrified options). No: continue below.
  4. Is this a high-traffic institutional building?
    Yes: 98/99 Series. Standard commercial, moderate traffic: 75 Series. Medium traffic, cost-sensitive: 22 Series.
  5. Does the opening require concealed hardware?
    Yes: 94/95 Series CVR, or CVR configuration within the appropriate series above.

For a full side-by-side comparison of all Von Duprin series including model number cross-reference, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison. For access control integration planning across series, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide. For Division 8 specification compliance, see the how to specify commercial door hardware guide.

 

Source Von Duprin Panic Bar Parts at Security Parts

Von Duprin panic bar selection guide exit devices catalog at Security Parts

Von Duprin exit devices at Security Parts. Browse the full Von Duprin catalog.

 

Every series selection above has consequences for parts sourcing that compound over the device's service life. A 78 Series part will not fit a 33A/35A. An 88 Series center case kit does not cross to the 22 Series. Confirming the series at specification time is what makes every maintenance, repair, and upgrade decision for the life of the opening accurate.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin exit devices catalog by series and model, with interactive parts diagrams on every model page. The Von Duprin brand catalog covers all fourteen series with model-specific parts organization and same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301 for specification questions before an order is placed.

For complete Von Duprin parts coverage by series, see the Von Duprin parts guide, the Von Duprin panic bar parts guide, and the exit device series comparison. For QEL conversion kits and electrified upgrade planning, see the Von Duprin QEL conversion kit guide. For ANSI/BHMA grading standards relevant to exit device specification, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

The Von Duprin series lineup spans every commercial egress application from a standard office entry to an aluminum glass storefront to an institutional correctional facility. The 22, 75, and 98/99 Series cover the push pad spectrum from medium-traffic commercial through heavy institutional. The 33A/35A and 78 Series cover narrow-stile aluminum and glass doors in touchbar and push pad formats. The 55 and 88 Series cover crossbar applications in narrow-stile aesthetic and wide-stile abuse-resistant configurations. The 94/95 Series covers concealed vertical rod applications where surface rods are unacceptable.

Every series selection determines parts compatibility, electrified upgrade paths, and fire rating eligibility for the life of the opening. Start at the door type, confirm the stile width, determine the traffic and security tier, and the Von Duprin panic bar selection follows logically. Browse the complete Von Duprin series catalog with model-specific parts diagrams at Security Parts.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, access control integrators, and specifiers since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full Von Duprin exit device catalog across all fourteen active series, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order specification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin Panic Bar Parts: How to Identify What You Need and Order It Right

Quick Answer

Von Duprin panic bar parts are series-specific and in many cases generation-specific within the same series. Before ordering any component, confirm four things:

  • Series: Find the model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate. The first two to four digits identify the series (22, 33A, 55, 75, 78, 88, 94/95, 98/99).
  • Configuration: Rim, SVR (surface vertical rod), CVR (concealed vertical rod), WDC (wide door cable), or mortise. Parts differ by configuration even within the same series.
  • Manufacturing date: Dogging assembly parts differ for devices made before vs after July 1997.
  • Trim function: Center case kits are trim-function-specific. EO, NL, lever, and thumbpiece trim each use a different case.

Security Parts carries the full Von Duprin parts catalog organized by series and model with interactive diagrams. Call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

 

Why Von Duprin Panic Bar Parts Are Series-Specific, Not Universal

The most common ordering mistake on Von Duprin panic bar parts is skipping the model identification step and searching by component name alone. A dogging assembly for the 22 Series is not the same as one for the 88 Series. A center case kit for the 98/99 rim device is a different part from the center case kit for the 98/9947 CVR configuration. Von Duprin's exit device catalog covers fourteen active series, each with its own parts tree. Before any component goes into a cart, the series and device configuration on the door need to be confirmed. This guide covers how to do that, what the high-turnover component categories are, and which specific parts apply to which device.

Von Duprin has manufactured panic exit hardware since 1908. That century-plus of production created a lineup covering institutional buildings, correctional facilities, glass storefronts, healthcare campuses, and standard commercial construction, each engineered to different dimensional standards. Component compatibility is tied to the series and configuration within the series, not to a general component category.

  • The 22 Series is the mid-range commercial Grade 1 specification for employee entrances and mid-traffic openings.
  • The 98/99 Series is the institutional flagship with the deepest electrified options catalog, covering rim, SVR, CVR, WDC, and mortise configurations.
  • The 88 Series is the heavy-duty mechanical-only device for correctional and behavioral health environments.
  • The 78 Series is the narrow-stile unit for aluminum-frame and glass storefront doors.

Every series was built to its own dimensional and mechanical standard. Parts do not cross between them.

One important distinction that prevents ordering errors: the 98 Series has a smooth mechanism case and the 99 Series has a grooved case, but their internal components are fully interchangeable. A center case kit or dogging assembly that fits a 98 fits a 99 without modification. For a full comparison of how the 98/99 differs across configurations, see the 98/99 Series exit device parts guide.

For a broader look at how all Von Duprin series compare by application, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison and the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

The Five Component Categories That Cover Most Von Duprin Panic Bar Repairs

Across all active Von Duprin series, five component categories account for the majority of replacement part orders. Understanding what each category covers and how it varies by series prevents the wrong-part order before it happens.

 

Dogging Assemblies

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft package for 22 33A 35A 98 99 series panic bar parts

Von Duprin 090040 hex dogging shaft. View product page and order.

 

Dogging holds the push bar in the depressed position, keeping the latch bolt retracted. On push pad devices (22, 33A, 35A, 98, 99 series), dogging uses a 1/4-inch hex key. The crossbar devices in the 55 and 88 Series use a 5/32-inch hex key.

For 22/33/98/99 devices manufactured after July 1997, the relevant parts are:

  • 090040 dogging shaft: The piece the hex key inserts into. The shaft requires the long version of the hex key because the hole depth is only about 1/4 inch. Using a short key rounds out the hex over time, which is the most common dogging failure in the field.
  • 090042 dogging adapter spring: Clips the shaft into the assembly.
  • 090043 dogging adapter: The housing the shaft and spring fit through.
  • 090044 dogging hook: Grabs the push bar mechanism and holds the dogged position, used on 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 devices made after 1997.

For devices shipped before July 1997, the old-style dogging shaft has a different dimensional profile (approximately 1-1/2 inches long by 1/2 inch diameter). The 050709 dogging assembly is the retrofit kit that updates pre-1997 devices to current spec.

 

Center Case Kits and Mechanism Cases

Von Duprin 050021 center case kit for 98/99 Series rim panic bar replacement parts

Von Duprin 050021 center case kit, less cover. View product page and order.

 

The center case is the primary mechanical housing of the device. Center case specs differ by trim function within the same series, which is where most wrong-part orders originate.

  • On the 98/99 rim devices, the 050021 center case replaces all earlier versions of the 9827 and 9927 center cases.
  • For the 98/9975 mortise configuration, the 050023 center case kit applies specifically to the 9875 and 9975 panic and fire-rated hardware.
  • On the 88 Series rim device, the 050409 active case applies to EO, DT, and NL trim functions only. Lever, knob, and thumbpiece trim functions each use a different case.

Confirming the trim function before ordering the center case is mandatory. Ordering the wrong specification produces a part that physically fits the device body but does not engage the trim correctly.

 

Push Bar, Crossbar, and Latch Return Components

Von Duprin 090039 baseplate latch return spring for 22 33A 35A 98 99 series panic bar parts

Von Duprin 090039 baseplate latch return spring, pack of 10. View product page and order.

 

The 090039 baseplate latch return spring (2-1/4 inches long, 3/8-inch diameter) is used across 22, 33A, 35A, 98, and 99 devices and is one of the highest-turnover mechanical components on high-cycle commercial openings. It controls latch return after the push bar is released.

The 090049 push bar end guide fits the end of the push bar assembly on 33A and 98/99 devices, reducing noise and friction. It is frequently overlooked until noise or erratic bar movement appears.

On 88 Series crossbar devices, the crossbar ships at 42 inches and is cut to door width in the field. Crossbar tube attaching wedges (090020) and rings (090021) secure the crossbar to the device body. Wedgetite screws (090008) and dog screws (090004) are the highest-turnover fastener components on abuse-resistant institutional openings. For more on 88 Series component specifications, see the Von Duprin 88 Series buyer's guide.

 

Vertical Rod and Latch Hardware

Surface vertical rod (SVR) configurations on the 9827, 9927, 8827, and 2227 models require door-height-specific rod kits. Top rod kits for 6'8" to 8'4" doors use the 050575 adjustable bottom rod on 9947 configurations. Confirm door height before ordering any rod kit because SVR rod kits do not cross between height ranges.

CVR (concealed vertical rod) configurations on the 9847, 9947, 8847, and 2247 models use separate rod and latch hardware from their SVR counterparts. The rod kit for a CVR configuration is not the same as the rod kit for an SVR configuration on the same series. Confirm device type (SVR vs CVR) before ordering any vertical rod component. For detailed 94/95 Series vertical rod and latch part coverage, see the 94/95 Series exit device parts guide.

 

Strikes

Von Duprin 299 rim strike standard for 22 88 98 99 series panic bar non-fire-rated applications

Von Duprin 299 rim strike. View product page and order.

 

Strike selection depends entirely on the device configuration and fire rating status. These are the specific strikes most commonly ordered:

PartTypeApplies ToNotes
299Standard rim strikeNon-fire-rated rim devices1-1/4" wide x 2-7/8" high; 2-1/8" hole spacing
299FFire-rated rim strikeFire-rated 22, 88, 98, and 99 devicesSame dimensions as 299; 13/16" roller projection
304LStandard SVR bottom strike2227, 8827, 9827, 9927 SVR configurations1-7/8" x 1-7/8" outer dimension; floor mounted
248L-4Panic-rated SVR bottom strike2227, 8827, 9827, 9927 SVR panic applications9/16" wide x 2-1/2" high; 1-7/8" hole spacing; required on panic hardware

The 304L and 248L-4 are not interchangeable. The 248L-4 is the panic-rated version and is required on panic hardware applications. For fire door compliance considerations when specifying strikes on rated assemblies, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

How to Read a Von Duprin Model Number Before You Order

The model number is stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate, visible without disassembling the device. The first two or four digits identify the series. Numbers following the series designate the configuration and trim function.

SuffixMeaning
EOExit only
NLNight latch
LLever trim
BEBlank escutcheon
-FFire-rated configuration (removes dogging function)
ELElectric latch retraction
QELModular electric latch retraction (field-installable)
MELMotorized electric latch retraction

Reading this correctly before opening the parts catalog is the single action that prevents the center case mismatch, the wrong strike, and the dogging assembly ordered for the wrong generation of device. For a detailed breakdown of what each model number position means across all active series, see the Von Duprin parts guide.

For QEL and MEL electrified options on the 22 and 98/99 series, see the Von Duprin QEL vs MEL guide and the QEL conversion kit parts guide.

 

Von Duprin Panic Bar Parts Availability by Series at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin lineup by series and model, with interactive diagrams on every model page. The interactive diagram on each model page shows the full assembly. Clicking on a component in the diagram confirms the part number before anything goes to the cart. This is what prevents the wrong center case specification from shipping on a device where the trim function was not confirmed at order time.

SeriesKey Parts Available
98/99 SeriesCenter case kits, dogging assemblies, baseplate hardware, fire kits, electrified options
22 SeriesCenter case kits, dogging assemblies, SVR rod and latch hardware, QEL modular conversion
88 SeriesCrossbar hardware, lever arm kits, axle security pins, dog screws, vertical rod kits
33/35A SeriesLever arm kits, cables, EL solenoid assemblies, fire latch hardware
55 Series7500 mortise lock components, crossbars, soffit latch assemblies
75 SeriesCenter case kits, center case reinforcing brackets, dogging components
78 SeriesNarrow-stile specific center case, baseplate, and cover plate hardware
94/95 SeriesLatch retrofit kits, adjustable extension rod kits, ratchet release assemblies

Security Parts has been operating in commercial door hardware since 2001 and carries both current-generation and legacy parts. A device installed in 1991 may use old-style dogging components. A device installed in 2015 uses current-generation specifications. The catalog covers both without requiring a separate sourcing path. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301.

For panic hardware specification in commercial construction projects, see the panic hardware guide for commercial doors. For a full reference on ANSI/BHMA grading standards relevant to exit device specification, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

Von Duprin panic bar parts are series-specific and in many cases generation-specific within the same series. The 1997 manufacturing cutoff matters for dogging assemblies. The trim function matters for center case kits. The device configuration and fire rating status determine which strike applies. Reading the model number stamped on the mechanism case before opening the catalog is the step that makes everything downstream accurate.

Navigate to the correct series page at the Von Duprin parts catalog, use the interactive model diagram to confirm the component, and place the order from the model-specific parts list. Same-day shipping on stocked components from US warehouses. Pre-order support at 845-935-0301 when compatibility needs confirming before the order commits.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facilities managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks the full Von Duprin exit device parts catalog across all active series, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Schlage L9580: The Storeroom Mortise Lock with Motorized Latch Retraction Explained

Quick Answer

The Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction is a Grade 1 storeroom mortise lock that retracts its latchbolt on a 24V DC signal, releasing the door without requiring a key or lever press. Four things to know before specifying or ordering:

  • Voltage: 24V DC only. 12V will not actuate it. AC will damage the motor.
  • Fail mode: Latch-retraction-only, not switchable. No power equals latch extended and door secured.
  • Retrofit: Fits the standard L9000 mortise pocket with no frame modification required.
  • Monitor options: Available with RX (request to exit), LX (latchbolt monitor), or both.

Security Parts stocks the Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis with RX, with same-day shipping on stocked components. Call 845-935-0301 for LX or combined configurations.

 

What the Schlage L9580 Does

The Schlage L9580 is a Grade 1 mortise lock from Allegion's L Series running the storeroom function with motorized latch retraction (MLR), single outside cylinder, and 24V DC operation. The L9580 was released for access-controlled commercial openings where the door has to release on signal without anyone touching the lever. Auto operators, card readers, push-button stations, infection-control corridors, K-12 visitor entries, accessible restrooms. That's the role.

What spec sheets skip is when this lock actually beats an electric strike or a mechanical L9080, and when it doesn't. Here's the working breakdown from a commercial hardware sourcing perspective.

The L9580 runs the storeroom function: outside lever stays fixed (key-only entry from outside), inside lever is always free for egress. Standard institutional configuration for IT rooms, supply closets, mechanical rooms, and access-controlled service corridors.

Motorized latch retraction adds one capability on top of the mechanical storeroom: a 24V DC signal to the chassis tells an internal motor to retract the latchbolt. The door becomes pushable without anyone using the lever or key. When the signal stops, the latch springs back out. The lock secures itself the next time the door closes.

The unit also includes a deadlocking auxiliary latch, so the main latch can't be retracted by a credit-card shim once the door is closed. That's a Grade 1 physical security detail you don't get on lighter electrified hardware.

Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis with LX latchbolt monitor switch for L Series mortise lock

Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis with LX. View product page and order.

 

Where the Schlage L9580 Fits in the L Series Family

Allegion's MLR line splits into two groups. Latch-retraction-only: L9510 (passage), L9580 (storeroom), L9582 (institution). Latch-retraction-plus-lever-control: L9692EL/EU, L9695EL/EU, L9696EL/EU.

The L9580 sits in the first group. It retracts the latch on signal but doesn't electrify the lever itself. If your project needs the lever to lock or unlock electronically, you want the L9692/95/96 line instead. See the Schlage L9692EU motorized latch retraction guide for that specification path.

The L9580 shares chassis dimensions with the broader Schlage L Series mortise lock platform, which means it retrofits the same mortise pocket as a mechanical L9080. Frame stays intact. Wiring runs through the door. That's the structural reason this lock often wins over an electric strike on renovation work.

Trim, finish, lever style, and keyway options carry across the entire L Series. Standard keyway is patented Everest 29 S123, with Primus available for upgraded geographic exclusivity. For a full reference on Schlage key systems including Primus and construction keying, see the Schlage key systems guide. Cylinder formats include FSIC, SFIC, conventional, and less-cylinder. The L9580 is available in 12 finishes: 605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 622, 625, 626, 629, 630, and 643e.

 

L9580 Certifications and Standards

The L9580 carries the following certifications relevant to commercial specification:

  • ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1: operational and security rating for mortise locks
  • UL 10C: positive pressure fire test; UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies
  • UL 294: access control system performance (Destructive Attack Level 1, Line Security Level 1, Standby Power Level 1, Endurance Level IV with RX; Endurance Level I with LX)
  • UL 437: when ordered with a UL 437 Primus cylinder
  • ICC A117.1: complies with Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities standard
  • BAA compliant: all functions meet Buy American Act requirements for government projects
  • California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) listed
  • Miami-Dade NOA and Florida Building Commission listings for impact and non-impact applications

For a full reference on how ANSI/BHMA grades apply to commercial door hardware specification, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide. For fire door compliance requirements affecting UL 10C installation, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Allegion Connect Wiring System

The Schlage L9580 ships with Allegion Connect, a factory-installed Molex connector system that simplifies installation and field maintenance. All electrical connections at the chassis use factory-installed Molex connectors rather than terminal block or wire-nut field connections. Field wiring connects to the chassis via the matching Molex connector at the installation point.

When servicing the chassis, the connector unplugs cleanly without cutting wires. This eliminates the wire re-termination step that causes most installation-error callbacks on electrified mortise locks. The CON-KIT provides field replacement connectors and terminals for maintenance situations where the connector itself is damaged.

As an alternative to Allegion Connect, the Molex connector may be cut off and the lock installed with traditional wire splicing methods. A 6-inch wiring harness is included with the chassis for situations where additional wire length is needed at the connection point.

For the broader integration of electrified mortise locks into a commercial access control system, see the access control integration guide.

 

Electrical Specifications That Determine Power Supply Sizing

24V DC only. Not 12V, not multi-voltage, not AC. A 12V panel won't actuate it. AC will damage the motor.

Peak current draws roughly 1.4 amps at the moment of latch retraction, then drops to around 0.1 amps holding current while the latch stays retracted. Sizing matters on multi-lock circuits: two L9580s firing simultaneously can pull close to 3 amps for a fraction of a second, even though average draw stays under one. UL 294 certified access control power supplies handle this if specified properly.

Critical install warning that most distributors skip: don't share a circuit with solenoid-based devices unless transient voltage is suppressed. Solenoids generate voltage spikes when they de-energize, and those spikes damage the L9580 motor. Schlage's installation document specifies a varistor rated at 35V (peak recurrent) installed at the equipment producing the transient. Leave it out, and the motor fails inside a year.

 

Fail-Safe vs Fail-Secure: How the Schlage L9580 Motorized Latch Retraction Operates

Most electrified L Series locks have a field-selectable fail-safe / fail-secure switch in the chassis. The L9580, L9510, and L9582 do not. They're latch-retraction-only and operate in a single mode: powered means latch retracted, no power means latch extended.

Functionally that's similar to fail-secure (loss of power equals locked). But it's not switchable. If the application requires fail-safe behavior under code (some egress doors, certain stairwells, specific assembly occupancies), the L9580 is the wrong function. A lever-control variant from the same family covers that case.

The underlying L Series chassis is UL listed for 3-hour fire door assemblies under UL 10C, which makes the L9580 appropriate for fire-rated openings under NFPA 80 inspection requirements. For storeroom function codes across the broader L Series, see the commercial lock function codes guide.

 

When the Schlage L9580 Beats an Electric Strike

Three reasons it usually wins on commercial buildings:

  • Frame integrity. An electric strike installation requires the frame to be cut and routed for the strike body. On older hollow metal frames, particularly fire-rated assemblies, that cut can be prohibited or compromise the rating. The L9580 retrofits the existing L9000 mortise pocket without touching the frame.
  • Security depth. An electric strike releases the keeper, but the latch on the lock stays extended. That works for most applications. On doors that face attempted forced entry, an L9580 with a one-piece mortise body and deadlocking auxiliary latch is structurally tougher than a strike plate cut into a frame.
  • Aesthetics. Electric strikes show a visible faceplate in the frame. The L9580 looks identical to a mechanical L9080 from the outside. Healthcare interiors, hospitality, and high-end commercial often spec mortise hardware specifically for the visual continuity.

Where electric strikes still make sense: simple retrofits where the existing mechanical lock is being kept and only access control is being added, and applications using cylindrical hardware on the door instead of mortise. For a detailed side-by-side comparison, see the dedicated Schlage L9580 vs electric strike guide and the broader electrified mortise lock vs electric strike guide. For electric strike parts and specifications, see the electric strike parts guide.

 

When a Mechanical L9080 Storeroom Wins Instead

Three scenarios point at L9080 over L9580:

  • No access control planned now or later. The MLR premium only pays back when something actually signals the lock. A storeroom that always operates by key doesn't need it.
  • No power available at the door. Running 24V DC to an opening that doesn't have it is a real install cost. If the electrical contractor isn't already on site, that wiring run can outweigh the savings of avoiding an electric strike.
  • Power instability. Older facilities or those without backup on access control circuits will see the L9580 cycle in and out of operability through the day. A mechanical L9080 is immune to that.

 

RX vs LX: Which Monitor Option Fits Your Access Control System

The L9580 takes two optional switches.

RX (request to exit) closes when the inside lever rotates, telling the access control panel that someone is exiting legitimately. Suppresses forced-entry alarms and logs valid exits. Most access control systems integrating with L9580 storerooms want RX. The RX switch is rated at 2A at 30V DC and is modular, meaning it can be added to the chassis in the field without opening the lock case.

LX (latchbolt monitor) signals whether the latchbolt is extended or retracted at any moment. Tells the panel whether the door is actually latched, not just closed. Specified for high-security openings where door position switch (DPS) data alone isn't enough. The LX switch is also rated at 2A at 30V DC. With LX installed, the UL 294 rating becomes Endurance Level I (vs Level IV without LX).

Both can be ordered together. Security Parts stocks the L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis with RX as the primary configuration. Call 845-935-0301 for LX-only or RX-plus-LX availability.

 

Install Mistakes That Damage the Schlage L9580

Three field errors cause most L9580 failures inside the first year:

  1. Sharing a circuit with solenoid hardware without a 35V varistor for transient voltage suppression. This is the single biggest cause of premature motor failure. Solenoids generate voltage spikes when they de-energize, and those spikes damage the L9580 motor. The varistor must be rated at 35V peak recurrent and installed at the equipment producing the transient, not at the lock.
  2. Wrong voltage at the lock terminals. 24V DC, correct polarity, no AC component. Multi-voltage panels feeding 12V to the lock won't actuate it, and the unit gets returned as defective when nothing was wrong.
  3. Improper coordination with panic hardware on the same door. UL listing requires the L9580 to be installed so it doesn't interfere with exit device operation. On openings with both, mount them so they operate independently. The commercial exit device parts guide covers panic hardware specification if both are being sourced together.

 

How to Source the Right Schlage L9580 Configuration

Every L9580 order needs five specifications confirmed before the order ships:

SpecificationOptions / Notes
Trim and lever style33 lever designs; knurled tactile warning available on select levers for ADA-compliant applications
Cylinder optionP, L, B, BD, R, F, T (or less cylinder if no keyed entry required)
Finish605, 606, 609, 612, 613, 619, 622, 625, 626, 629, 630, 643e
Door thicknessStandard 1-3/4". Doors over 1-3/4" require position code (EE, EI, EO, ED) and thickness specification. Fits up to 4" thick doors.
Monitor optionRX (request to exit), LX (latchbolt monitor), or both. Handing is field-reversible and does not need to be specified at order.

For new spec, start at the L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis page and build the configuration up from there. For replacements, pull the model number and trim code off the existing lock face and match the same chassis variant.

The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams guide covers component-level sourcing if a single part (lever, escutcheon, cylinder) is what failed instead of the full chassis. For a broader look at L Series mortise lock parts, see the Schlage L Series mortise lock parts guide.

For LX-only configurations, less common finishes, or extended door thickness specifications, call 845-935-0301 to verify availability before placing the order.

For Division 8 specification of the L9580 in construction documents, see the commercial door hardware Division 8 specification guide. For a full catalog of Schlage commercial hardware parts organized by series, see the Schlage commercial hardware parts catalog and the L Series parts catalog. For mortise lock replacement parts and electric strike parts, browse those category pages directly.


The Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction does one job well: it gives a Grade 1 mortise storeroom lock the ability to release on signal without compromising security or appearance. That's the right call on retrofits where the frame can't be cut, on healthcare and clean-room openings where quiet operation matters, and on access-controlled commercial buildings where mortise hardware needs to last twenty years.

Source it as a complete configuration. Confirm chassis, trim, finish, monitor option, and door thickness before the order ships. Security Parts has stocked Schlage commercial hardware since 2001. The team is reachable for spec verification at 845-935-0301. Two minutes on the phone prevents the wrong-configuration return cycle on a project that probably doesn't have those days to spare.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and access control integrators since 2001. Security Parts stocks Schlage L Series hardware including the L9580 motorized latch retraction chassis, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 88 Series: How to Choose the Right Configuration for Your Commercial Opening

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 88 Series is a wide-stile crossbar exit device available in four configurations. Use this summary to find your opening type quickly:

  • Single door to a fixed frame: 88 Rim or 88-F (fire-rated)
  • Double door pair, surface rods: 8827 or 8827-F SVR
  • Double door pair, concealed rods: 8847-F CVR (fire-rated only)
  • Single or double door with mortise lock security: 8875 or 8875-F

The 88 Series is ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certified, tested to 2 million cycles, and carries a 3-hour UL fire rating on fire-rated configurations. It is a mechanical-only device with no motor-driven latch retraction. The RX crossbar monitor switch and E electric unlocking option (mortise only) are available as accessories.

For a full model-by-model parts breakdown, see the Von Duprin 88 Series catalog. For a complete overview of where the 88 Series fits within the Von Duprin product family, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

What Sets the Von Duprin 88 Series Apart Before You Pick a Configuration

The Von Duprin 88 Series is a wide-stile crossbar exit device that has been in continuous institutional use since the 1950s. It carries ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification, which means it is tested to 2 million open and close cycles at rated performance. Every configuration in the series is UL listed for accident hazard installations, and fire-rated versions carry a 3-hour UL fire resistance listing. It runs in four distinct configurations covering rim, surface vertical rod, concealed vertical rod, and mortise applications across single doors, paired doors, and openings where the rod hardware must be concealed inside the door. Choosing the wrong configuration is the most common ordering mistake on this device.

The 88 Series is the wide-stile version of Von Duprin's crossbar line. Its counterpart, the 55 Series, handles narrow-stile applications. The practical distinction is stile width. The 88 Series fits door stiles requiring wide-stile mounting, while the 55 handles narrower stile profiles. Parts do not cross between them. If you are working on a wide-stile opening and your application calls for a crossbar device over a push pad, you are in the 88 Series catalog.

What makes this series specifically different from the push-pad-dominated 98/99 Series is its lever-arm mechanism. The crossbar drives a simple, heavy lever-arm action to operate the latch, rather than the sliding mechanism used on push pad devices. Fewer moving parts across a mechanically robust assembly is why the 88 Series gets specified in correctional facilities, behavioral health units, historic renovations, and oversized institutional openings where the hardware faces sustained physical force and motor-driven electrified options are neither required nor desirable. For a direct comparison of the 88 Series against other Von Duprin exit device families, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series 050004 standard 42-inch crossbar kit for 4-foot wide-stile exit devices

Von Duprin 050004 standard 42-inch crossbar kit for 4-foot 88 Series devices. View product page.

 

The device ships field reversible with a 42-inch crossbar that is field-sizeable, meaning it cuts to exact door width on site. It is not handed from the factory. One unit services either a left-hand or right-hand opening, which eliminates stocking two separate versions on projects with mixed door swings.

 

88 Series Options and Accessories Available Across Configurations

Before selecting a configuration, it helps to understand the options available site-wide across the 88 Series:

  • RX: Crossbar Monitor Switch. A crossbar-mounted SPDT switch that signals when the push bar is depressed. Used to monitor door use or integrate with access control systems. Available on all configurations.
  • KN: Knurled Crossbar. Knurling on the crossbar provides a tactile warning to indicate doors leading to hazardous areas such as stairwells, loading platforms, and boiler rooms. Available on all configurations.
  • E: Electric Unlocking. Allows outside lever operation to be controlled by an access control system, fire alarm, or remote switching station. Available on 8875 mortise configurations with BE trim only.
  • HW / HH: Hurricane Rated. HW is wind-only rated; HH is wind and impact rated. Available where hurricane-resistant egress hardware is required by local code.

For a full discussion of how the 88 Series fits into a broader commercial egress hardware specification, see the panic hardware guide for commercial doors and the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Matching the Right Von Duprin 88 Series Configuration to Your Opening

Single Door to a Fixed Frame: 88 Rim or 88-F Rim

Von Duprin 88 Series 1609 rim strike for single door egress installations

Von Duprin 1609 rim strike for 88 Series rim device installations. View product page.

 

The rim device is the most widely installed configuration in the Von Duprin 88 Series. It mounts on the egress surface of a single active door and latches at the frame-side rim strike. It ships with the 299 strike standard. Non-fire-rated devices use 5/32-inch hex key dogging. Fire-rated 88-F devices remove the dogging function because a fire-rated assembly must latch positively every time the door closes.

Available finishes include US26, US26D, US3, US4, US10B, US10, and SPBLK. The rim device covers stock hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 hollow metal door cutouts. If the application is a standard single door egress point and the opening is not a double door pair, this is the correct model.

For fire door compliance context on rim device selection, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Double Door Pair Without a Center Post: 8827 or 8827-F Surface Vertical Rod

Von Duprin 304L vertical rod bottom strike for 8827 SVR surface vertical rod exit devices

Von Duprin 304L vertical rod bottom strike, standard for 8827 SVR devices. View product page.

 

The 8827 Series is the surface vertical rod (SVR) configuration for double door openings without a center mullion. The top rod engages a strike at the frame header, the bottom rod engages the floor or threshold, providing three-point latching across the door height. It fits door stiles as narrow as 3-1/2 inches on the standard version. The fire-rated 8827-F fits stiles as narrow as 3-3/4 inches (95mm) and carries the 3-hour UL fire rating required for fire door assemblies. The 8827-F ships with the standard 304L strike and all mounting fasteners.

One installation point that affects parts ordering: the fire-rated and non-fire-rated SVR versions use different top latch assemblies. The 8827-F requires the plunger release bracket (107765) to function correctly. Ordering the non-fire-rated center case for a fire-rated SVR device is the most common wrong-part error on this configuration.

If the 8827 SVR is used on doors taller than 7 feet, extension rods must be ordered separately at the time of the device order. Confirm door height before specifying. The Pullman latch option is also available on 8827 non-fire-rated devices when latchbolts must remain extended at all times, typically used in combination with an electric strike on less-bottom-rod applications.

For parts diagrams and model-level ordering on 8827 and 8827-F devices, see the Von Duprin 75/78/88/94/95 Series parts guide.

 

Double Door Pair With Concealed Rods: 8847-F Concealed Vertical Rod

Von Duprin 301L fire-rated vertical rod bottom strike for 8847-F concealed vertical rod device

Von Duprin 301L fire-rated vertical rod bottom strike, standard for 8847-F CVR devices. View product page.

 

The 8847-F is the fire-rated concealed vertical rod (CVR) configuration. The rod hardware routes inside the door rather than running on the surface. It is specified when surface-mounted rods are architecturally unacceptable but a wide-stile crossbar device is still required. Hotels, healthcare interiors, and high-end office applications where the egress hardware needs to disappear into the door profile are the typical specification points. It fits door stiles as narrow as 4-3/4 inches (121mm) and ships with the 301L strike. This configuration is available fire-rated only.

Note that the 8847-F fits double metal doors up to 8 feet by 8 feet (2,438mm by 2,438mm). For doors taller than 7 feet, extension rods must be ordered. Also note that 8827-F uses the 377T trim, while 8847-F uses the 376T trim. These trim series are not interchangeable.

 

High-Security Single or Double Door With Mortise Lock Body: 8875 or 8875-F Mortise

The 8875 is the mortise device configuration, integrating the Von Duprin 7500 mortise lock body into the 88 Series chassis. It is specified when the opening requires the security depth of a full mortise lock combined with code-compliant panic egress. The 7500 body has been the Von Duprin standard mortise body since approximately 1977 and measures 5-7/8 inches high by 4-1/2 inches deep by 1 inch thick.

The same body is used in the 98/9975 mortise device, so if the facility is already maintaining 98/99 Series mortise devices, the lock body components are consistent across both series. The 8875 also supports the E electric unlocking option for outside lever operation, making it the only 88 Series configuration with any form of outside electrical integration.

For paired door 8875 installations, the Von Duprin 575-2 mortise lock strike is required for the center meeting stile on 1-3/4-inch wood door pairs. See that guide to confirm the correct strike specification before ordering. For a full mortise lock context, see the commercial mortise locks guide.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Configuration Quick Reference

ConfigurationModelsDoor TypeMin StileStandard StrikeFire Rating
Rim88, 88-FSingle door, fixed frame86 or 161 cutout299 strike88-F: 3-hour UL
SVR8827, 8827-FDouble door, no center post3-1/2" (3-3/4" fire)304L strike8827-F: 3-hour UL
CVR8847-FDouble door, concealed rods4-3/4"301L strikeFire-rated only
Mortise8875, 8875-FSingle or double doorWide stile7500 lock body8875-F: 3-hour UL

 

Trim and Outside Hardware for the Von Duprin 88 Series

Every 88 Series device leaves the factory with device hardware and the standard strike for its configuration. Outside trim is specified separately unless the device is ordered as a complete unit with trim suffix included.

The 880 trim plate is the standard outside trim for 88 Series rim devices, measuring 3 inches wide by 14-3/16 inches long with a 1-5/8-inch bore for cylinder. For full Von Duprin 880 Series trim specifications, see the Von Duprin 880NL trim guide.

 

Function designations for 88 Series trim:

  • EO: Exit only, no outside trim operation
  • NL: Night latch, key locks and unlocks from outside
  • TP: Thumbpiece outside trim
  • TL: Turn lever
  • L / L-BE: Lever with or without cylinder
  • K / K-BE: Knob with or without cylinder (rarely specified given ADA requirements on most commercial egress doors)
  • DT: Dummy trim, non-functional aesthetic match

The 373 Series Control handles outside trim for 8827 SVR and 8875 mortise configurations. The 606, 608, and 609 trims cover specialty outside hardware requirements. Note that the 8827-F uses 377T trim while the 8847-F uses 376T trim. These series-specific trims are not interchangeable between SVR and CVR configurations.

If no cylinder operation is required, add the BE (blank escutcheon) suffix. The trim is always operable without a cylinder when BE is specified. Matching dummy trim uses the DT suffix. On wood doors without sex bolts, specify the WDA cover plate. When sex bolts are used, the 889 cover plate is required.

 

Sourcing Von Duprin 88 Series Parts at Security Parts

The Von Duprin 88 Series has been in production for over 70 years. Buildings running this device today have units installed in 1988, 2003, and 2019 side by side. Part numbers have evolved across those generations, and a replacement component ordered without knowing the device generation can produce a part that does not fit the specific unit in service.

Security Parts has been in commercial door hardware since 2001 and carries the complete Von Duprin 88 Series catalog organized by model within the series. Every model has its own dedicated page with an interactive diagram of the full assembly. A technician can navigate to the exact device configuration, open the diagram, confirm the failing component visually, and place the order without a cross-reference step or a compatibility guess.

The 8827 non-fire-rated center case and the 8827-F fire-rated top latch are on different model pages, which is what prevents that specific wrong-part order from shipping. The catalog covers both current-generation and legacy hardware. The full Von Duprin brand catalog extends this model-specific organization across every active series for facilities managing mixed Von Duprin hardware.

For a broader look at how 88 Series exit device parts fit into the full Von Duprin component ecosystem, see the Von Duprin parts guide and the exit devices parts guide. For help selecting the right series when the opening type spans multiple device families, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

Same-day shipping on stocked components. Pre-order compatibility support is available at 845-935-0301 before the order is placed. Browse the complete exit devices catalog for all series coverage with model diagrams.

The Von Duprin 88 Series covers every wide-stile crossbar exit device application from a standard single door egress point to a concealed vertical rod double door fire assembly. Four configurations, multiple active models, ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification, 2 million cycle testing, and 3-hour UL fire ratings on rated versions. The configuration decision, rim versus SVR versus CVR versus mortise, is what determines which model, which parts, and which outside trim applies to the opening. Getting that decision right before the order is placed is what keeps a commercial or institutional door installation on schedule and code-compliant from day one.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks Von Duprin 88 Series parts across all configurations and device generations, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

The Von Duprin 575-2: What It Is, When You Need It, and How to Order It Right

 

Von Duprin 575-2 mortise lock strike for double door pair installations on 1-3/4 inch wood doors

Von Duprin 575-2 mortise lock strike. View product page and order.

 

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 575-2 mortise strike is the paired door configuration of the Von Duprin mortise lock strike, designed specifically for double door pair installations running the 7500 mortise lock body on 1-3/4 inch wood doors. Before you order, confirm all three of the following apply:

  • Two active door leaves meeting at a center stile (not a single door meeting a fixed frame)
  • A mortise exit device from the 55, 88, 94/95, or 98/99 Series using the 7500 mortise lock body
  • 1-3/4 inch wood door construction (metal doors use the 576A or 576B strike instead)

The 575-2 does not ship with the exit device. It must be ordered separately. If all three conditions are met, this is the correct specification and it belongs in the opening.

 

The Difference Between the 575 and the 575-2 That Most People Miss

This is where most ordering errors originate. The two part numbers look almost identical in a catalog and the difference is structural, not cosmetic.

The 575 serves a single active door leaf meeting a fixed frame. It is the standard optional mortise strike for single door applications.

The Von Duprin 575-2 mortise strike serves double door pair installations where two active leaves meet at a center stile. The "-2" suffix designates the paired door configuration. On that type of opening, the active leaf needs a strike point at the door center, not at the frame. Without this component properly specified, the mortise latch bolt has nothing to engage correctly when the door closes.

This distinction is not about preference or upgrade. It is a functional requirement of the installation type. Getting it wrong means the mortise device does not latch at the center stile, which on a paired wood door opening is an immediate performance failure.

 

Which Devices and Door Types the Von Duprin 575-2 Fits

The 575-2 mortise lock strike is compatible with every Von Duprin exit device series that runs the same 7500 mortise lock body. That body has been the Von Duprin mortise standard since approximately 1977 and measures 5-7/8 inches high by 4-1/2 inches deep by 1 inch thick.

 

Compatible series and model configurations:

SeriesMortise ConfigurationsSeries Page
55 Series5575, 5575-F mortise configurations55 Series parts
88 Series8875, 8875-F mortise configurations88 Series parts
94/95 Series9475, 9575 mortise configurations94/95 Series parts
98/99 Series98/9975, 98/9975-F mortise exit device configurations98/99 Series parts

The application requirement is 1-3/4 inch wood doors. The strike is cut into the door edge at the center meeting stile, which requires wood door construction to support the mortise pocket correctly. Metal door pair applications require different hardware. This is not a universal strike.

 

575-2 vs 576A vs 576B: Choosing the Right Von Duprin Mortise Strike

Von Duprin offers four mortise strike options for the 7500 mortise lock body. Matching the right strike to the door type and door thickness is the first step of every correctly specified paired installation.

Part NumberDoor ConfigurationDoor TypeDoor Thickness
575Single door, frame strikeWood1-3/4 inch
575-2Double door pair, center stile strikeWood1-3/4 inch
576ASingle or paired door, frame or center stileMetal or wood1-3/4 inch
576BSingle or paired door, frame or center stileMetal or wood2-1/4 inch

If your paired installation uses metal doors, or if your door thickness is 2-1/4 inches, the 575-2 is not the correct specification. Use the 576A for 1-3/4 inch metal door pairs, and the 576B for 2-1/4 inch applications of either door material. For single door applications with a wood door meeting a fixed frame, the standard 575 applies.

For a broader overview of how mortise exit devices are specified and what components apply across different installation types, see the commercial mortise locks guide and the mortise lock parts guide.

 

Three Conditions That Must All Be True Before You Order the Von Duprin 575-2

Before this component goes on an order, confirm all three apply to the opening. If any one of them is missing, a different specification is required.

  1. Two active door leaves meeting at a center stile. The 575-2 is only correct for double door pair applications. A single active door meeting a fixed frame takes the 575.
  2. A mortise exit device configuration from one of the compatible series. Rim devices, surface vertical rod devices, and CVR devices that do not use the 7500 mortise lock body do not use this strike. See the Von Duprin exit device series comparison to confirm which configuration your opening uses.
  3. 1-3/4 inch wood door construction. The mortise pocket is cut into the wood door edge at the center meeting stile. Wood doors at this thickness support the correct pocket depth. Metal doors at the same thickness do not support this application and require the 576A instead.

All three confirmed? This component is the correct specification and it needs to be ordered separately from the exit device, since it does not ship with the device by default.

 

Door Coordinator Requirement on Paired Installations

Double door pair installations using a mortise exit device also typically require a door coordinator. The coordinator ensures the inactive leaf closes before the active leaf, which is necessary for the mortise latch bolt on the active leaf to engage the center stile strike correctly. On a paired installation without a coordinator, the doors can close out of sequence, which prevents consistent latch engagement at the center stile even when the correct 575-2 strike is installed.

If you are specifying a paired wood door installation with a mortise exit device, confirm whether a coordinator and astragal are part of the hardware schedule before ordering the 575-2. The strike is one component of a multi-part paired door assembly, and its performance depends on the full installation being correctly specified.

 

What Happens When You Get It Wrong

It is worth being specific about failure modes here, because the consequences of ordering the wrong strike on a double door pair installation are not subtle.

If the 575 single door version is ordered instead of the 575-2 for a paired installation, the geometry is wrong. The strike cannot align correctly to the center meeting stile because it was not designed for that configuration. The latch bolt either misses the pocket entirely or produces a partial engagement that does not meet the secure, consistent latching requirement for a fire-rated or commercial egress assembly.

On a fire-rated door pair, this is a code compliance issue under NFPA 80, not just a performance inconvenience. For a complete explanation of fire door pair requirements and how door hardware selection affects compliance, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

If no mortise strike is specified at all on a double door pair, the latch bolt engagement at the center stile depends entirely on the door construction and the meeting stile geometry. In practice, this produces intermittent latching, added resistance on opening, and accelerated wear on the latch bolt itself over high-cycle use.

The 575-2 is listed as optional in the Von Duprin catalog, but optional in this context means it is not a factory default shipment, not that it is unnecessary. On a properly specified paired wood door mortise installation, it belongs in the opening.

Ordering errors on this part also create project delays that are difficult to absorb. A commercial or institutional door opening with a paired mortise exit device is typically on a schedule with inspections and occupancy milestones attached to it. A wrong-strike return cycle on a component that ships separately from the device adds days to a timeline that usually has no room for them.

 

Ordering and Sourcing the Von Duprin 575-2 Mortise Strike

Commercial door hardware sourcing has a specific and persistent problem that most platforms do not solve: parts are listed by name and part number, but the context that determines whether a part applies to your specific installation is buried in manufacturer documentation that most buyers do not have time to cross-reference on every order. The result is wrong-part orders, return cycles, and the kind of installation delays that damage a contractor's relationship with a general contractor or a facility manager's confidence in their own team.

Security Parts was built around a different approach, and after more than two decades in commercial door hardware, the difference is visible in how the catalog is organized. Every Von Duprin series has its own dedicated page. Every model within each series has its own parts breakdown, organized by component category and anchored by an interactive diagram of the full assembly. When you are sourcing a component for an 88 Series mortise device, you navigate to the 88 Series page, find the mortise device model, open the diagram, and click on the component you need. The part number is confirmed visually against the physical device before anything goes into a cart.

That process eliminates the 575 versus 575-2 confusion because the diagram shows you exactly which strike belongs in a paired door assembly versus a single door assembly.

The platform carries this depth across every active Von Duprin series:

Legacy hardware is not an afterthought here. A 7500 mortise lock body installed in 1985 uses the same strike specification as one installed in 2022 because the body geometry has not changed. That consistency is part of why this strike has been in the catalog for as long as it has, and it is part of why Security Parts stocks it for both current and legacy applications.

The team is reachable at 845-935-0301 for compatibility questions before the order goes through. Same-day shipping applies to stocked components. Browse the full exit devices catalog and the Von Duprin brand page for every active series with model-specific diagrams and pre-order compatibility support. For a complete overview of the full Von Duprin product family, see the Von Duprin parts guide and the Von Duprin series guide.

The 575-2 is a small component that plays a specific and non-substitutable role in double door pair mortise exit device installations. It provides the center meeting stile engagement point that allows the active leaf's latch bolt to function correctly on a 1-3/4 inch wood door paired opening. It does not ship with the device, and it is not interchangeable with the single door 575. Confirm the three conditions, both active leaves present, mortise device configuration confirmed, wood door application verified, and this is the right part.

Source the Von Duprin 575-2 mortise lock strike from Security Parts with model-specific diagrams, same-day shipping on stocked components, and pre-order support when compatibility needs confirming.

 

About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks Von Duprin parts across all active series, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order compatibility support at 845-935-0301.

Door Closer Parts Diagram: Every Component, What It Does, and How to Order Right

Quick Answer

A door closer parts diagram maps every component in the assembly to a specific part number for your exact model. Here is what you need to know before using one:

  • Identify your model first. LCN parts are series-specific and not interchangeable across models.
  • The arm is the most commonly replaced part. It must match the spindle profile of your exact series.
  • Three hydraulic valves (sweep speed, latch speed, and backcheck) are all externally adjustable without opening the body.
  • Every part order requires four specs: Finish (F), Size (S), Hand (H), and Voltage (V) for electrified components.
  • Hydraulic fluid is factory-sealed. A leaking closer needs full replacement, not a fluid top-off.
  • Security Parts carries interactive door closer parts diagrams by model for LCN 1000, 4000, and 3030/3130 Series closers.

 

Why a Door Closer Parts Diagram Matters Before You Order

A door closer parts diagram maps every component in the assembly to a specific part number. It sounds simple. The reason it matters is that LCN door closer components are model-specific in ways that are not obvious from the outside. Arms are machined to each series' spindle shape. A 1460 arm will not fit a 4040XP closer because the spindle profiles are different. Drop plates are series-specific. When a component is ordered without confirming the model, the mismatch gets discovered at installation.

The diagram eliminates that problem by connecting the physical device to the correct part before the order is placed. LCN, owned by Allegion and manufacturing door control hardware since 1926, is the default institutional specification in commercial buildings across North America. Here is every component in the diagram, what it does, and what it takes to order it correctly.

For a broader overview of how LCN door closer parts are organized across series, see the LCN door closer parts guide. For help choosing the right closer for a new installation, the LCN commercial door closer selection guide covers selection by door type, traffic level, and application.

 

How to Identify Your LCN Closer Before Reading the Diagram

This step comes before everything else. The model number is usually located under the cover, on a sticker on the cylinder body. For mechanical closers, the manufacturing date is stamped near the packing nut at the base of the pinion, which is where the arm attaches to the closer body. If the model number is not visible, remove the cover and photograph the internal components, particularly the spindle shape, before attempting to order any arm or internal component.

Security Parts organizes the complete door closer parts catalog by model across LCN 1000 Series, LCN 4000 Series, and LCN 3030/3130 closers. Every model page carries an interactive diagram so the component can be confirmed visually before ordering.

 

Door Closer Parts Diagram: What Every Component Actually Does

LCN 4000 Series surface mounted door closer parts diagram overview

LCN 4000 Series surface mounted closer parts. Browse LCN 4000 Series parts.

 

Closer Body

The cast iron or aluminum housing that contains every other component. It mounts to the door face, frame, or soffit depending on installation type. ANSI/BHMA Grade 1, the commercial standard, requires the unit to complete 2 million open and close cycles. The body itself rarely fails from wear. When the housing is cracked or dented from physical impact, replacement of the full unit is the correct call because the internal geometry that holds every other component in alignment is compromised.

 

Spring

The spring stores energy when the door opens and releases it to close the door. Spring power is adjustable through an external screw and is sized to the door width and weight on a scale from 1 through 6. A spring that has weakened over high-cycle use produces a door that moves too slowly to latch reliably. Adjust through the external screw as the first diagnostic step before pursuing component replacement.

 

Arm

The arm is the most frequently replaced component in the diagram. It connects the closer body to the door or frame and translates spring energy into controlled door movement. LCN produces five arm configurations for different installation requirements:

  • Parallel arm runs parallel to the door face when closed : the most common commercial configuration
  • Top jamb mounts to the top of the frame when the closer is on the pull side
  • Slide track rides in a metal track rather than a fixed pivot, holding the door open at any position along the track
  • CUSH N Stop integrates a friction shoe for built-in hold-open function
  • Extra Duty Arm (EDA) is reinforced construction for high-use applications

Arm failure is almost always caused by the door being propped open with a wedge and stress-loading the casting in the wrong direction until it cracks at the pivot. Arms are sold separately from the body. For the LCN 4040XP specifically, arm compatibility and template requirements are covered in the LCN 4040XP installation template guide.

 

Spindle

The spindle is the shaft that connects the internal spring to the external arm. This is the component that makes arm compatibility non-negotiable by series. The 1000 Series spindle profile, covering the 1260 and 1460 models, is different from the 4010, 4020, and 4110 profiles, which are in turn different from the 4040 and 4040XP profiles. Confirm the model before ordering any arm.

 

Hydraulic Valves

Three valves control three closing phases. Sweep speed manages how fast the door moves from fully open to nearly closed. Latch speed manages the final controlled pull into the latched position. Backcheck provides hydraulic resistance against forceful opening that would otherwise slam the door against a wall or frame. All three are externally adjustable without opening the closer body. For step-by-step valve adjustment procedures, see the commercial door closer adjustment guide.

 

Hydraulic Fluid

LCN closers are not field-refillable. The fluid is sealed inside the body at the factory. A closer that is leaking hydraulic fluid will produce increasingly erratic and unreliable closing behavior as the level drops. A leaking unit is at end of service life and requires full replacement rather than a parts order.

 

Drop Plates and Mounting Plates

Drop plates reposition the closer's mounting point when the standard geometry cannot be used due to a window, non-standard frame dimension, or arm geometry requirement. They are series-specific. A drop plate designed for the 4050 Series does not mount correctly on a 4030 Series closer.

 

Cover Plate and Fasteners

The cover protects internal components. Fasteners are application-specific across wood door, hollow metal door, and metal frame installations. LCN specifies the correct fastener for each application. Using incorrect fasteners creates play in the installation that accelerates wear on every internal component.

 

LCN Door Closer Series: Which Diagram Applies to Your Device

LCN produces several distinct closer families, each with its own parts diagram and model-specific components. Knowing which series you have determines which diagram to use and which part numbers apply.

LCN 1000 Series surface mounted door closer parts and components

LCN 1000 Series surface mounted closer parts. Browse LCN 1000 Series parts.

 

SeriesCommon ModelsMount TypesParts Guide
1000 Series1260, 1460Hinge, top jamb, parallel arm1000 Series guide
4000 Series4010, 4020, 4030, 4040, 4040XP, 4110Hinge, top jamb, parallel arm, track4000 Series guide
3030/31303030, 3130Concealed overhead3030/3130 guide
Sentronic (ME/HSA)2310ME, 4310ME, 4310HSA, 4410HSAFire/life safety, hold-open with releaseSentronic guide
Benchmark / Senior Swing9130, 9140, 9150Automatic operatorBenchmark/Senior Swing guide

 

Electrified and Sentronic Closer Components

Electrified closers and Sentronic fire/life safety models add electrical components to the standard mechanical closer diagram. These require the Voltage (V) specification at the time of order and involve additional components not found on standard mechanical closers.

LCN 2310ME 4310ME 4410ME Sentronic door closer parts diagram for fire and life safety applications

LCN Sentronic 2310ME, 4310ME, 4410ME closer parts. Browse Sentronic parts guide.

 

The Sentronic series uses a hold-open mechanism with magnetic or hydraulic release triggered by a fire alarm signal. The Voltage specification becomes required for the cylinder assembly, the on/off switch assembly, and the wiring harness. Sentronic components are not interchangeable with standard mechanical closer components even when mounted on the same door series.

The Smoothee and high security 2210/4210/4510 series carry their own parts diagrams with different cylinder assemblies and arm profiles. These are covered in the LCN Sentronic, SEH, Smoothee, and SEM7800 parts guide.

 

LCN 4210 4510 Smoothee high security door closer parts diagram

LCN 4210/4510 Smoothee high security closer parts. View Smoothee parts guide.

 

What You Need to Order Any LCN Door Closer Part Correctly

Every part order for an LCN door closer requires four specifications. Miss any one of them and the component ships wrong:

  • Finish (F): aluminum, dark bronze, light bronze, or the applicable finish code
  • Size (S): the spring power size matched to the door width and weight
  • Hand (H): right hand (RH) or left hand (LH) based on the door swing direction
  • Voltage (V): required for electrified components including electric hold-open arms and Sentronic models

Security Parts structures the door closer parts catalog to surface these requirements at the part level rather than leaving them for the buyer to discover after an incorrect order arrives. The interactive diagram on each model page shows the full assembly, letting you visually confirm the component before specifying finish, size, hand, and voltage.

 

Fire Door Closer Components and Compliance

Fire-rated doors require closers that are specifically listed for fire door use. The parts diagram for a fire-rated LCN closer differs from the standard version : fire-rated units do not support dogging or hold-open features because the door must latch on every closing cycle to maintain the fire barrier. Components pulled from a standard closer diagram will not satisfy a fire door installation.

ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 certification applies to both standard and fire-rated models. For a complete explanation of fire door rating requirements and how they affect closer selection and component ordering, see the fire door closer adjustment guide. For ongoing inspection and maintenance requirements, the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist covers closer inspection intervals and NFPA 80 requirements. For the full picture of how ANSI/BHMA grades apply to commercial door hardware selection, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

How to Use the Interactive Door Closer Parts Diagram at Security Parts

Security Parts organizes every LCN closer model into an interactive parts diagram that mirrors the format of the LCN Illustrated Parts List : the manufacturer's own sourcing document : but is accessible online rather than requiring a PDF download.

Here is how to navigate it:

  1. Start with your model number. Go to the LCN parts hub and select your series.
  2. Open the diagram for your model. Each model page shows the assembly broken into component categories (cylinder assembly, arm assemblies, covers, mounting plates).
  3. Identify the failing component visually. Compare the failed part against the numbered diagram to confirm which assembly or individual part applies.
  4. Note the part suffix. LCN part numbers follow a series-plus-suffix format (for example, 1460-3077 for a 1460 Series regular arm). The suffix identifies the specific component.
  5. Specify finish, size, hand, and voltage. Confirm all four before adding to cart. If any is unclear, call 845-935-0301 before ordering.

For a walkthrough of how to install a replacement closer after ordering, see the commercial door closer installation guide. For an overview of all LCN closer types and which applications each serves, see the commercial door closers types guide.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket LCN door closer replacement parts across all active series, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin 88 Series Catalog: What You Need to Know Before You Order a Single Part

Quick Answer

The Von Duprin 88 Series catalog covers four wide-stile crossbar exit device configurations: rim, surface vertical rod (SVR), concealed vertical rod (CVR), and mortise. All are ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certified and UL listed for panic exit hardware. The series is mechanical-only by design, available in seven standard finishes, and built around a model-number system where a suffix string tells you the trim function, fire rating, and any special options. Getting the suffix wrong is the most common ordering mistake. This guide walks through every configuration, the trim and finish codes, how to read the model number, and which parts you end up replacing most often.

If you've spent any time maintaining commercial doors, you've worked on a Von Duprin 88 Series device. It's been in continuous production since the 1950s and is probably the most recognizable crossbar exit device in North America. The Von Duprin 88 Series catalog covers rim, surface vertical rod, concealed vertical rod, and mortise configurations, all wide-stile, all carrying ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 certification and UL listing for panic exit hardware. It ships with a 42-inch field-sizeable crossbar and a 3/4-inch throw latch bolt. Knowing the model lineup and how the parts are structured is what keeps ordering accurate and returns to zero. Browse the full Von Duprin 88 Series parts catalog or read on for the complete field guide.

 

The Device That Put Von Duprin on the Map

That's not marketing copy. Contractors and locksmiths who have been in the field for decades will tell you the 88 Rim device was the product that established Von Duprin as the institutional standard. It's been on egress doors in schools, hospitals, government buildings, and correctional facilities for over 70 years because it solves a specific problem extremely well: it handles serious mechanical abuse without needing electronics to do it.

There are no standard electrified options in the 88 Series. No QEL, no MEL, no Allegion Connect integration. That's a design decision, not a gap. In correctional facilities and behavioral health units, you don't want electrified device components that can be targeted or defeated. You want a mechanical crossbar that's built heavy and stays functional under sustained physical force. That's what the 88 delivers, and it's why it still gets specified in environments where the 98/99 Series, with all its electronic integration options, simply isn't the right tool.

One thing worth knowing before we get into the models: the 88 is the wide-stile version of Von Duprin's crossbar line. The 55 Series is the narrow-stile version, commonly used in historic renovations and retro architecture. Both carry the same ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 rating. If you're working on a wide-stile door, you're in the 88 catalog. If it's a narrow-stile, you're in the 55 catalog. Parts don't cross between them. For a side-by-side comparison of the full Von Duprin product line, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Catalog: Models and Configurations Explained

The 88 Series runs in four configurations. Choosing the right one depends entirely on the door type, opening geometry, and whether the installation requires concealed rod hardware. Here is what each model covers and where it gets used. For a deeper walkthrough of how to match each configuration to a specific opening, see the 88 Series buyer's guide.

 

88 Rim and 88-F Rim

This is the original. Single-point latch bolt engagement at the frame-side rim strike. Field reversible, which means you can flip it to handle either hinge side without stocking two versions. It ships with the 299 rim strike and all mounting hardware. The non-fire-rated version uses hex key dogging with a 5/32-inch key. The fire-rated 88-F removes the dogging function because a fire door has to latch every single time it closes, no exceptions.

Physical specs: lock stile case measures 8-1/4 inches by 2-3/4 inches by 15/16 inches. Hinge stile case measures 6 inches by 1-3/4 inches by 15/16 inches. Crossbar tubing is 1 inch outside diameter. Neutral projection is 4-3/4 inches; depressed projection is 4 inches. The 88 Rim is part of the full exit devices lineup at Security Parts.

 

8827 SVR and 8827-F SVR

Surface vertical rod for double door openings without a center mullion. The top rod hits a strike at the door header, the bottom rod hits the floor or threshold. It ships with three strikes: the 299, the 304L standard vertical rod bottom strike, and the 248L-4 panic vertical rod bottom strike. Fits hollow metal doors with 86 or 161 cutouts, and works on door stiles as narrow as 3-1/2 inches on the standard version. The fire-rated 8827-F fits stiles as narrow as 3-3/4 inches (95mm) and carries a 3-hour UL fire resistance rating.

There's one thing on the 8827 that trips people up. The center case for a non-fire-rated 8827 is part number 050415. The fire-rated 8827-F uses a completely different top latch assembly, and the fire-rated version also needs the plunger release bracket (107765) to work correctly. If you order the non-fire-rated center case for a fire-rated device, you'll know about it when the bottom latch starts dragging on the floor. Don't skip that detail.

The 8827 also supports a Pullman latch option. With a Pullman latch, the latch bolt remains extended at all times, which is useful in applications using an electric strike with less bottom rod. Specify "Pullman Latch" at time of order if required.

 

8847-F CVR

Concealed vertical rod, fire-rated only. The rod hardware routes inside the door so you don't see it on the surface. Gets specified when surface rods aren't architecturally acceptable but the project still calls for a wide-stile crossbar device. Fits door stiles as narrow as 4-3/4 inches (121mm) and ships with the 301L fire-rated strike. Hotels, healthcare interiors, and high-end institutional applications where the egress hardware needs to disappear into the door profile are the typical specification points. The 8847-F is the only CVR configuration in the 88 Series and is available fire-rated only. For full product line context, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

8875 Mortise and 8875-F Mortise

The mortise device version of the 88 Series integrates the 7500 mortise lock body, the same body used in the 9975 mortise device from the 98/99 Series. That body has been the Von Duprin mortise standard since around 1977 and measures 5-7/8 inches high by 4-1/2 inches deep by 1 inch thick. If you need no-cylinder operation on the 8875, you specify the BE (blank escutcheon) suffix. Dummy trim adds DT. Matching dummy trim for the knob version is 8875K-DT.

The 8875 is specified when the opening requires the security depth of a full mortise lock combined with code-compliant panic egress. The faceplate on the 7500 lock body has an adjustable bevel and is field reversible without removing the lock from the door. The fire-rated 8875-F is UL listed for 3 hours. For guidance on how hardware specifications apply across all device types, the commercial door hardware specification guide covers mortise and exit device applications.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Configuration Quick Reference

ModelTypeDoor ApplicationMin Stile WidthFire Rating
88 / 88-FRimSingle door, fixed frame86 or 161 cutout88-F: 3-hour UL
8827 / 8827-FSurface Vertical RodDouble door, no center post3-1/2" (8827) / 3-3/4" (8827-F)8827-F: 3-hour UL
8847-FConcealed Vertical RodDouble door, concealed rods required4-3/4" (121mm)3-hour UL (fire only)
8875 / 8875-FMortiseSingle or double door, high security4-3/4" (121mm)8875-F: 3-hour UL

 

How to Read the Von Duprin 88 Series Model Number

The 88 Series model number follows a structured format. Understanding each position in the string prevents ordering the wrong device or trim. Here is the full decoder. For background on what ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 means in practice, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

PositionWhat It MeansOptions
PrefixSpecial option or featureE (electric), RX (request-to-exit), KN (knurled crossbar), HH (wind/impact rated), HW (wind-only rated), RCB (reinforced crossbar), PL (Pullman latch), FL (flush transom)
SeriesDevice series88
TypeDevice configurationNone = Rim, 27 = Surface Vertical Rod, 47 = Concealed Vertical Rod, 75 = Mortise
Trim functionOutside hardware functionEO (exit only), DT (dummy trim), NL (night latch), TP (thumbpiece), L (lever), K (knob), TL (turn lever), LC (less control), LT (less trim)
ModifierCylinder optionBE = blank escutcheon (no cylinder, always operable)
RatingPanic or fire exitNone = panic, F = fire exit device
AccessoriesAdditional itemsLBR (less bottom rod), SNB (sex bolts), CYL (cylinders), RG-27 (rod and latch guard)

Example: RX8827TP-F = RX request-to-exit prefix, 88 Series, 27 surface vertical rod, TP thumbpiece trim, F fire-rated.

Example: KN88EO = KN knurled crossbar, 88 Series, rim device, EO exit-only trim, standard panic-rated.

For help confirming the right model for your specific opening before ordering, call Security Parts at 845-935-0301 or visit the contact page. For guidance on specifying the right configuration from the start, see the commercial door hardware specification guide.

 

The Trim Suffix System, Explained Simply

This is where most ordering mistakes happen. The suffix at the end of the model number tells you the trim function, and getting it wrong means the outside hardware doesn't work the way the opening requires.

  • BE means blank escutcheon, no cylinder, trim is always operable
  • DT is dummy trim, non-functional, used for aesthetic matching on the inactive door leaf
  • NL is night latch, outside trim locks and unlocks with a key
  • TP is thumbpiece outside trim
  • L / L-BE is lever function, with or without cylinder
  • K / K-BE is knob function. Still available in the catalog but rarely specified anymore because knob hardware doesn't comply with ADA door hardware requirements on most commercial egress doors
  • T / T-BE is thumbturn function
  • LC is less control, ordered without outside trim
  • LT is less trim, ordered without any trim assembly
  • EO is exit only, no outside trim at all

One thing specifically about the 8827 SVR: you can't get the NL function just by specifying 88NL on an SVR device. On the 8827 and 8827-F, night latch is only available through the 370 Series trim configured for NL function during installation, or by ordering the TP-NL or K-NL designation at time of order. If you miss it during spec, you'll be back-ordering the right trim assembly on a job that should have shipped complete. Browse all trim-related components in the 88 Series parts catalog.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Trim Options

The 88 Series is compatible with several outside trim lines. Trim choice affects the escutcheon size, grip style, and cylinder type. The four most common are:

Trim SeriesStyleAvailable FunctionsNotes
88010-gauge brass/bronze/stainless, 3" x 14-3/16"EO, DT, NL, TP, KStandard trim; stainless steel version used on fire-rated rim devices on wood doors
608Narrow design, 3/16" thick, 1-5/8" x 13-1/2"DT, NL, TPFlat pull grip; specify 88NLx608NL when ordering with device
606KNarrow knob trim, 3/16" thickK functionKnob trim; limited ADA compliance on most egress doors
373L / 371LForged brass lever, 7/8" thick escutcheonL function; NL cylinder plate includedBE blank escutcheon available; specify 373L-BE

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Finishes

The 88 Series is available in seven standard finishes using current ANSI/BHMA finish codes. Not every finish is available on every configuration or trim combination. Confirm finish availability against the specific model at time of order.

ANSI CodeFinish NameLegacy US Code
605Bright BrassUS3
606Satin BrassUS4
612Satin BronzeUS10B
613Satin Bronze, Oil-RubbedUS10
625Bright ChromeUS26
626Satin ChromeUS26D
SPBLKSprayed BlackSPBLK

Special finishes including 643e Aged Bronze, 693 Painted Black, and antimicrobial Satin Chrome (626-AM) are available by special order. Contact Security Parts at 845-935-0301 to confirm special finish lead times before committing them to a project.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series Mechanical and Electronic Options

The 88 Series supports several mechanical and electronic options that are added at time of order. These are applied as prefixes or suffixes to the base model number.

Mechanical Options

  • HD (Hex Dogging): Standard on most configurations. Cannot be added to fire exit hardware.
  • KN (Knurled Crossbar): Adds a textured crossbar surface to provide a tactile warning for openings leading to hazardous areas such as stairs, loading platforms, or boiler rooms.
  • HH (Wind and Impact Rated): Hurricane-rated option for coastal or high-wind-load installations requiring both wind and impact resistance.
  • HW (Wind-Only Rated): Hurricane-rated option for installations requiring wind resistance without the impact rating.
  • RCB (Reinforced Crossbar): Adds structural reinforcement to the crossbar on high-abuse applications.
  • PL (Pullman Latch): Keeps the latch bolt extended at all times; typically used on 8827 SVR applications with electric strikes and less bottom rod.

 

Electronic Options

  • RX (Request to Exit / Crossbar Monitor): A switch placed in the exit device that signals when the crossbar is depressed. Used to monitor door use and connect to access control or alarm systems. Available as a standard prefix on most 88 Series configurations.
  • E8875 (Electric Mortise): Electric unlocking of the outside lever on the 8875 mortise configuration only. Available in Fail Secure (FSE) or Fail Safe (FS) modes. Standard voltage is 24VDC; 12VDC is available. Specify E prefix, FS or FSE, voltage, and handing (LHR or RHR) when ordering.

The 88 Series does not support QEL, MEL, or Allegion Connect electrification at the device body level. For full electrified device options, the 98/99 Series is the correct product line. If you're managing a mixed facility with both series, the Von Duprin series guide covers how the product lines align to opening requirements.

 

The Parts You Actually End Up Replacing

The Von Duprin 88 Series catalog at Security Parts organizes components by category within each model. Here's how each category breaks down and what sits inside it. For routine maintenance schedules and inspection intervals, the commercial door hardware maintenance checklist covers 88 Series devices in the exit device sections.

 

Crossbars and Crossbar Hardware

Von Duprin 050004 42-inch standard crossbar kit for 88 Series rim and vertical rod exit devices

Von Duprin 050004 standard crossbar kit. View product page and order.

 

Ships at 42 inches standard, cut to door width in the field. The crossbar reinforcement kit (050459) adds structural support on high-use doors. Tube attaching wedges (090020) and rings (090021) secure the crossbar to the device body. Wedgetite screws (090008 and 090081) and dog screws (090004 and 090083) are the highest-turnover mechanical components on heavily used 88 Series devices. Browse all crossbar hardware in the 88 Series parts catalog.

 

Lever Arms, Axles, and Security Pins

Lever arm replacement is almost always caused by the dogging screw stripping out. The arm assembly includes the wedge, wedge ring, wedgetite screw, and dog screw. Right-hand lever arm kits are 050438 and 050440. Axles come in pairs (090006) or packs of 10 (090082). Axle security pins are available in a standard pack (090007) or a pack of 50 (033022), which makes more sense if you're servicing multiple 88 Series devices across a large facility.

 

Vertical Rods for the 8827

The top rod kit for standard 6'8" to 8' doors is 050457. Extension kits cover 8-to-10 foot doors (051705) and 10-to-12 foot doors (050634). Bottom rod kit is 050458. Know the door height before ordering any rod kit because these don't cross between sizes. See the full vertical rod inventory in the 88 Series parts catalog.

 

End Case and Center Case Components

End case kits come in multiple configurations: 050435 and 050437. End case springs are 090003 in pairs or 090080 in packs of 10. Spring stop kits are 050451 and 050452. For the rim device center case, the 050409 active case applies to EO, DT, and NL trim functions only. Lever, knob, and thumbpiece versions each use a different case specification.

 

Strikes

Von Duprin 1609 rim strike for 88 Series rim exit devices

Von Duprin 1609 rim strike for 88 Series rim devices. View product page and order.

 

Rim strikes: 1609 and 1606. Vertical rod bottom strikes: 304L standard, 301L fire-rated, 248L-4 panic-rated. Strike selection depends on device configuration and fire rating status. For concealed vertical rod (8847-F) applications, the 301L fire-rated strike is the standard. Review the strike application chart in the 88 Series catalog for minimum stile width requirements before finalizing strike selection.

 

Von Duprin 304L standard vertical rod bottom strike for 8827 SVR exit devices

Von Duprin 304L vertical rod bottom strike for 8827 SVR applications. View product page and order.

 

Why the Right Catalog Source Actually Matters for the 88 Series

Here's a real problem that happens all the time with the 88 Series. A facility manager searches for a center case kit under "88 Series" at a general distributor, orders it, and gets a part that doesn't fit the trim function on the device being serviced. That's because the 88 EO center case and the 88 TP center case are different parts. Most general catalogs don't surface that distinction clearly enough to prevent the mistake.

Security Parts is built around the model-first logic that actually reflects how the 88 Series catalog works. Every device configuration has its own page. Every parts category within that configuration is separated so you're not sorting through a flat list trying to figure out what applies to your specific device. The interactive diagram on each model page shows the full assembly so you can identify the failing component visually and confirm the part number before anything goes in the cart.

The catalog also covers legacy parts for devices that have been running since the 1980s and 1990s. Most commercial facilities aren't replacing 88 Series devices on a schedule. A device installed in 1988 might still be running the original mechanism and just needs a lever arm or an end case spring. That cross-generation depth is part of what Security Parts has built over 23 years in commercial door hardware.

Same-day shipping on stocked components from US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450. If you're not sure whether a specific part applies to the device generation you're working on, call 845-935-0301 or visit the contact page before the order goes through, not after. The full Von Duprin catalog covers every other active series through the same model-specific structure if you're managing a facility with mixed Von Duprin hardware. For the complete catalog overview across all Von Duprin series, see the Von Duprin series guide.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series vs. 55 Series: Which One Do You Have?

Feature88 Series55 Series
Stile typeWide-stileNarrow-stile
Typical applicationStandard commercial/institutional doorsHistoric renovations, narrow-stile aluminum frames
ANSI GradeGrade 1Grade 1
Parts interchangeableNoNo
ConfigurationsRim, SVR, CVR, MortiseRim, SVR, CVR

If you're unsure which series is on the device, check the label on the device body or the crossbar tube. The series number is typically stamped on the end cap. Browse the 55 Series parts catalog if you've confirmed a narrow-stile device. The Von Duprin 22 Series guide covers the push-pad family if you are working on a non-crossbar device. Understanding which product line you're in before placing an order is the single fastest way to eliminate the wrong-part return cycle. For more context on all Von Duprin exit device series, see the 88 Series buyer's guide for a deeper look at configuration selection and application matching. You can also review the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide for an explanation of Grade 1 testing requirements and what they mean for product selection.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, general contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Von Duprin and other leading commercial door hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Knowing Your Von Duprin Series Before You Spec or Service a Single Door

Quick Answer

Von Duprin makes 14 active series of exit devices and electric strikes. Each series is built for a specific door type and application. Parts are series-specific and do not cross between lines. The 98/99 is the most common institutional series. The 88 is for correctional facilities. The 78 fits narrow aluminum storefronts. Use the Von Duprin parts catalog to find parts by series.

The Von Duprin series lineup is what most commercial door hardware conversations eventually come back to. The brand has been engineering panic exit devices since 1908, and today its products are installed on millions of commercial doors across hospitals, schools, correctional facilities, government buildings, hotels, and retail spaces. Fourteen active series cover everything from standard office entries to glass storefronts to abuse-resistant institutional openings. Each series has a distinct application, a distinct parts tree, and specific configurations that do not cross between lines. Knowing which series you are dealing with before you spec or order is the only way to get the right component the first time.

 

Von Duprin Series at a Glance: Which One Fits Your Door

Use this table to match the Von Duprin series to your door type, traffic level, and security requirement before going deeper into any individual series below.

SeriesPrimary ApplicationConfigurationsANSI GradeElectrified Options
98/99Institutional: hospitals, schools, governmentRim, SVR, CVR, WDC, MortiseGrade 1QEL, MEL, Chexit, ELR, Allegion Connect
22Mid-range commercial, multi-family, retail back doorsRim, SVRGrade 1QEL, MEL, ALK, RX
33/35AInstitutional touchbar, wide-stile doorsRim, SVR, CVR, WDCGrade 1QEL, MEL, Chexit, E7500, Allegion Connect
55High-security perimeter, mortise lock requiredRim, CVR, MortiseGrade 1Limited (mortise-level)
75Standard commercial: healthcare, retail, officeRim, SVR, CVRGrade 1QEL, MEL, ALK, Allegion Connect
78Narrow aluminum and all-glass storefrontsRim, SVR, CVR, WDCGrade 1QEL, MEL, ALK, Allegion Connect
88Correctional, behavioral health, high-securityRim, SVR, CVR, MortiseGrade 1None by design
94/95Concealed rod: hotels, premium healthcare, high-end commercialCVR, MortiseGrade 1QEL, E7500
54 MullionsDouble door center post hardwareFixed, RemovableN/AN/A
5100Standard commercial electric strikesElectric strikeGrade 1Fail-safe, fail-secure
6100Heavy-duty electric strikesElectric strikeGrade 1Fail-safe, fail-secure
6300Wide-compatibility electric strikesElectric strikeGrade 1Fail-safe, fail-secure
Guard-XAlarmed secondary exitsRim (integrated alarm)Grade 1Integrated 85dB alarm
ADVANTEXDelayed egress, electric latch retractionMultipleGrade 1Delayed egress, ELR, RX

 

Why the Von Duprin Series Numbering System Actually Tells You Everything

Before diving into individual series, one thing worth understanding is that Von Duprin's numbering is not arbitrary. The number encodes the application tier, the device configuration, and in some cases the door material compatibility. A technician who knows how to read a Von Duprin model number can identify the series, the mounting type, the fire rating status, and the electrified options in seconds. That knowledge is what separates a confident parts order from a five-day return cycle.

The series also defines the parts catalog. Components from the 88 Series are not compatible with the 22 Series. A center case kit for the 98/99 rim configuration is a different part from the center case kit for the 98/9947 CVR device. Getting this right starts at the series level, not the part number level. Here is every Von Duprin series currently available, what it was designed for, and what part categories sit inside it.

 

How to Read a Von Duprin Model Number

Every Von Duprin model number follows a consistent logic. Understanding it lets you identify the series, configuration, fire rating, and electrified options before opening any catalog or calling a distributor.

  • Series prefix: The leading number identifies the series. 98 and 99 = 98/99 Series. 22 = 22 Series. 33A/35A = 33/35A Series. 88 = 88 Series.
  • Configuration suffix: Numbers appended after the series indicate the configuration. For example, 9927 = 99 Series in SVR (surface vertical rod); 9947 = 99 Series in CVR (concealed vertical rod); 9975 = 99 Series with mortise lock.
  • Fire rating: An "F" in the model number suffix indicates a fire-rated configuration (for example, 22-F, 9899-F). Fire-rated devices meet UL 10C and NFPA 80 requirements.
  • Function code: Letters at the end indicate the outside trim function. EO = exit only. NL = night latch. DT = dummy trim. TP = thumbpiece.
  • Electric option code: Prefix letters indicate the electrified option installed. QEL = quiet electric latch retraction. MEL = motorized electric latch retraction. EL = standard electric latch retraction.

For deeper guidance on matching the right series to your application, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide.

 

Every Active Von Duprin Series, Explained

98/99 Series

Von Duprin 98/99 Series rim exit device for institutional commercial doors

Von Duprin 98/99 Series rim exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

The 98/99 is the dominant commercial specification in North America. Walk into any major hospital, university, or government building built in the last 40 years and you will almost certainly find this device on the egress doors. The 98 uses a smooth mechanism case, the 99 a grooved case. Every internal component is identical and fully interchangeable between the two.

What makes this series the commercial standard is breadth. It covers five device configurations including rim, surface vertical rod (SVR), concealed vertical rod (CVR), wide door cable (WDC), and the 9875/9975 mortise exit device running the 7500 mortise lock body. Electrified options span quiet electric latch retraction (QEL), motorized electric latch retraction (MEL), Chexit delayed egress, Allegion Connect integration, signal switches, and electric power transfers. A building can spec a mechanical 98/99 device today and add electrified access control years later without replacing the device body. That long-term modularity is why it is the default institutional specification.

Parts include center case kits, dogging assemblies, mechanism cases, baseplate hardware, push bar components, end cap kits, latch hardware, fire kits, vertical rod assemblies, and the full trim catalog by function. Browse the 98/99 Series parts catalog or see the detailed Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide.

 

22 Series

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device for medium-traffic commercial applications

Von Duprin 22 Series rim exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

The 22 Series is the practical Grade 1 specification for mid-range commercial applications. Employee entrances, parking garage stairwells, multi-family corridors, back-of-house retail doors. It runs in rim and SVR configurations and carries ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification. Electrified options include ALK alarm kits, QEL modular conversion, MEL motorized latch retraction, and request-to-exit (RX) switch kits.

One useful item specific to this series is the QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit, which updates older SVR configurations to current specs without a full device replacement. Browse the 22 Series parts catalog or see the detailed Von Duprin 22 Series exit device parts guide.

 

33/35A Series

Von Duprin 33A 35A Series touchbar rim exit device with full-width bar

Von Duprin 33A/35A Series touchbar rim exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

Where the 98/99 and 22 Series use a push pad, the 33/35A runs a continuous touchbar across the full door width. The release mechanism engages anywhere along the bar length, which matters in institutional settings where occupants may not know conventional hardware. The 35A variant adds an integral door position switch to the same chassis.

Configurations cover rim, SVR, CVR, WDC, and the 360/E360 control trim variants. The electrified options catalog is second only to the 98/99, including Chexit delayed egress, the E7500 electrified mortise lock, pneumatic options, Allegion Connect, and electric power transfers. Parts run deep into mechanism case assemblies, EL solenoid and plunger assemblies, SS housing components, cables, and fire latch hardware. Browse the 33/35A Series parts catalog.

 

55 Series

The 55 Series integrates a full mortise lock body with panic egress hardware, which is why it appears on high-security perimeter doors where architects need mortise lock integrity without compromising IBC egress code compliance. The 7500 mortise lock body sits at the center of this series. Configurations include rim, CVR, and the 5575 mortise device.

Parts go deep into mortise lock territory: latch bolt and axle assemblies, cam assemblies in left and right-hand configurations, lift members, lift member channels and levers, spring anchors, center case kits, crossbars, and soffit latch assemblies. Browse the 55 Series parts catalog.

 

75 Series

The 75 Series is the clean Grade 1 specification for standard commercial buildings where the institutional depth of the 98/99 is not required. Healthcare facilities, retail, offices, light institutional openings. Available in rim, SVR, and CVR configurations. Electrified options include ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, and Allegion Connect. The center case reinforcing bracket is a 75 Series-specific component that adds structural support to high-use devices on busy corridors. Browse the 75 Series parts catalog.

 

78 Series

Von Duprin 78 Series narrow stile rim exit device for aluminum storefront doors

Von Duprin 78 Series narrow stile rim exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

The 78 Series exists for one application category: aluminum-frame and all-glass storefront doors where the stile is too narrow for any standard-width exit device body. Minimum stile clearance of 1-3/4 inches. Commercial lobbies, retail storefronts, glass office partitions. This is the narrowest form factor in the Von Duprin lineup and its parts are not interchangeable with any other series.

Configurations run rim, SVR, CVR, and WDC. The full electrified options catalog applies including ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, and Allegion Connect. Browse the 78 Series parts catalog.

 

88 Series

Von Duprin 88 Series heavy duty rim exit device for correctional and high security facilities

Von Duprin 88 Series heavy-duty rim exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

Built specifically for abuse-resistant, high-security environments. Correctional facilities, behavioral health units, secure government floors, any opening where hardware faces deliberate force or sustained misuse. Construction is heavier throughout. No electrified options exist at the device level by design because mechanical robustness is the specification priority.

Configurations cover rim, SVR, CVR, and the 8875 mortise device. The parts catalog is the most mechanically dense in the Von Duprin line: lever arm kits and axles, axle security pins (individual and 50-packs), dog screws, crossbar reinforcement kits, wedgetite screws, end case kits in multiple configurations, end case springs, vertical rod kits for standard doors plus extension kits for 8-to-10 foot and 10-to-12 foot door heights, soffit latch assemblies, release guide covers, plunger release brackets, and backplate conversion kits. Browse the 88 Series parts catalog.

 

94/95 Series

Von Duprin 94 95 Series concealed vertical rod exit device for premium interior openings

Von Duprin 94/95 Series concealed vertical rod exit device. View diagrams and parts.

 

The 94/95 Series runs the latch hardware inside the door rather than on the surface, which makes it the specification of choice when visible rods are architecturally unacceptable. Hotel corridors, premium healthcare interiors, high-end commercial spaces. Configurations cover the 94/9547 CVR device and the 9575 mortise device. Electrified options include the E7500 electrified mortise lock and QEL.

Parts are concentrated in latch, rod, and concealment hardware: latch retrofit kits, latch mounting bracket kits, ratchet release assemblies, adjustable extension rod kits from 8'4" to 10', auxiliary fire latch strike hole plugs, and latch linkage pin components. These are precise, configuration-specific components that do not cross to other series. Browse the 94/95 Series parts catalog or see the detailed Von Duprin 94/95 Series exit device parts guide.

 

54 Series Mullions

Mullions are the center post components on double door openings where a vertical rod device on one leaf needs a strike point at the door center rather than the frame. The 54 Series covers fixed and removable configurations. Removable mullions allow the full double door width to open for large-format access, common on loading dock entries and large institutional openings. Parts include mounting hardware, locking assemblies, and strike components. Browse the 54 Series Mullion parts catalog.

 

Electric Strikes: Four Series Covering Four Security Tiers

Von Duprin manufactures four electric strike lines, each engineered for a different access control requirement at the door frame. The 5100 Series covers standard commercial cylindrical and mortise lock applications. The 6100 Series steps up to heavy-duty performance with broader lock compatibility. The 6200 Series delivers high-security fail-secure performance, maintaining the locked position during power failure rather than failing open. The 6300 Series carries the widest lock compatibility across cylindrical, mortise, and panic hardware in a single platform.

Parts across all four series include solenoid assemblies, strike plates, cover kits, and mounting hardware. Electric strike components are not cross-compatible between series. Browse the electric strikes parts catalog or see the electric strike parts guide. For detailed 6100 Series coverage, see the Von Duprin 6100 electric strike parts guide.

 

SeriesApplicationKey FeatureParts Catalog
5100Standard commercialCylindrical and mortise lock compatibility5100 Series
6100Heavy-duty commercialBroader lock compatibility, higher holding force6100 Series
6200High-securityFail-secure: remains locked on power lossSee 6100 Series page
6300Wide compatibilityCylindrical, mortise, and panic hardware in one platform6300 Series

 

Exit Alarm Guard-X

The Exit Alarm Guard-X is the alarmed exit device for secondary exits, stairwells, and storage room doors where a local alarm on door use is required but a full access control integration is not specified. The alarm is integrated directly into the panic bar hardware rather than added as a kit onto a standard device. Parts include alarm batteries, retainer nuts, and disarming labels. Browse the Guard-X parts catalog.

 

ADVANTEX Series: Delayed Egress and Electric Latch Retraction

The ADVANTEX series covers applications where delayed egress, electric latch retraction with request-to-exit monitoring, or exit alarm with battery backup are required as integrated functions, not field-added kits. ADVANTEX devices meet IBC and NFPA 101 requirements for delayed egress in facilities including healthcare, retail loss prevention, and secure government access points.

ADVANTEX is the right specification when a door needs to remain in a locked or controlled state for a defined delay period after the push bar is activated, giving facility security staff response time without blocking required egress. Browse the ADVANTEX parts catalog.

 

What Makes Security Parts the Right Place to Source Every One of These Lines

Most hardware distributors list Von Duprin parts by product name or part number without the model-specific context that tells you whether that component applies to the device generation installed on your door. A dogging spring listed under "22 Series" without a diagram of the device assembly it fits is still a potential wrong-part order.

Security Parts organizes the complete Von Duprin series catalog model-first. Every series has a dedicated page. Every model within that series has its own parts breakdown organized by component category. The interactive diagram on each model page shows the full assembly so a technician or facilities manager can identify a failing component visually before placing the order.

The platform has been operating in commercial door hardware since 2001 and supports legacy models alongside current-generation devices because commercial buildings run mixed hardware generations across their openings. A facility manager sourcing a replacement mechanism case for a 98/99 device installed in 2004 needs to know whether the current part number applies to that generation. That cross-generation depth is built into how the catalog is organized, not something you have to figure out by calling a distributor and hoping someone knows the answer.

Common components ship same business day from US warehouses. Pre-order compatibility confirmation is available at 845-935-0301 or through the contact page.

 

Von Duprin Series Parts: Where to Start Your Order

Parts are series-specific. Before placing any order, confirm your series, then confirm your configuration within that series. The same part number can mean different things across series. A center case for a 98/99 rim device is a different part from a center case for a 22 rim device, even though both are described as "rim device center cases."

Use these direct links to find replacement parts for your Von Duprin series:

Not sure which series you have? Use the Von Duprin panic bar parts identification guide to identify your device from the label, or call 845-935-0301 for pre-order compatibility support.

For broader guidance on panic hardware types, applications, and code requirements, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide and the commercial door hardware replacement and repair guide.

 

Conclusion

Fourteen Von Duprin series cover the full spectrum of commercial egress hardware from standard office entries to correctional facility installations, glass storefronts, alarmed secondary exits, and electrified access-controlled openings. Each series has a distinct application logic, a distinct parts catalog, and specific configurations that do not cross between lines. Getting any repair or specification right starts at the series level.

Browse the full Von Duprin series catalog at Security Parts, select your series, use the model-specific diagram to confirm the component, and order with same-day shipping on stocked parts from US warehouses. For a complete breakdown of all Von Duprin components by series and category, see the Von Duprin complete parts guide.

 


About the Author

This guide was written by the Security Parts team, a commercial door hardware parts specialist serving locksmiths, facility managers, contractors, and service technicians since 2001. Security Parts stocks OEM and aftermarket replacement components for Von Duprin, LCN, Schlage, Falcon, Detex, and other leading commercial hardware manufacturers, with same-day shipping on stocked items and pre-order parts identification support at 845-935-0301.

Von Duprin Parts Guide: Every Series, Every Component You Need to Know

Von Duprin parts cover one of the most extensive commercial door hardware catalogs in North America. The brand's history starts in 1908 when Von Duprin developed the first panic exit device following the Iroquois Theatre fire in Chicago, which killed 602 people and directly triggered building code requirements for panic egress hardware. More than a century later, Von Duprin devices are still the dominant specification in hospitals, schools, government buildings, and correctional facilities across the country. Maintaining that hardware correctly requires knowing which series is installed, which component has failed, and which part number applies to your specific device generation. This guide covers every active Von Duprin series with direct links to the parts pages, the component categories inside each series, and the facts that make ordering accurate the first time.

 

Quick Answer

  • Von Duprin produces eleven active exit device series and four electric strike series. Each series has a distinct parts catalog. Components do not cross between series.
  • Always start with the model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate. That number drives every parts sourcing decision.
  • The most widely serviced series are the 98/99 (institutional flagship), 88 (abuse-resistant), and 78 (narrow-stile glass doors).
  • Electric strikes span four series: 5100 (cylindrical locks), 6100 (rim exit devices), 6200 (multi-application), and 6300 (surface mount).
  • Browse the full catalog at securityparts.com/von-duprin by series and model with interactive parts diagrams.
  •  

Why Part Number Precision Matters More Than Brand Recognition

Here's the thing most facility managers and contractors learn the hard way: Von Duprin part numbers are series-specific and in many cases configuration-specific within the same series. A dogging spring from the 22 Series won't fit a 75 Series device. A center case kit for the 98/99 rim configuration is a different part from the center case kit for the 98/9947 CVR device.

ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification, which Von Duprin's top-tier devices carry, requires each component to survive 2 million operation cycles. That standard is built into the manufacturing tolerances. Getting a close-enough substitute wrong by one spec can undermine compliance on a fire-rated door and create real liability. For a full explanation of what Grade 1 certification means and why it matters for replacement parts, see the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

Always start with the model number stamped on the mechanism case or baseplate. That number drives every sourcing decision below.

 

How to Find Your Von Duprin Model Number

The model number on an exit device is stamped directly on the mechanism case, which is the metal body that houses the push bar or touchbar mechanism. On rim devices, it is typically visible on the case face near the push bar mounting point. On CVR devices, look at the top case where the latch rod exits the door edge. On mortise devices, the number appears on the case body near the baseplate.

The number will start with the series designation (22, 33, 55, 75, 78, 88, 94, 98, 99) and will be followed by additional digits indicating the specific function code and configuration. That full model number is what you bring to the parts page. For a series-by-series breakdown of what each number in the Von Duprin lineup means, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

Von Duprin 98/99 Series: The Flagship Exit Device

Von Duprin hex dogging key replacement part for 98/99 22 78 88 series exit devices at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin Hex Dogging Key Package (090085). One of the most frequently needed service items across multiple Von Duprin series. OEM part at SecurityParts.com.

 

The 98/99 Series is the most widely specified panic bar hardware in commercial construction. The 98 carries a smooth mechanism case, the 99 a grooved case. Every internal component is interchangeable between the two, which means a 99 Series center case kit works on a 98 Series device without modification. Configurations span rim, surface vertical rod (SVR), concealed vertical rod (CVR), wide door cable (WDC), and the 9875/9975 mortise exit device, which integrates the 7500 mortise lock body into a panic hardware chassis. This versatility is why the series appears in virtually every building type.

Key part categories include center case kits and mounting packages, dogging assemblies (hex dogging shafts, cylinder dogging kits, dogging conversion kits, dogging springs, dogging hooks and adaptors), mechanism cases, push bar guides, baseplate and cover plate hardware, end cap kits, latchbolt pins, control link pin kits, fire kits (LBR/LBL latch retrofit for fire-rated devices), vertical rod and latch assemblies, and the 7500 mortise lock component tree for mortise device configurations.

The electrified options catalog on the 98/99 is the deepest in the Von Duprin line: quiet electric latch retraction (QEL) modular conversion kits, motorized electric latch retraction (MEL), Chexit delayed egress assemblies, standard electric latch retraction (ELR) components, Allegion Connect integration modules, signal switch kits (RX/LX), and electric power transfer hardware. Trim covers lever, thumbturn, thumbpiece, night latch, and dummy trim functions across all configurations.

Browse the 98/99 Series parts catalog or the dedicated Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide for model-specific breakdowns.

 

Von Duprin 22 Series: Grade 1 for Everyday Commercial Openings

The 22 Series carries ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification and handles medium to lower-traffic egress doors, employee entrances, parking stairwells, multi-family corridors, and back-of-house retail openings. Available in rim and SVR configurations.

Parts include center case kits, dogging assemblies, baseplate components, push bar kits, top and bottom latch kits, pullman latch kits, latch case cover kits, end cap kits, fire kits, vertical rod and latch hardware, and the alarm kit disarming label and retainer nut for ALK-equipped devices. Electrified options cover ALK alarm kits, QEL modular conversion kits, MEL motorized latch retraction, and request-to-exit (RX) switch kits including low-current variants. The 22 Series also includes the QM SVR Device Retrofit Kit, which converts older SVR configurations to current specifications without full device replacement.

Browse the 22 Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 33/35A Series: Touchbar Exit Devices

The 33/35A Series replaces the push pad with a continuous touchbar running the full width of the door opening. The 35A adds an integral door position switch. Configurations run from rim and SVR through CVR, WDC, and the 360/E360 control trim variants. This series carries the second-deepest electrified options catalog after the 98/99: Chexit delayed egress, the E7500 electrified mortise lock, pneumatic (PN) options, Allegion Connect, electric power transfers, and signal switches.

Mechanical parts cover center case kits, mechanism case assemblies, dogging components (all variants including hex and cylinder conversion kits), lever arm kits, baseplate and cover plate hardware, cables, EL solenoid and plunger assemblies, EL receptacle connectors, SS housing components, fire latch kits, and push bar hardware. Trim covers lever, lever dummy, night latch, and thumbturn functions.

Browse the 33/35A Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 55 Series: Mortise Exit Devices

The 55 Series integrates a full mortise lock body with panic egress hardware. It's specified on high-security perimeter doors where the architect or security consultant requires mortise lock integrity alongside code-compliant panic exit. Configurations include rim, CVR, and the 5575 mortise device. The 7500 mortise lock body is the core of this series.

Parts go deep into the mortise lock catalog: latch bolt with axle and spring assemblies, latch bolt axles, cam assemblies (right-hand and left-hand), axle retainers, spring anchors, lift members, lift member channels and levers, center case kits and mounting packages, crossbars, end case kits, lever arm kits, vertical rod components, and strikes. The soffit latch assembly and its mounting hardware are also carried in the 55 Series parts catalog.

Browse the 55 Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 75 Series: Standard Commercial Grade 1

The 75 Series is the go-to specification for standard commercial applications: healthcare facilities, retail, offices, and light institutional openings that need Grade 1 reliability without the full institutional depth of the 98/99. Configurations cover rim, SVR, and CVR.

Parts include center case kits, mechanism case assemblies, center case reinforcing brackets, dogging components, baseplate hardware, lever arm kits, end cap kits, push bar components, vertical rod and latch hardware, and fire kits. Electrified options cover ALK alarm kits, MEL motorized latch retraction, QEL modular conversion kits, Allegion Connect, and RX switch kits. Trim covers lever and lever blank, and thumbturn functions.

Browse the 75 Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 78 Series: Narrow-Stile Exit Devices

The 78 Series was engineered specifically for aluminum frame and all-glass storefront doors, where standard-width exit device bodies simply won't fit. The minimum stile width this series accommodates is 1-3/4 inches, which is exactly what commercial lobby glass doors typically require. This is the one series where ordering a component from a different line creates a guaranteed misfit. The form factor is fundamentally different from every other Von Duprin device.

Configurations run from rim and SVR through CVR and WDC. Parts cover center case kits and mounting packages, baseplate assemblies, cover plate hardware, dogging components (all variants), mechanism case parts, lever arm kits, push bar components, vertical rod and latch hardware, fire kits, end cap kits, and the full electrified options catalog including ALK, MEL, QEL modular conversion, Allegion Connect, and RX switch kits.

Browse the 78 Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com. For a deeper look at how rim exit devices work and what parts wear first, see the rim exit devices guide.

 

Von Duprin 88 Series: Heavy-Duty Abuse-Resistant Hardware

Von Duprin 88 series mounting package replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin Mounting Package (900561). Core hardware component for 88 Series and 98/99 Series exit device installations. OEM part at SecurityParts.com.

 

The 88 Series is specified wherever hardware faces deliberate force, misuse, or sustained abuse. Correctional facilities, behavioral health units, secure government floors. It's built heavier throughout, and by design there are no electrified options at the device level. Mechanical integrity is the priority. Configurations include rim, SVR, CVR, and the 8875 mortise device.

The parts catalog is the most mechanically detailed in the Von Duprin line: crossbar kits and reinforcement kits, lever arm kits and axles, axle security pins, dog screws (standard packs and 10-packs), crossbar tube attaching wedges and rings, wedgetite screws, end case kits (multiple configurations), end case springs and spring stop kits, vertical rod kits for standard door heights plus extension kits for 8 to 10 foot and 10 to 12 foot door applications, soffit latch assemblies and mounting packages, bottom guide packages, release guide covers, plunger release brackets, rod connector rivets, backplate conversion kits, and strikes including rim strikes, vertical rod top and bottom strikes, and fire-rated bottom strikes.

Browse the 88 Series parts catalog or the Von Duprin 88 Series buyers guide at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 94/95 Series: Concealed Vertical Rod and Mortise

The 94/95 Series handles openings where surface-mounted rods aren't acceptable for aesthetic or security reasons. Hotel corridors, premium healthcare interiors, high-end commercial spaces. The hardware is concealed inside the door. Configurations cover the 94/9547 CVR device and the 9575 mortise device.

Parts are concentrated in latch, rod, and concealment hardware: top and bottom latch kits, latch retrofit kits for non-EL applications, latch mounting bracket kits, latch linkage pin retaining rings, latch link pins and springs, bolt return springs, extension rod kits adjustable from 8 feet 4 inches to 10 feet, ratchet release kits, ratchet lever springs and release screws, rod connecting screws, baseplate link pins, fire latch components including the auxiliary fire latch strike hole plug, center cases, end cap packages, and wood door mounting packages. Electrified options include the E7500 electrified mortise lock and QEL.

Browse the 94/95 Series parts catalog or the Von Duprin 94/95 Series exit device parts guide.

 

Von Duprin Electric Strike Parts: Four Series

Von Duprin manufactures four electric strike series, each targeting a different application and lock compatibility range. Understanding which series applies to the installed hardware is the first step before ordering any electric strike replacement part.

  • 5100 Series: Medium-duty electric strike for cylindrical lock and deadlatch applications on interior and exterior doors. Not fire rated. Browse the 5100 Series parts catalog or the Von Duprin 5100 electric strike parts guide.
  • 6100 Series: Heavy-duty stainless steel electric strike for rim exit device applications only. UL10C fire rated up to 3 hours on single doors. Standard 24VDC fail secure configuration. Browse the 6100 Series parts catalog or the Von Duprin 6100 electric strike parts guide.
  • 6200 Series: The most versatile series in the Von Duprin electric strike lineup. 17 configurations cover cylindrical lock, mortise lock, deadlatch, and rim exit device applications. Fire rated. The correct specification when the installed hardware is anything other than a rim exit device requiring the 6100.
  • 6300 Series: Heavy-duty surface-mount electric strike for rim exit device applications where flush frame mounting is not possible. Browse the 6300 Series parts catalog.

Parts across all four series include box assemblies (organized by fail mode and voltage), solenoid assemblies, strike plates, cover kits, and mounting hardware. For a complete guide covering all four Von Duprin electric strike series and how to choose between them, see the Von Duprin electric strike parts guide. Browse the full electric strikes catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

54 Series Mullions

The 54 Series Mullions are the center post components for double door openings where a vertical rod device needs a strike point at the door center rather than the frame. Available in fixed and removable configurations with dedicated parts covering mounting hardware, locking assemblies, and strike components. If the opening uses a double door configuration with a center mullion and a Von Duprin vertical rod device, the 54 Series provides the mullion parts to support it.

 

Most Commonly Replaced Von Duprin Parts Across All Series

Across the full Von Duprin lineup, a small set of components accounts for the majority of service calls. Knowing which parts fail most often reduces diagnostic time and keeps the right inventory on hand.

  • Hex dogging keys and dogging assemblies: The most universal service item across the 98/99, 22, 33/35A, 75, 78, and 88 Series. Dogging components wear or get lost regularly on high-traffic openings. Part 090085 (hex dog key, pack of 10) is the most ordered single part across multiple series.
  • Center case kits: The internal mechanism housing. Fails after sustained high-cycle use. Series-specific and configuration-specific - always confirm the installed series and configuration (rim, SVR, CVR) before ordering.
  • End cap kits: Damaged by impact or forced entry attempts. Available across all exit device series. Series-specific.
  • Latch assemblies: Wear on high-use openings. Fire kits with LBR/LBL latches are required on fire-rated assemblies. Non-fire-rated latches cannot be substituted on fire door assemblies.
  • Dogging springs and shafts: Fail with heavy use on dogged openings. Hex dogging and cylinder dogging variants are not interchangeable.
  • Vertical rod kits: Wear on SVR/CVR installations. Height-specific on the 88 Series (standard, 8-10 foot, 10-12 foot door extensions).

For a full discussion of why OEM replacement parts are critical on ANSI Grade 1 certified hardware, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Getting the Right Von Duprin Part Without the Guesswork

The size of the Von Duprin catalog is exactly why model-specific sourcing matters so much. Security Parts organizes the full Von Duprin parts catalog by series, then by model within each series, then by component category within each model. Interactive parts diagrams on every model page let you confirm a component visually against the actual device assembly before anything goes to cart.

The platform carries legacy models alongside current-generation hardware. Commercial buildings aren't running uniform recent-vintage hardware across all openings, and the cross-generation depth at Security Parts reflects that reality. For a practical overview of every active Von Duprin series and how their applications differ, see the Von Duprin panic bar selection guide. For the full exit device catalog by series, see the exit devices catalog.

Same-day shipping applies to stocked components from multiple US warehouses. Free shipping on orders over $450. Compatibility questions handled before the order ships at 845-935-0301. Contact the team at SecurityParts.com/contactus.

 

Conclusion

Von Duprin panic hardware has been protecting commercial egress since 1908. The Von Duprin parts catalog that supports it today is one of the deepest in commercial door hardware, spanning eleven active exit device series, four electric strike lines, and a full range of electrified upgrade options. Getting the right component starts with the model number on the device, then the correct series page, then the visual diagram that confirms the part before ordering. For help comparing series before selecting a part, see the commercial exit device parts guide. Start at the full Von Duprin parts catalog, select your series, and use the diagram to get it right the first time.

 

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All series descriptions, part categories, and compatibility details are verified against live SecurityParts.com product pages and official Von Duprin documentation. For Von Duprin parts identification and same-day shipping on stocked components, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

Schlage L Series Parts and Diagrams: The Complete Sourcing Guide for Commercial Mortise Locks

The Schlage L Series is the most widely specified commercial mortise lock platform in North America. It runs in hospitals, government buildings, universities, schools, and high-security facilities where the opening needs to do more than just lock, including manage access by function, support electrified control, and hold up under daily high-cycle use. Maintaining these devices correctly requires knowing which component belongs to which model, which parts cross-reference across functions, and where to source them accurately. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams catalog covers over sixty distinct model functions, making accurate component identification the first requirement of any successful repair or maintenance program.

 

Quick Answer

  • The Schlage L Series is a heavy-duty ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Grade 1 commercial mortise lock. One chassis body supports over 60 locking functions by varying internal components and trim.
  • Function codes map directly to model numbers: L9010 (passage), L9070/L9071 (classroom), L9080/L9082 (storeroom/institutional), L9090-L9095 (electrified EL/EU).
  • Parts fall into seven categories: armor fronts, lock case components, thumbturns, strikes, rose and escutcheon trim, cylinders, and electrical components.
  • The most commonly replaced components are armor fronts, case cover screws, and strikes. ADA and standard thumbturns are not interchangeable even when they look identical.
  • Browse all available OEM parts at the Schlage L Series parts catalog at SecurityParts.com.

 

What the Schlage L Series Actually Covers

The L Series is a heavy-duty mortise lock line built around a single chassis that accommodates dozens of locking functions. That modularity is why it dominates institutional specifications. The same lock body supports passage, storeroom, classroom, corridor, privacy, institutional, and electrified configurations, with trim and internal components varied per function rather than requiring a completely different unit for each application.

The model numbering tells you the function. Every number in the Schlage L Series parts and diagrams catalog maps to a specific locking behavior:

 

L9000 Series Function Reference

  • L9010 - Passage latch, the simplest function, no locking from either side
  • L9025 / L9026 - Exit and communicating functions for cross-corridor control
  • L9040 / L9044 - Entrance and office functions with key outside, always free inside
  • L9050 / L9056 - Entrance and office functions with automatic unlocking options
  • L9060 / L9066 - Corridor functions with night latch capability
  • L9070 / L9071 - Classroom functions covering exterior-only lockdown (L9070) and interior/exterior lockdown (L9071). This distinction is critical in K-12 and higher education specifications.
  • L9076 / L9077 - Classroom security variants with additional cylinder configuration options
  • L9080 / L9082 - Storeroom and institutional functions where the outside lever is always fixed
  • L9090 to L9095 - Electrified EL/EU variants for electronic locking and unlocking, covered in the electrified section below
  • L9460 to L9466 - Adds a deadbolt to the mortise lock body for openings requiring both a latch and a deadbolt in a single unit

 

LM Series: Multi-Point Configurations

The LM Series extends the standard L Series into 2-point and 3-point latch configurations. LM9210 through LM9295 cover 2-point versions of the core functions. LM9310 through LM9380 cover 3-point versions. Multi-point latching is specified on high-security openings, oversized doors, and applications where single-point engagement is insufficient for the door size or security requirement.

Understanding which model is installed before ordering any part is not optional. An L9070 and an L9071 differ internally in ways that affect which cam assembly, which lever chassis, and which cylinder configuration applies. Ordering by function description rather than confirmed model number is how wrong-part errors happen on these devices. The model number is stamped on the lock case and is visible after removing the trim.

 

Schlage L Series Parts and Diagrams: Component Categories

The parts structure of the Schlage L Series organizes into logical categories that correspond directly to how the lock body is assembled. Knowing these categories makes finding a specific replacement component significantly faster whether you are working from a physical device or a spec page. All parts are available at the Schlage L Series parts catalog.

 

Armor Fronts and Faceplates

Schlage L Series latch and auxiliary latch armor front replacement part 09-669 at SecurityParts.com

Schlage L Series Armor Front 09-669 (latch and auxiliary latch configuration). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

Armor fronts are the components visible on the door edge. They must match the exact latch configuration of the installed lock. Schlage produces four armor front variants for the L Series:

  • 09-669 - Latch and auxiliary latch (most common on standard entrance and office functions)
  • 09-670 - Latch and auxiliary latch, alternate trim configuration
  • 09-671 - Deadbolt only (for L9460 deadbolt functions)
  • 09-672 - Latch, auxiliary latch, and deadbolt combined (for multi-bolt applications)

Ordering the wrong armor front creates a faceplate gap or misalignment at the door edge that compromises both appearance and function. Always confirm the latch configuration before selecting an armor front. For a broader view of how mortise lock components work together, see the mortise lock parts guide.

 

Lock Case and Case Assembly Components

Schlage L Series case cover screw L583-454 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Schlage L Series Case Cover Screw (L583-454). One of the most frequently replaced service items on high-use institutional openings. OEM part at SecurityParts.com.

 

The lock case houses the latch mechanism, the deadbolt where applicable, and the cam that transmits lever rotation into bolt movement. Case cover screws (L583-454) and case mounting screws sit in this category and are among the most frequently needed service items on high-use institutional openings. The cam assembly inside the case is function-specific and must match the installed model number exactly.

 

Thumbturns and Interior Control Elements

The L Series catalog carries standard thumbturns, ADA thumbturns, and large ADA thumbturns across multiple finishes. The emergency button and emergency key screwdriver tool for privacy indicators are also grouped here.

ADA thumbturns (the 09-544 series) are not interchangeable with standard thumbturns (the 09-509 series) even though they appear physically similar. The ADA variant has a larger grip diameter to meet lever force requirements under ADA accessibility guidelines. Confirm whether the opening requires ADA compliance before ordering any thumbturn replacement.

Strikes

Schlage L Series ANSI plastic strike box K510-066 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Schlage L Series ANSI Plastic Strike Box (K510-066). OEM replacement at SecurityParts.com.

 

Strikes are the frame-side receptacles. The L Series uses T-square corner strikes, flat square corner strikes, rabbeted strikes, and deadbolt strikes specific to the L9460 series. Strike selection depends on door prep, frame material, and whether the application includes a deadbolt function:

 

  • T-square corner strikes (10-072 series) - Standard for most L Series applications on hollow metal frames
  • Flat square corner strikes - For specific frame preparations where the T-configuration does not apply
  • Rabbeted strike kit (10-075) - For rabbeted frame applications unique to the L9000 mortise lock series
  • Deadbolt strikes (10-144 / 10-145) - For SK1/SL1 trim configurations on L9460-L9466 deadbolt functions
  • ANSI plastic strike box (K510-066) - Standard dust box for all T-strike configurations
  • Strike screw pack (C203-736) - Replacement fasteners for ANSI strike installations

For fire-rated door assemblies, confirm that the strike carries the appropriate UL listing. Fire-rated assemblies have specific strike requirements under NFPA 80. For full fire door hardware compliance context, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

 

Rose, Escutcheon, and Trim Assembly Components

These are the exterior and interior face hardware components that support the lever and protect the cylinder. Rose and escutcheon components are finish-sensitive, meaning the replacement must match the installed finish code exactly to maintain architectural consistency. For L Series applications, FSIC (full-size interchangeable core) prep requires specific blocking rings that vary by function and door thickness. Confirm the blocking ring dimension from the cylinder length chart before ordering any cylinder-related trim.

 

The Electrified L Series: EL/EU Functions and Their Parts

The electrified variants of the L Series, the L9090 through L9095 range and the LM9290 through LM9295 multi-point equivalents, are where parts identification becomes most critical and most often done incorrectly. EL/EU stands for Electrically Locking/Unlocking. These functions allow the outside lever, inside lever, or both to be controlled by an external signal, typically from an access control panel, a fire alarm interface, or a remote switch station.

The cylinder configuration varies significantly across models:

  • L9090 - No cylinder on either side, relying entirely on electrical control
  • L9092 - Adds an outside cylinder while keeping electrical control of the outside lever
  • L9093 / L9095 - Involve both levers with cylinder options including double cylinder configurations

The electrified chassis assembly, the electrical components inside the case, and the cylinder collar configurations all differ between these models. A replacement part for an L9090 is not the same as one for an L9092, even though the two models are externally similar. Confirming the exact model number stamped on the lock body before sourcing any electrified component is the only reliable approach.

For motorized latch retraction variants of the L Series, which add electric latch retraction capability to standard L Series functions, see the dedicated guides for the Schlage L9580 motorized latch retraction and the Schlage L9692EU motorized latch retraction. For access control integration context and how EL/EU functions connect to broader access control systems, see the access control and commercial door hardware integration guide.

All ANSI standards and Grade 1 certification requirements for the L Series are covered in the ANSI/BHMA door hardware standards guide.

 

Most Commonly Replaced Schlage L Series Parts

On high-traffic institutional openings, certain L Series components wear or fail at predictably higher rates than others. Knowing which parts are most likely to need replacement reduces service call time and keeps spares inventory focused on the right components.

Schlage L Series ANSI strike screw pack C203-736 replacement part at SecurityParts.com

Schlage L Series ANSI Strike Screw Pack (C203-736). One of the most frequently replaced small components across all L Series installations. OEM part at SecurityParts.com.

 

High-Frequency Replacement Parts

  • Case cover screws (L583-454) - Loosen with high-cycle use on institutional openings. Among the most frequently ordered L Series parts.
  • Armor fronts (09-669 through 09-672) - Damaged by impact or corrosion. Must match exact latch configuration.
  • Strike screw pack (C203-736) - Lost or stripped during strike replacement or door adjustment.
  • ANSI plastic strike box (K510-066) - Cracked or worn on openings with heavy door use.
  • Thumbturns - Worn or damaged on privacy functions. Confirm ADA vs standard before ordering.

For OEM sourcing guidance and why aftermarket substitutes create risks on precision-fit components like cam assemblies and armor fronts, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Why Security Parts Is the Right Platform for Schlage L Series Parts

Sourcing L Series components through a general hardware distributor or a catalog not built around commercial mortise locks creates a specific and consistent problem: parts are listed by name without diagrams, compatibility is stated in general terms, and staff cannot confirm whether a specific strike, armor front, or chassis component applies to the exact model and function installed on the door.

Security Parts solves this at the catalog level. The Schlage L Series parts page organizes every supported model with parts sorted by component category within each model, and interactive diagrams that show precisely where each component sits in the assembly. Before anything goes into the cart, the part can be confirmed visually against the device being serviced.

On an institutional opening where a wrong-part order delays a fire door inspection or leaves a classroom lock non-functional during a school day, that confirmation step has real operational value. This is not a convenience feature. It is what separates a sourcing process built for commercial hardware professionals from one built for general consumers.

The L Series sits within a broader Schlage commercial hardware catalog that includes the ALX Series cylindrical locks, and the Schlage lock parts catalog spanning all product lines, all organized with the same model-specific structure. A facility running Schlage hardware across multiple product lines can source from one platform without switching between catalogs or distributors for different lock types.

For facilities maintaining cylindrical locks or deadbolts alongside L Series mortise hardware, those catalogs are structured identically. For key system context covering how cylinders, interchangeable cores, and keying options connect to L Series maintenance, see the Schlage key systems guide. For commercial mortise lock application context across all brands, see the commercial mortise locks guide.

Same-day shipping applies to stocked components from multiple US warehouses. For compatibility questions before placing an order, the team is reachable at 845-935-0301. Contact the team directly at SecurityParts.com/contactus.

 

Conclusion

The Schlage L Series is technically demanding to maintain correctly. Over sixty distinct model functions, multi-point variants, electrified configurations, ADA-specific components, and finish-sensitive trim items all require precise identification before any replacement is ordered. The Schlage L Series parts and diagrams page at SecurityParts.com makes that process accurate and fast, connecting the model number on the physical device directly to the components that apply to it.

Common parts ship same business day from US warehouses. Pre-order compatibility support is available by phone at 845-935-0301. For any facility managing Schlage L Series hardware at scale, that sourcing infrastructure is what keeps doors operational and compliant across the full service life of the hardware. Browse the full L Series catalog or the broader mortise locks section at SecurityParts.com.

 

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Schlage, Von Duprin, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All function codes, part numbers, and compatibility details are verified against live SecurityParts.com product pages and official Schlage L Series documentation. For L Series part identification and same-day shipping on stocked components, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

How Do Cal Royal Panic Bars and Exit Devices Compare to Other Brands?

When a project calls for panic hardware, the choice between Cal Royal and the brands that dominate institutional specifications comes down to more than price. Cal Royal has been manufacturing exit devices since 1983, and their Grade 1 certified lines are legitimate commercial hardware. But performance on a spec sheet and performance over a 15-year service life in a high-traffic building are two different conversations. This guide puts Cal Royal panic bars and exit devices directly against the leading commercial exit device brands, covering ANSI grading, fire ratings, retrofit compatibility, parts availability, and the factors that matter most to contractors, locksmiths, and facility managers making sourcing decisions that last.

 

Quick Answer

  • Cal Royal panic bars are ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certified on the 7700 and 9800 Series. They meet the same compliance threshold as the leading brands on paper.
  • Cal Royal's strongest advantage is retrofit compatibility. The 7700 Series fits Von Duprin 98/99 hole patterns. The 9800 fits Sargent 8800 patterns. Neither requires door modification.
  • The gap shows up after installation in parts availability, electrified integration depth, and long-term service infrastructure. This is where institutional-spec brands create meaningful separation.
  • For component-level service on Von Duprin devices, replacing the failing part is faster and less costly than replacing the device with a Cal Royal unit. The Von Duprin parts catalog at SecurityParts.com covers current and legacy models with same-day shipping.
  • Browse the full exit devices catalog by brand and series at SecurityParts.com.

 

Cal Royal Exit Devices: Series Overview and Market Position

Cal Royal does not position itself against the leading institutional exit device brands on specification depth or premium commercial architecture. Their strategy is more precise than that, and it is a practical fit when applied to the right project.

 

Cal Royal Grade 1 Series

Their two strongest Grade 1 lines are the 7700 Series and the 9800 Series. Both carry ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 certification, both are UL listed for panic and fire exit hardware up to a 3-hour rating, and both meet ADA requirements at 5 lbs of opening force.

  • Cal Royal 7700 Series: Rim and surface vertical rod configurations. Built to retrofit Von Duprin 98/99 Series openings using the existing hole pattern. No additional door preparation required for a direct swap.
  • Cal Royal 9800 Series: Heavy-duty line designed to replace Sargent 8800 Series installations without door modification.
  • Cal Royal 2200 Series: Retrofits Sargent 2828 hardware.
  • Cal Royal GLS7700: Narrow-stile aluminum and glass storefront door variant at Grade 1. Covers openings where standard rail geometry does not fit.
  • Cal Royal 5000 Series: Drops to Grade 2 for lighter commercial and institutional applications where full-spec pricing is harder to justify.

That retrofit compatibility is where Cal Royal earns its market position honestly. A building replacing aging hardware at scale can use Cal Royal devices without additional door preparation, which reduces labor cost significantly on large projects. Their warehouses in California, Florida, and Texas support regional distribution, and their products have been installed in properties including Marriott and Hilton Hotels. These are not marginal credentials.

 

Cal Royal and NFPA 101 / IBC Compliance

Both NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code) and the International Building Code (IBC) require panic hardware on doors serving occupancies above specific thresholds. Cal Royal's Grade 1 lines carry UL listing for both panic hardware (UL 305) and fire exit hardware (ULC 10C), which satisfies the requirements an authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) will inspect for on fire-rated door assemblies. For a full breakdown of fire door hardware requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide. For ANSI grade definitions and what Grade 1 means in practice, see the ANSI/BHMA hardware standards guide.

 

Cal Royal Panic Bars vs Other Brands: Where Each Leads and Falls Short

Cal Royal panic bars vs other brands exit device comparison at SecurityParts.com

Commercial exit devices by series and configuration. Browse the full exit devices catalog at SecurityParts.com.

Understanding the real differences requires looking at each comparison variable without the marketing language.

 

ANSI Certification and Fire Rating

This is where Cal Royal holds its ground. The 7700 and 9800 both hit the same Grade 1 and 3-hour UL ceiling as the leading brands on their comparable lines. If a specification requires ANSI A156.3 Grade 1 with UL fire-exit hardware listing, Cal Royal qualifies. On paper, the compliance boxes are checked across all major brands in this category. For guidance on panic hardware code requirements and application context, see the panic hardware for commercial doors guide.

 

Retrofit Compatibility

Retrofit compatibility goes to Cal Royal cleanly. No other brand engineers their product lines as explicitly around fitting existing hole patterns from other manufacturers. If budget constraints are real and the opening is already prepped for a 98/99 device, the Cal Royal 7700 is a technically valid replacement path that does not require modifying the door. The Von Duprin 98/99 series is the primary retrofit target for the 7700.

 

Manufacturing Depth and Institutional Track Record

This is where the leading institutional brands create meaningful separation. The category leader invented the first self-releasing fire exit device and has been refining that product family for over a century. That history translates into:

  • Field-tested performance data across millions of installations
  • Parts catalog depth that spans current and legacy generations
  • Service documentation thorough enough for facility managers to maintain hardware independently
  • Modular electrified options including quiet electric latch retraction, building system integration, and security indicators that can be added or upgraded in the field

Cal Royal offers electric latch retraction and signal switches on their Grade 1 lines, but the customization depth, field upgradeability, and integration sophistication of the leading institutional brands is not matched. For access-controlled facilities or buildings planning electrified hardware upgrades, that gap matters at specification time. See the Von Duprin exit device series comparison for a breakdown of how series configurations differ within one brand's lineup.

 

Parts Availability Over the Service Life

Parts availability over the service life of the hardware is the comparison that most spec sheets do not capture and that most building operators feel most acutely. Leading brand replacement components, from dogging assemblies and center case kits to latch bolts and end caps, are stocked nationally by commercial hardware distributors. If a 98/99 Series device develops a problem seven years into service, the replacement part is findable, diagrammed, and shippable within the same business day.

Cal Royal's parts ecosystem is thinner. Service documentation is less widely distributed across the distribution chain. A facility manager sourcing a specific Cal Royal component on a timeline tied to a fire door inspection will have fewer sourcing options. On a 15-unit installation, that is an inconvenience. On a 150-opening institutional facility, it is a maintenance liability.

For a detailed look at why OEM parts sourcing matters for long-term hardware performance, see the OEM vs aftermarket commercial door hardware guide.

 

Other Grade 1 Brands in the Comparison

The other major Grade 1 exit device brands sit closer to the institutional market leaders than to Cal Royal on specification depth. Their comparable Series carry Grade 1 certifications with established parts ecosystems. Neither has built explicit retrofit compatibility into their product design the way Cal Royal has, but both offer longer service infrastructure support than Cal Royal at the top of their lines.

 

When Replacing a Von Duprin Device with Cal Royal Makes Sense

The retrofit argument for Cal Royal applies to full device replacement on a budget-constrained project. It does not apply to component-level maintenance on a Von Duprin device that is otherwise functional.

When a 98/99 Series device develops a worn dogging spring, a cracked end cap, or a failing latch mechanism, the answer is not to replace the device with a Cal Royal unit. The answer is to replace the specific part. The Von Duprin 98/99 Series exit device parts guide covers every replaceable component with part numbers and installation context.

The same applies across the full Von Duprin lineup:

  • 22 Series for medium-traffic openings
  • 55 Series for standard commercial mortise applications
  • 78 Series for narrow-stile aluminum doors
  • 88 Series for heavy-duty and high-security environments

All series have dedicated model pages with parts organized by component type. For an overview of how Von Duprin series differ from each other by function and application, see the Von Duprin parts guide. For rim device-specific context covering how rim exit devices work and what parts wear first, see the rim exit devices guide.

 

Why Security Parts Is the Right Source When Von Duprin Is the Specification

Sourcing Von Duprin components through a general hardware distributor means navigating catalogs that were not designed for model-first service work. Part numbers without diagrams, incomplete compatibility notes, and staff who cannot confirm cross-generation applicability are all common friction points that add time to every repair.

Security Parts has operated in commercial door hardware since 2001, which means it supports not just current-generation Von Duprin hardware but the legacy models still running in buildings that have not refreshed their inventory in a decade. Every supported series has its own model page. Every parts page includes an interactive diagram confirming visual fit before the order goes through.

Von Duprin 98/99 hex dog key replacement part for exit device maintenance at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin dogging key (090085), one of the most frequently replaced small components across the 22, 55, 78, 88, and 98/99 Series. OEM part available at SecurityParts.com.

 

When a service call on a panic device leads to discovering a failing door closer on the same leaf, or an electric strike downstream in the access control sequence that needs replacing, those components are in the same catalog, organized the same way, arriving on the same timeline. That continuity reduces vendor coordination on projects where multiple openings need simultaneous attention.

Common Von Duprin components ship same business day from US warehouses. Free shipping applies to orders over $450. For compatibility questions before placing an order, the team is reachable at 845-935-0301. Browse the full commercial exit device parts guide for component-level detail across all major exit device series, or go directly to the Von Duprin 88 Series guide for the heavy-duty specification. For direct access to the Von Duprin 98/99 series, see the 98/99 Series parts catalog. Contact us at SecurityParts.com/contactus for pre-order support.

 

Conclusion

Cal Royal panic bars and exit devices are legitimate Grade 1 hardware with a specific and genuine strength: retrofit compatibility with Von Duprin and Sargent installations that reduces replacement cost without compromising compliance. For budget-sensitive projects where full device replacement is the scope, that matters.

Where Cal Royal loses ground is in the service life that follows installation, specifically in parts availability, electrified integration options, and the institutional depth of knowledge that keeps a large hardware fleet running predictably for twenty years. The leading institutional brands hold that advantage across every dimension that facility managers and contractors encounter after the initial installation.

For component-level maintenance on Von Duprin devices, Security Parts offers the model-specific parts catalog, same-day shipping, and pre-order support that keeps commercial doors compliant and operational without delays. Browse the exit devices catalog by brand and series to find the right parts for your installation.

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All brand comparisons, ANSI grading references, and retrofit compatibility details are verified against current manufacturer documentation and SecurityParts.com's active product catalog. For Von Duprin exit device parts and pre-order compatibility support, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

Von Duprin 575/2 Mortise Lock Strike: Specifications, Compatibility, and When to Use It

The Von Duprin 575/2 mortise lock strike is the optional pairs strike for double door openings on 1-3/4 inch wood doors. It receives the latch bolt from the active leaf's Von Duprin mortise exit device when both doors close. Where the standard 575 covers single door configurations, the 575/2 addresses the specific geometry of a double door pair with a coordinator and astragal. Ordering the wrong strike produces a door that fails to latch, rattles in the frame, or creates a compliance gap.

 

Quick Answer

  • The Von Duprin 575/2 mortise lock strike is for double door pairs on 1-3/4 inch wood doors with a coordinator and astragal. It is not interchangeable with the standard 575.
  • Compatible with Von Duprin mortise exit device series: 55, 88, 94/95, and 98/9975 (all using the 7500 mortise lock body).
  • Strike face dimensions: 1-1/2 inches by 4-7/8 inches. The standard 575 strike face is 1-25/32 inches by 4-7/8 inches - do not substitute one for the other.
  • A coordinator is required to ensure the inactive leaf closes before the active leaf. Without it, the bolt has no proper seat.
  • The part number is 575-2. Order from the Von Duprin 575/2 product page at SecurityParts.com.

 

Von Duprin 575/2 Mortise Lock Strike Specifications

Von Duprin 575/2 mortise lock strike for double door pair applications at SecurityParts.com

Von Duprin 575-2 mortise lock strike. OEM replacement available at SecurityParts.com.

 

  • Part number: 575-2
  • Strike type: Mortise lock strike (optional pairs strike)
  • Door material: Wood door only
  • Door thickness: 1-3/4 inch
  • Door configuration: Double door pair with coordinator and astragal
  • Strike face dimensions: 1-1/2 inches by 4-7/8 inches
  • Compatible mortise lock body: 7500 mortise lock
  • Compatible series: Von Duprin 55, 88, 94/95, 98/9975
  • Available finishes: US3 (Bright Brass), US4 (Satin Brass), US10 (Satin Bronze), US26 (Polished Chrome), US26D (Satin Chrome), US28 (Satin Aluminum), 313 (Duranodic Dark Bronze)

When ordering, confirm the finish code matches the existing hardware on the inactive leaf. Finish mismatch is a common ordering error on replacement jobs. For guidance on ANSI finish codes and matching, see the commercial door hardware finish guide.

 

What the 575/2 Actually Does Inside a Mortise Exit Device Assembly

Understanding where this part lives in the assembly makes ordering it correctly much easier.

A Von Duprin mortise exit device houses the 7500 mortise lock body inside the door itself, recessed into a pocket cut into the door edge. When the push bar depresses, the mechanism retracts both the latch bolt and the deadlatch simultaneously. The strike plate mounted on the door frame or inactive leaf is what receives those bolts when the door closes.

On a single door, that strike is on the frame. On a double door pair, the active leaf closes against the inactive leaf, and the 575/2 is what sits on the inactive leaf to receive the active door's latch. The coordinator sequences the closing order so the inactive leaf always closes first. Without that sequence, the inactive leaf blocks the active door from closing into the strike. Without the correct strike on that inactive leaf, the bolt has no proper seat.

The "/2" in the part number is not a revision indicator. It specifically means pairs. That single character in the part number is what separates a correct specification from a component that physically will not fit the opening.

 

What Is a Coordinator and Why the 575/2 Requires One

A coordinator is a mechanical device mounted at the top of a double door frame that controls the closing sequence of both leaves. Its job is to ensure the inactive leaf always closes and latches before the active leaf swings shut.

This sequence is critical because the inactive leaf carries the 575/2 strike on its edge. If the active leaf closes first, it physically blocks the inactive leaf from reaching its closed position. When that happens, neither leaf latches correctly, and the 575/2 has no bolt to receive.

On fire-rated openings, a coordinator is mandatory. NFPA 80 requires that both leaves of a paired fire door assembly latch independently upon closing. A missing or broken coordinator is one of the most common fire door compliance failures found during AHJ inspections. For a full explanation of fire door hardware requirements, see the commercial door fire rating guide.

The astragal seals the gap between the two leaves and provides the surface the active leaf closes against. The 575/2's narrower strike face (1-1/2 inches versus the 575's 1-25/32 inches) reflects the geometry of the inactive leaf edge where the astragal is present.

 

Series Compatibility: Where the 575/2 Mortise Lock Strike Applies

The 575/2 is the appropriate optional strike for double door pair configurations across these Von Duprin mortise exit device series:

  • Von Duprin 55 Series - the standard commercial mortise exit device for a wide range of interior and exterior openings. On paired 55 Series installations with a 1-3/4 inch wood inactive leaf, the 575/2 is the correct strike. See the Von Duprin 55 Series parts guide.
  • Von Duprin 88 Series - heavy-duty, abuse-resistant specification for correctional facilities, government buildings, and high-security openings. The 88 Series uses the same 7500 mortise lock body, so the 575/2 applies identically on paired configurations. See the Von Duprin 88 Series buyers guide.
  • Von Duprin 94/95 Series - the mortise device variant of the INPACT recessed push pad line. On paired 1-3/4 inch wood door applications, the 575/2 is the correct inactive leaf strike. See the Von Duprin 94/95 Series parts guide.
  • Von Duprin 98/99 Series mortise device (9875/9975) - the same double door pair application on this series requires the 575/2 as the inactive leaf strike. See the Von Duprin 98/99 Series parts guide.

The common thread across all four is the 7500 mortise lock body and the bolt geometry it produces. The 575/2 is sized and positioned for that specific bolt pattern. If you are working with a device that uses a different mortise lock body, verify strike dimensions before assuming this part applies. For a full comparison of Von Duprin series and their configurations, see the Von Duprin exit device series comparison.

 

575 vs 575/2: The Specification Decision That Cannot Be Made by Eye

These two parts look similar. They serve the same functional role. The difference is entirely in the door configuration they are designed for, and that difference is not adjustable in the field.

The 575 is the standard single door strike. It fits 1-3/4 inch and 2-1/4 inch single doors, plus 2-1/4 inch double door applications with a coordinator. Its strike face measures 1-25/32 inches by 4-7/8 inches.

The 575/2 is the optional pair strike for double door applications at 1-3/4 inch door thickness, where the opening uses a coordinator and astragal. Its strike face is 1-1/2 inches by 4-7/8 inches - nominally narrower, which reflects the geometry of the inactive leaf edge where it is installed.

The decision rule is clear. If the active leaf of a 1-3/4 inch double door pair runs a Von Duprin 55, 88, 94/95, or 9975 mortise device, the inactive leaf needs the 575/2. Every other configuration points to the 575 or a different strike entirely.

Ordering by description instead of by part number and confirmed door configuration is where most 575/2 errors originate. For deeper context on mortise lock hardware and how strikes fit into the full assembly, see the mortise lock parts guide and the commercial mortise locks guide.

 

How to Identify and Order the Correct 575/2 Replacement

If you are replacing a worn or damaged 575/2 on an existing installation, confirm these four parameters before placing the order:

  1. Door configuration: Double door pair only. Single door installations do not use the 575/2.
  2. Door material and thickness: Wood door, 1-3/4 inch. Steel or hollow metal door applications require a different strike.
  3. Coordinator present: Confirm the coordinator is installed and functional. A worn coordinator that no longer sequences the closing order correctly will cause the same symptoms as a mismatched strike.
  4. Finish code: Match the finish code to the existing hardware. Order the specific ANSI finish, not just the part number, to ensure a visual match on the inactive leaf.

If you are unsure whether the installed device is compatible with the 575/2, locate the series number on the mechanism case label of the active leaf's mortise exit device. If it reads 55, 88, 94/95, or 98/9975, and the door is a 1-3/4 inch wood door pair with a coordinator, the 575/2 is the correct strike. Call 845-935-0301 before ordering if you need compatibility confirmation.

 

Why Security Parts Is the Right Place to Source the 575/2

Hardware this specific requires a sourcing process that is equally specific. General distributors list the 575 and 575/2 side by side with minimal context on which configuration each applies to. When a contractor or facility manager is moving fast, that ambiguity leads directly to a wrong-part order, a return, a delay, and a door that stays non-compliant longer than it should.

Security Parts structures this differently. The 575/2 product page presents the part against its confirmed series compatibility, door thickness, and material requirement so you can verify fit before ordering.

 

Organized the Way Field Professionals Think

Every series on the platform has its own model page with parts sorted by component category. If you are servicing a 55 Series or 88 Series mortise device installation and need to confirm which strike applies, the exit devices section and mortise locks catalog are organized so you move from series to model to part without navigating through unrelated hardware.

Interactive diagrams on each supported series page show where the 575/2 sits in the complete assembly. That visual confirmation is what prevents the wrong-part order that costs time on both ends of the transaction.

 

Two Decades of Commercial Hardware Knowledge

Security Parts has operated in the commercial door hardware market since 2001. That history means the catalog supports not just current-generation Von Duprin hardware but legacy models still running in buildings that have not refreshed their hardware inventory in a decade or more. Part number cross-references across generations, compatibility notes across series, and the ability to confirm whether a current part number applies to an older device are all built into how the platform works. That is not something a general hardware distributor provides.

 

Shipping Timelines That Work for Compliance Deadlines

When a double door pair is out of compliance because the inactive leaf is missing its strike or running a mismatched one, the correction is time-sensitive. Common components including the 575/2 are stocked across multiple US warehouses. Most orders process the same business day. UPS ground is standard, with expedited options when the timeline requires it. Free shipping applies to orders of $450 and above.

 

Pre-Order Support That Prevents Post-Order Problems

The team is reachable at 845-935-0301 and sales@securityparts.com. Compatibility questions, cross-references on older devices, and confirmation that a part number applies to a specific installation are handled before the order goes through. That conversation costs nothing and prevents the return that costs everyone time.

 

Everything for the Opening, Not Just One Component

A service call on a double door pair rarely ends at the strike. The inspection often reveals worn mortise lock components on the active leaf, a failing door closer, or an electric strike downstream that needs attention. All of it is in the same catalog, sourced from one place. For the full Von Duprin parts catalog, see the Von Duprin parts guide.

 

Conclusion

The Von Duprin 575/2 mortise lock strike is a precise component for a precise application. Double door pairs, 1-3/4 inch wood doors, coordinator-equipped openings, Von Duprin mortise series 55, 88, 94/95, or 9875/9975. Confirming those four parameters before ordering eliminates every wrong-part outcome this component is known for. Security Parts stocks the Von Duprin 575/2 with same-day shipping on stocked components, full series compatibility documentation on the product page, and direct support for pre-order verification at 845-935-0301. Order by confirmed configuration, not by description, and the installation is right the first time.

 

About the Author

This guide is published by the commercial door hardware team at SecurityParts.com, a supplier of OEM Von Duprin, Schlage, LCN, Falcon, and Detex parts since 2001. All part numbers, series compatibility information, and specifications are verified against live SecurityParts.com product pages and official Von Duprin documentation. For Von Duprin 575/2 ordering and pre-order compatibility support, call 845-935-0301 or visit the SecurityParts.com contact page.

 

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts

Blog|Security Parts